contract documents for portsmouth commercial fish pier: … · 2020. 8. 3. · portsmouth...

55 International Drive Portsmouth, NH 03801

(603) 436-8500 FAX (603) 436-2780

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR

Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier: Bulkhead Rehabilitation Portsmouth, New Hampshire

Prepared By:

Appledore Marine Engineering, LLC 600 State Street, Suite E Portsmouth, NH 03801

June 2020 NON TRANSFERABLE: NOTE: PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ON THIS PROJECT CANNOT BE TRANSFERRED TO ANY OTHER FIRM OR ORGANIZATION FOR THE PURPOSE OF SUBMITTING A BID AS A GENERAL CONTRACTOR WITHOUT THE KNOWLEDGE AND APPROVAL OF THE PEASE DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY – DIVISION OF PORTS AND HARBORS. BASE BID

$ Numerical

$ Written Word Amount BID OPTION

$ Numerical

$ Written Word Amount

Pease Development Authority – Division of Ports & Harbors PORTSMOUTH COMMERCIAL FISH PIER

BULKHEAD REHABILITATION Portsmouth, New Hampshire

PROJECT DIRECTORY

Owner: Geno Marconi, Director Pease Development Authority Division of Ports & Harbors 555 Market Street Portsmouth, New Hampshire 03801 (603) 436-8500 Fax. (603) 436-2780 [email protected] Engineer: Noah J. Elwood, P.E. Appledore Marine Engineering, LLC 600 State Street, Suite E Portsmouth, New Hampshire 03801 (603) 766-1870 Fax. (603) 509-3820 [email protected]



INDEX FOR CONTRACT DOCUMENTS - SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 0 – BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Section 00100 Notice to Contractors Section 00200 Instructions to Bidders Section 00250 Special Conditions Section 00300 Contractor’s Bid Form Section 00520 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Section 00700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions Statement of Qualifications Notice of Award Form Notice to Proceed Form General Contractor Release Form Subcontractors and All Material Suppliers Waiver of Lien Form Performance Bond Payment Bond Form Application for Payment Form

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 11 00 Summary of Work Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions Section 01 32 01.00 10 Project Schedule Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 26 Safety Requirements Section 01 35 30.01 Safety, Health, And Environmental Protection Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

Section 02 41 00 Demolition Section 02 81 00 Transportation and Disposal of Hazardous Materials

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

Section 03 31 29 Marine Concrete

DIVISION 05 – METALS

Section 05 05 23 Welding, Structural Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Section 05 30 00.01 Mooring Hardware

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

Section 06 13 33 Timberwork



DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

Section 09 97 13.26 Coating of Steel Waterfront Structures

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

Section 26 00 00.00 20 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System Section 26 27 14.00 20 Electricity Metering Section 26 42 13.00 20 Cathodic Protection by Galvanic Anodes Section 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

Section 31 23 00.00 20 Excavation and Fill Section 31 41 16 Metal Sheet Piling Section 31 62 16.16 Steel Pipe Piles Section 31 62 19.13 Timber Marine Piles

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

Section 32 12 17.01 Bituminous Pavement

DIVISION 35 – WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

Section 35 51 13.00 22 Timber Floating Dock

Appendix A Minimum Requirements for Certificates of Insurance



00100-1

SECTION 00100 – NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS

Request for Bids

Pease Development Authority – Division of Ports & Harbors Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier: Bulkhead Rehabilitation

Portsmouth, New Hampshire You are invited to submit a Lump Sum bid for the Pease Development Authority – Division of Ports & Harbors, Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier: Bulkhead Rehabilitation. Plans and specifications are available for viewing at the following locations: Dodge Reports, www.fwdodge.com, New England Construction News publication, Construction Summary of NH/ME and VT, Inc. 734 Chestnut Street, Manchester NH, Works in Progress, 20 Farrell Street, South Burlington VT 05403 and/or www.worksinprog.com. Construction Documents are also be available for reproduction at AlphaGraphics 933 Islington Street, Portsmouth, NH, telephone: 603-436-3030. A NON-REFUNDABLE reproduction fee will be charged. The proposal must be submitted on the forms enclosed. Submit bids in a sealed envelope clearly marked: “Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier: Bulkhead Rehabilitation”. Submit bids to: Geno Marconi, Director Pease Development Authority Division of Ports & Harbors 555 Market Street Portsmouth, New Hampshire 03801 no later than 2:00 P.M. (EST) on June 26, 2020; they will be publicly opened at that time. The work generally consists of the constructing a new steel sheet pile bulkhead outboard of the existing bulkhead, floating docks, utilities, and associated miscellaneous site work. The project schedule anticipates the start of construction for the Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier: Bulkhead Rehabilitation in July 2020 and Substantial Completion in April 2021. The project schedule is restricted by Port Operations and failure to achieve the schedule will result in Liquidated Damages. All Bidders are required to register with Sherri Bishop in writing via e-mail to [email protected] to express interest in the project and to receive all addendums. Companies, corporations or trade names, except sole proprietorships, must be registered with the Secretary of State (Corporate Divisions, Telephone No. 603-271-3244) in order to do business with the State of New Hampshire. Bidders must submit a 5% Bid Security at Bid and must furnish a 100% payment and 100% performance security prior to execution of contract. All bids must be based on the attached Project Manual and Project Drawings.



00100-2

A pre-bid meeting is scheduled for June 9, 2020 at 9:00 AM at the site. Attendance is mandatory. To ensure safety of all on site, the following requirements must be adhered to in response to the COVID-19 pandemic:

Safety face masks must be worn at all times Exercise social distancing by remaining at least 6 feet apart from others

Anyone not abiding by these requirements will be escorted off the premises. Should a bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from the drawings or the specifications, or should be in doubt as to their meaning, the Bidder should, at once, notify Sherri Bishop who will send written instructions to all bidders. The Contract will, in general, be awarded to the lowest, responsible, qualified bidder. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, whether from responsible bidders or otherwise, and to waive any informalities in the proposal deemed to be in the best interest to the Owner. Noah Elwood, P.E. Appledore Marine Engineering, LLC 600 State Street, Suite E Portsmouth, NH 03801 Phone: 603-766-1870 Fax: 603-509-3820



00200-1

SECTION 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1. Preparation and Submission of Bids

1.1 Submission of Proposal shall be accepted as prima facie evidence that the Contractor has examined the specifications and has satisfied himself/herself as to the nature and location of the work and all other matters that could in any other way affect the work or cost thereof. Failure of the Contractor to acquaint himself/herself with all available information, including a physical survey of the proposed work, will not relieve him/her from providing a complete and usable project. Except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all material, labor, tools, equipment, transportation, superintendence, and temporary construction to execute, complete and deliver the work within the specified time.

1.2 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract

Documents. Allowances shall cover the actual cost to the Contractor of all material, equipment or services delivered to the site less applicable trade discounts. The Contractor’s costs for handling, labor, installation, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum and not in the allowances. Whenever costs are more or less than the allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.

a. The Bidder is required to bid on all alternates or on all items called for in the Proposal. The

Bidder shall set forth in the space provided the amount to be added to or deducted from the Base Bid. If an alternate price called for does not involve a change in price, the Bidder shall so indicate by writing the words “no change” in the space provided.

b. Bids shall be submitted upon the Proposal (Bid) Form furnished and shall be signed in ink. The Bidder shall specify a unit price for each item called for in the Proposal. All of the words and figures shall be in ink or typed. If a unit price or a lump sum already entered by the Bidder on the Proposal (Bid) Form is to be altered, it should be crossed out with ink, the new unit price or lump sum bid entered above or below it and initialed by the Bidder; also in ink. Bids containing conditions, omissions, unexplained erasures or alterations, or items not called for in the Proposal or irregularities of any kind may be rejected by the Director as being incomplete.

c. Each bid must contain the full business address of the Bidder and be signed by him with his usual signature. Bids by partnerships must furnish the full name of all partners and must be signed in the partnership named by one of the members of the partnership or by an authorized representative, followed by the designation of the person signing the bid. Bids by a corporation must be signed with the legal name of the corporation, followed by the name of the State of incorporation and by the signature and designation of the president, secretary or other person authorized to bind it in the matter. The name of each person signing shall also be typed or printed below the signature. A bid by a person who affixes to his signature the word “President”, “Secretary”, “Agent” or other designation, without disclosing his principal, may be held to the bid of the individual signing. When requested by the Director, satisfactory evidence of the authority of the officer signing on behalf of the corporation shall be furnished.

d. Bid with the bid guarantee shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope that shall be marked and

addressed as requested in the “Notice to Contractors.”

1.3 Each bid must be submitted on the prescribed form and must be accompanied by the statement of qualifications and the bid security.



00200-2

2. Receipt and Opening of Bids

The Pease Development Authority (herein called the Owner) invites bids on the form attached hereto, all blanks of which must be appropriately filled in. Bids will be received by the Owner at the Pease Development Authority, 55 International Drive, Pease International Tradeport, Portsmouth, New Hampshire no later than date and time set forth in Notice to Contractors. The envelope containing the bid must be sealed, addressed and designated on the outside envelope as: “Bid Documents Submitted by (contractor’s Name) Pease Development Authority – Division of Ports & Harbors – Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier: Bulkhead Rehabilitation – Attn: Engineering Department.” The Owner may consider informal any bid not prepared and submitted in accordance with the provisions herein and may waive informality or reject any and all bids. Any bid may be withdrawn prior to the above scheduled time for opening or authorized postponement thereof. Any bid received after the time and date specified shall not be considered. No Contractor may withdraw a bid within 30 calendar days after the actual date of the opening thereof or after Notice of Intent to Award is issued. Bids will be opened publicly at the time and place stated in the Notice to Contractors. The officer, whose duty is to open them, will decide when the specified time has arrived and no bid received or presented thereafter will be considered. No responsibility or liability will be attached to any officer for the premature opening of a bid not properly addressed and identified. At the time fixed for the opening of bids, their contents will be made public for the information of Bidders and other persons interested who may be present, either in person or by a representative.

3. Qualifications

Each contractor shall submit his/her qualifications to the Owner on the form provided hereinafter entitled “Statement of Qualifications.” The form must be delivered to the Owner with the bid. The Owner reserves the right to reject the bid of any Contractor who has failed to submit his/her qualifications.

4. Bid Guaranty Bid Security

Each bid must be accompanied by a certified check, a bid bond, or a binding letter of credit, duly executed by the Contractor as principal and having as surety thereon a surety company approved by the Owner, in the amount of 5% of the proposed amount. The bid bond shall be executed or countersigned for the surety of a person who has current power of attorney for the surety. Certified checks shall be made payable to the “Pease Development Authority – Division of Ports and Harbors”. The Bidder will not withdraw his bid for a period of thirty (30) days after the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids. If the bid is accepted, the Bidder(s) will enter into a formal Contract with the Authority in accordance with the Form of Agreement and the required Contract Bond will be given. The successful Bidder, at the time of the execution of the Contract, must deposit with the Director surety in the sum equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the amount of the Contract. The Bid Security must be written by a Company licensed to do business in New Hampshire at the time the policy is issued. In addition, the Company issuing the bond shall be listed on the current list of “Surety Companies Acceptable on Federal Bonds” as published by the Treasury, Financial Management Services, Circular Number 570. In the event the withdrawal of said bid within said period, or the failure to enter into said Contract and give said Bond within five (5) days after he has received notice of the acceptance of his bid, the Bidder shall be liable to the Authority for the full amount of the bid guarantee as representing the damage because of the default of the Bidder in any particular thereof. The Bid Security and checks



00200-3

shall be returned to all except the four (4) lowest bidders within three (3) days after the formal opening of bids. The remaining Bid Securities and checks will be returned within forty-eight (48) hours after the Director and the accepted bidder has executed the Contract and Bond and the foregoing have been approved by the Authority. If the required Contract and Bond have not been executed within sixty (60) days after the date of the opening of bids, then the Bond or check of any Bidder will be returned upon his request, provided he has not been notified of the acceptance of bid prior to the date of such request.

5. Examination of Contract Documents and Site

5.1 Before submitting a Bid, the Bidder must (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) familiarize himself with Federal, State and local laws, permits, ordinances, rules and regulations, security requirements and permits that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work; and (c) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents; further it is recommended to visit the site to familiarize himself with local conditions that may in any manner affect construction progress or performance of the Work.

5.2 The areas upon which the Work is to be performed are identified in the Specifications and

Drawings. 5.3 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the Bidder that the

Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the Work.

5.4 The Contractor is advised to pay particular attention to the Special Conditions (Section 00250)

of the Specifications. The Special Conditions reflect changes to other Sections of the Specifications, which either clarify or change the requirements of the standard sections.

5.5 The Contractor shall be responsible that all of his Subcontractors are informed as to the scope

and intent of the Special Conditions contained in the Specifications. 6. Interpretations

All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents shall be submitted to the Engineer in writing. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.

7. Contract Time

The number of days within which, or the date by which, the Work is to be completed (the Contract Time) is set forth in the Special Conditions and will be included in the Agreements.

8. Bid Form

8.1 The Bid Form is attached hereto. 8.2 The Bid Form must be completed clearly in ink or by typewriter. The bid price on the form must

be stated in numerals and written in words. 8.3 Bids must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or other

corporate office accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the signature.

8.4 All names must be typed or printed below the signature.



00200-4

8.5 The Bid Form shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all addenda (the numbers of which shall be filled in on the Standard Form of Agreement).

9. Award of Contract

9.1 The contract will be awarded as soon as possible to the lowest responsible Bidder on the basis of Bid Lump Sum Price/Lump Sum Grand Total as applicable.

9.2 The Director reserves the right to waive any informality in bids received, if in the best interest of

the Owner and the State of New Hampshire. 9.3 Each Bidder shall be prepared, if so requested by the Director, to present evidence of his

experience, qualifications, and financial ability to carry out the terms of the Contract. 10. Signing of Agreement

Contractor shall sign and deliver at least three (3) counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement within two (2) days after receiving a written Notice of Award and said agreement with all other contract documents attached. Within two (2) days thereafter, Owner will deliver one (1) fully signed counterpart to Contractor with a Notice to Proceed.



00250-1

SECTION 00250 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS

1. Commencement of Work

a. The Contractor shall be given a Notice of Award at least 30 calendar days in advance of issuing the Notice to Proceed.

b. The Contractor shall be prepared to commence work upon issuance of the Notice to Proceed.

2. Completion of Work

a. The Owner shall remove all materials from the Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier Bulkhead Rehabilitation work areas commencing with the date of the Notice to Proceed and all work shall be Substantially Completed by April 1, 2021. Work shall be Finally Completed by April 30, 2021.

b. If the Contractor fails to complete all of the work or sections of the Project, if sections are indicated, within the time specified in the Contract or within any additional time allowed for each working day if the Contract specified a calendar date, or for each working day if the Contract is written on a working day basis, the sum given in the schedule below will be deducted from any money due to the Contractor. This deduction will be made, not as a penalty, but as fixed, agreed liquidated damages for inconvenience to the State and for reimbursing the Authority, the cost of the Administration of the Contract, including engineering and inspection. Should the amount of money otherwise due to the Contractor be less than the amount of such liquidated damages, the Contractor and his Surety shall be liable to the State for such deficiency.

c. Permitting the Contractor to continue and finish the work after the time fixed for its completion shall in no way operate as a waiver on the part of the State of any of its rights under the Contract. When the final acceptance has been duly made by the Owner/Engineer, any liquidated damage charges shall end.

The fixed, agreed, liquidated damages shall be assessed in accordance with the following schedule:

ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT AMOUNT OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES From More Than To and Including Per Working Day 0 25,000 63.00 25,000 50,000 105.00 50,000 100,000 154.00 100,000 500,000 210.00 500,000 1,000,000 315.00 1,000,000 2,000,000 420.00 2,000,000 5,000,000 630.00 5,000,000 10,000,000 840.00 10,000,000 and above 980.00

3. Contractor's Emergency Services

The Contractor must make satisfactory arrangements with the Owner to service emergencies or complaints which may occur at night, over the weekend, or when the job is shut down. If it does not, the Owner may make arrangements and the cost will be charged to the Contractor. Before the final estimate is certified for payment, Contractor shall make similar arrangements to cover the guarantee period.



00250-2

4. Schedule

Contractor shall submit a work schedule for approval, to Owner and Engineer. Schedule shall be updated on a weekly basis and reviewed by the Owner.

5. Weekly Project Meeting

To enable orderly review during progress of the work and provide for a systematic discussion of problems, the Owner will conduct weekly Project Meetings with the Contractor throughout the construction period. Persons designated by the Contractor to participate in these meetings shall have all required authority to commit the Contractor to solutions agreed upon at Project Meetings.

6. Compaction Monitoring

The Contractor shall retain an independent testing firm to complete monitoring of soil compaction and submit all test results to the Owner. The monitoring firm shall be qualified to complete this work and shall be acceptable to the Owner.

7. Concrete Testing The Contractor shall retain an independent testing firm to complete field testing of concrete and submit all test results to the Owner. The testing firm shall be qualified to complete this work and shall be acceptable to the Owner.

8. Permit Agreements

All construction work related to this project shall be in strict compliance with all permits issued or soon to be issued to the Owner by Federal, State and local regulatory agencies.

9. Standard Specifications

a. All work included or ordered under this contract shall be done in conformity with the applicable provisions of the most current New Hampshire Department of Transportation “Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction” hereinafter referred to as "Standard Specifications".

b. Section 100 - "General Provisions" of the "Standard Specifications" will not apply to this Project.

c. Measurement and payment sections of the Standard Specifications are not applicable because all work is to be completed on a lump sum basis except as may be noted in the Contractors Bid Form.

d. Wherever the word "Department" or "Commissioner" is referred to in the Standard Specifications, it shall mean The Pease Development Authority, and its authorized representatives.

e. Wherever the word "Engineer" is referred to in the Standard Specifications, it shall mean The

Pease Development Authority and its authorized representatives.

f. The Standard Specifications do not fully describe the contract and are hereby modified by Supplemental Specifications. If conflicts arise between the Supplemental Specifications and the Standard Specifications, the Supplemental Specifications shall govern.



00250-3

10. Pier Access

The contractor shall control operations such that access to the Timber Pier and Floating Docks are maintained at all times during construction periods.

11. Protection of Existing Elements

The contractor shall take all precautions to protect existing elements to remain. The Contractor shall field locate the utilities within the work limits in advance of pipe and structure installation and confirm they do not conflict with the work at no additional cost to the Owner. Any conflict shall be brought to the attention of the Owner prior to proceeding with work.

12. Value Engineering

a. A Value Engineering Change Proposal (VECP) is a Contractor generated proposal submitted after the Contract Award to alter the contract in a manner that will retain the same or greater function at a lower immediate and/or future cost.

b. VECP’s shall involve alternate construction details, methods, procedures, systems, techniques

and materials. However, material changes will not be considered for materials for which three or more manufacturers have been specified as acceptable and for which acceptance will not result in a reduction in the Contract Time.

c. Prior to the formal presentation of a VECP, Contractors are required to submit a brief narrative of

the VECP to the Owner, for review, to determine the viability of pursuing the VECP. d. The Contractor may submit VECP’s at any time during the construction of the Project. e. DEFINITIONS:

1. RELATED COSTS – State cost of operations, maintenance, and logistical support

relative to the proposed change.

2. RELATED SAVINGS – State savings in cost of operation, maintenance, and logistical support relative to the proposed change.

3. ENGINEER’S EVALUATION COSTS – Costs incurred by the Engineer to evaluate the

proposal change, including, but not necessarily limited to professional engineering services, testing, and research.

f. VECP SHALL INCLUDE:

1. Detailed description and justification of VECP, including long term performance. 2. Descriptions of contract change to accommodate VECP, including specification changes. 3. Complete cost analysis of VECP:

a) Cost of modifying existing contract. b) Cost of Contractor’s implementation. c) Cost of Authority’s implementation including long term costs. d) Amount of State’s related costs.

4. Impact of VECP on contract time, if applicable. 5. History of the VECP on other projects, if applicable.



00250-4

g. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT VECP TO THE ENGINEER

Contractor may withdraw VECP, in whole or in part, at any time before acceptance by the Engineer. The Engineer shall act upon the VECP within 30 calendar days of its receipt. If rejected, the Engineer shall notify the Contractor, in writing, and give reason(s) for rejection. Contractor may not recover costs associated with development of VECP’s. If accepted, in whole or in part, the Engineer shall issue an alteration order. Said alteration order shall:

1. Accept the VECP with deductions for Engineer’s evaluation costs; and 2. Credit the contract amount by the VECP after deducting from the credit the Contractor’s

share (40%) of immediate savings and the Contractor’s share (20%) of related savings, if applicable. Engineer’s acceptance or rejection of the VECP, in whole or in part, shall be final and not subject to arbitration or appeal.

00300-1

SECTION 00300 - CONTRACTOR’S BID FORM

Project Identification: Pease Development Authority – Division of Ports & Harbors Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier: Bulkhead Rehabilitation Portsmouth, New Hampshire 1. The undersigned as BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement

with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents for the contract Price and within the Contract Time indicated in the Special Conditions and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.

2. BIDDER accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for thirty (30) days after the day of Bid opening.

3. In submitting this Bid, BIDDER represents, as more fully set forth in the Agreement, that:

a) BIDDER has examined copies of all the Bidding Documents and the Addenda noted at end of this Form.

b) BIDDER has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, Site

Locality, Owner Furnished Materials and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the Work.

c) BIDDER has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated in the Contract

Documents with respect to existing structures at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said structure. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, or similar information or data in respect of said structure are or will be required by BIDDER in order to perform and furnish the work that the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.03 of the General Conditions.

d) BIDDER has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations,

explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.

e) BIDDER has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, or discrepancies that it has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to BIDDER.

f) This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm or

corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association organization or corporation; BIDDER has not directly or indirectly included or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; BIDDER has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding; and BIDDER has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other bidder or over OWNER.

4. The bids shall be submitted in a sealed envelope. The envelope containing the bid must be designated on the outside envelope as: “Bid Documents Submitted by (contractor’s Name) Pease Development Authority – Division of Ports & Harbors – Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier: Bulkhead Rehabilitation – Attn: Engineering Department.”

5. The BIDDER agrees to furnish all materials and to do and perform all work in accordance with the plans and specifications and as generally described as follows which includes but is not limited to:

00300-2

BASE LUMP SUM BID: Execute Contract Forms and provide guarantees/bonds Furnish Insurance Certificates Submit construction schedule Submit material certifications, shop drawings and other required submittals Schedule and hold preconstruction meeting with Port Director Conform with all requirements of permits issued for the work Complete work including:

o The work includes the removal of the following items:

Top portion of the existing steel sheet pile bulkhead, including the steel cap, timber curb, and timber fender pile.

Temporary timber shoring provided to stabilize the existing bulkhead. Remove existing fuel dispenser building, concrete pad, underground, fuel lines,

underground conduits, wiring, and concrete bollards. Temporarily support the existing fuel sump during demolition for the purpose of reuse.

Remove the existing Icehouse Building. Remove and salvage the existing jib crane along the bulkhead, concrete barriers,

and steel deck plates. Remove existing pavement, Pier timber elements, and revetment as required to

drive the replacement sheet pile. Remove existing pad mounted transformer, conduits, and wiring, in coordination

with Eversource.

o Rehabilitation work includes driving sheet pile in front of the existing sheet pile, excavating behind the existing wall to install tie rod extensions and exterior wales. A concrete cap, curb, and jib crane foundations will be installed. The work will also include the installation of handrails, fender piles, floating dock, guide piles, 2 jib cranes, fuel dispenser pad, lighting, bituminous pavement, electrical utilities, fuel dispenser conduits, fuel building enclosure, security cameras, and incidental related work.

BID OPTION LUMP SUMP BID:

All above mentioned work, including additional fuel dispensing enclosure requirements as noted on sheet C-101.

00300-3

David R. Mullen, Executive Director Pease Development Authority c/o Engineering Department 55 International Drive Pease International Tradeport Portsmouth, New Hampshire 03801 Dear Sir: In accordance with the advertisement of the Pease Development Authority – Division of Ports and Harbors inviting bids for the project hereinbefore named, and in conformity with the plans and specifications on file in the offices of the Division of Ports and Harbors, I/WE hereby certify that I AM/WE ARE the only person or persons interested in this bid as principals; that it is made without collusion with any person, firm or corporation, that an examination has been made of the plans and specifications and of the site of the work, and proposed to furnish all necessary machinery, equipment, tools and labor, and to furnish all materials specified in the manner and at the time prescribed at the following lump sum prices: Proposal of:_____________________________________________________________ Address:________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ LUMP SUM BASE BID TOTAL $ $ Numerical

$ Written Word Amount LUMP SUM BID OPTION TOTAL $ $ Numerical

$ Written Word Amount NOTE: CONTRACTOR MUST ENTER AMOUNT FROM PAGE 2

OF THIS BID FORM.

00300-4

Proposal of:_____________________________________________________________ Item 1: Lump Sum Base Bid Total Basis of Bid for Item 0001 shall be the Total Amount for Item 0001 (items 1a through 1g) complete in accordance with the drawings and specifications. ______________________________________________________________________________ Item Description Estimated Quantity Unit Amount ______________________________________________________________________________

0001a Mobilization/Demobilization 1 LS $_____ 0001b Demolition 1 LS $_____ 0001c Sheet Pile Construction 1 LS $_____ 0001d Timber Floating Dock 1 LS $_____ 0001e Electrical Service Construction 1 LS $_____ 0001f Fuel Service Construction 1 LS $_____ 0001g Miscellaneous Items Required 1 LS $_____ To Complete Work 0001h Fuel Building Enclosure (Base Bid) 1 LS $_____

Total Amount for Item 0001 $______ Item 2: Lump Sum Bid Option Total Basis of Bid Option for Item 0002 shall be the Total Amount for Item 0001 (items 1a through 1g) as above and include the Total Amount including item 0002 a in accordance with the drawings and specifications. ______________________________________________________________________________ Item Description Estimated Quantity Unit Amount ______________________________________________________________________________

0002a Fuel Building Enclosure (Bid Option) 1 LS $_____

Total Amount for Item 0002 $______ The lowest qualified BIDDER’s TOTAL LUMP SUM BID plus any weighting given to unit prices may be considered at the Directors sole discretion when evaluating the bids to determine the lowest qualified bid.

00300-5

The Executive Director reserves the right to waive any and all informalities in the best interests of the Owner. It is further proposed:

1. To execute the form of contract and to complete the project on or before April 30, 2021.

2. To furnish a performance bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract award as security for the completion of the contract in accordance with the plans, specifications, and contract documents. To furnish a payment bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract award as security for payment of any/and all subcontractors and vendors. The form of bond shall be that provided for by the Authority, and the surety shall be acceptable to the Executive Director.

3. To guarantee all of the work performed under this contract to be done in accordance with the

plans, specifications, and the contract documents. Enclosed herewith, find certified check or bid security in the amount of 5% of the total amount of the Base Bid Total Price, made payable to the “Pease Development Authority – Division of Ports and Harbors”, as a proposal executed, if awarded to the undersigned. Also enclosed is a Statement of Qualifications for the Bidder. The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addenda, issued during the bidding time and states that these have been incorporated in this proposal:

Addendum Numbered:__________________________________________________

00300-6

IF A FIRM OR INDIVIDUAL Signature of Bidder_____________________________________________________________

By____________________________________________________________

Address of Bidder_____________________________________________________________

Names and Addresses of Members of the Firm: ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ Dated IF A CORPORATION Signature of Bidder_____________________________________________________________

By_____________________________________________________________

Address of Bidder_____________________________________________________________

Incorporated under the laws of the State of _______________________________________ Names of Officers: President: NAME ________________________________________________________________ Address: ______________________________________________________________________ Secretary: NAME ________________________________________________________________ Address: ______________________________________________________________________ Treasurer: NAME ________________________________________________________________ Address: ______________________________________________________________________

EJCDC C-520 Suggested Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price) Copyright 8 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.

00520-1

SUGGESTED FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR FOR

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE) THIS AGREEMENT is by and between

(Owner) and

(Contractor). Owner and Contractor, in consideration of the mutual covenants set forth herein, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 - WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows:

The work includes the removal of the following items: o Top portion of the existing steel sheet pile bulkhead, including the steel cap, timber curb,

and timber fender pile. o Temporary timber shoring provided to stabilize the existing bulkhead. o Remove existing fuel dispense building, concrete pad, sump pit, and concrete bollards. o Remove the existing Icehouse Building. o Remove and salvage the existing jib crane along the bulkhead, concrete barriers, and

steel deck plates. o Remove existing pavement, Pier timber elements, and revetment as required to drive the

replacement sheet pile. o

Rehabilitation work includes driving sheet pile in front of the existing sheet pile, excavating behind the existing wall to install tie rod extensions and exterior wales. A concrete cap, curb, and jib crane foundations will be installed. The work will also include the installation of handrails, fender piles, floating dock, guide piles, 2 jib cranes, fuel dispenser pad, lighting, bituminous pavement, electrical utilities, fuel dispenser conduits, fuel building enclosure, security cameras, and incidental related work.

1.02 The term “Contract Documents” means and includes all documents listed in the Index for Contract Documents – Specifications as well as the project Drawings. ARTICLE 2 - THE PROJECT 2.01 The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is generally described as follows: Pease Development Authority – Division of Ports & Harbors Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier Bulkhead Rehabilitation Portsmouth, New Hampshire 03801


00520-2

ARTICLE 3 - ENGINEER 3.01 The Project has been designed by Appledore Marine Engineering, LLC 600 State Street, Suite E Portsmouth, New Hampshire 03801 (Engineer), who is to act as Owner’s representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 - CONTRACT TIMES 4.01 Time of the Essence

A. All time limits for Milestones and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.

4.02 Final Completion and Final Payment

A. The Work will be Finally Completed, ready for full use, and ready for final payment on or before April 30, 2021.

4.03 Liquidated Damages

A. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 4.02 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), Contractor shall pay Owner According to Schedule listed in Section 00250 (2.b) for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 for Final Completion until the Work is complete and ready for final payment.

ARTICLE 5 - CONTRACT PRICE 5.01 Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents an amount in current funds equal to the sum of the amounts determined pursuant to Paragraph 5.01.A below:

A. For all Work, at the prices stated in Contractor’s Bid, attached hereto as an exhibit. ARTICLE 6 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES 6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments

A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the General Conditions. 6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage

A. Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of Contractor’s Applications for Payment on or about the 30th day of each month during performance of the Work as provided in Paragraphs 6.02.A.1 and 6.02.A.2 below. All such payments will be measured by the schedule of values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A of the General Conditions (and


00520-3

in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the General Requirements: 1. Prior to Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage

indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as Engineer may determine or Owner may withhold, including but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with Paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions:

a. The schedule of values and project schedule will be used as the basis for determining

contract earnings during each update period and therefore the amount of each progress payment. Lack of an approved schedule update will result in the inability of the Owner to evaluate contract earned value for the purposes of payment. Failure of the Contractor to provide all required information will result in the disapproval of the preliminary, initial and subsequent schedule updates. Activity cost loading shall be reasonable, as determined by the Owner.

b. 90 percent of Work completed (with the balance being retainage). If the Work has been 50 percent completed as determined by Engineer, and if the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, Owner, on recommendation of Engineer, may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will be no additional retainage; and

c. 90 percent of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with the balance being retainage).

6.03 Final Payment

A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by Engineer as provided in said Paragraph 14.07. ARTICLE 7 - INTEREST 7.01 All moneys not paid when due as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions shall bear interest at the rate of 0 percent per annum. ARTICLE 8 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS 8.01 In order to induce Owner to enter into this Agreement Contractor makes the following representations:

A. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents.

B. Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

C. Contractor is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

D. Contractor has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for doing so) all additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, including any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.


00520-4

E. Contractor does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.

F. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents.

G. Contractor has correlated the information known to Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents.

H. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.

I. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. ARTICLE 10 - MISCELLANEOUS 10.01 Terms

A. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. In the event of conflict between General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions, Owner may rely on and Contractor will be bound by the Supplementary Conditions. 10.02 Assignment of Contract

A. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 10.03 Successors and Assigns

A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 10.04 Severability

A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.


00520-5

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement in duplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to Owner and Contractor. All portions of the Contract Documents have been signed or identified by Owner and Contractor or on their behalf. This Agreement will be effective on , (which is the Effective Date of the Agreement). OWNER: CONTRACTOR: By: By: Title: Title:

[CORPORATE SEAL] [CORPORATE SEAL] Attest: Attest

:

Title: Title: Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices: License

No.:

(If Owner is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign. If Owner is a public body, attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution or other documents authorizing execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.)

(Where applicable)

Agent for service or process:

(If Contractor is a corporation or a partnership, attach

evidence of authority to sign.)

EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.

00700 – 1

1

This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the Controlling Law.

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS

OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Prepared by

ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE

and

Issued and Published Jointly By

PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE a practice division of the

NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS ___________________

AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES

___________________

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS

This document has been approved and endorsed by

The Associated General Contractors of America

Construction Specifications Institute


00700 – 2

2

Copyright ©2002

National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314

American Council of Engineering Companies

1015 15th Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20005

American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400

These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Nos. C-520 or C-525 (2002 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the EJCDC Construction Documents, General and Instructions (No. C-001) (2002 Edition). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (No. C-800) (2002 Edition).


00700 - 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY .............................................................................................................. 6

1.01 Defined Terms .......................................................................................................................................................... 6 1.02 Terminology ............................................................................................................................................................. 8

ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS ............................................................................................................................... 9 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ......................................................................................................... 9 2.02 Copies of Documents ............................................................................................................................................... 9 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ........................................................................................... 9 2.04 Starting the Work ..................................................................................................................................................... 9 2.05 Before Starting Construction ................................................................................................................................... 9 2.06 Preconstruction Conference .................................................................................................................................. 10 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ............................................................................................................................. 10

ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE ...................................................................... 10 3.01 Intent ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10 3.02 Reference Standards .............................................................................................................................................. 10 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ................................................................................................................ 11 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .............................................................................................. 11 3.05 Reuse of Documents ............................................................................................................................................... 11 3.06 Electronic Data ...................................................................................................................................................... 11

ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS ................................................................................................ 12

4.01 Availability of Lands .............................................................................................................................................. 12 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 12 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ........................................................................................................ 12 4.04 Underground Facilities .......................................................................................................................................... 13 4.05 Reference Points .................................................................................................................................................... 14 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site ......................................................................................................... 14

ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................................................. 15 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .............................................................................................................. 15 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers .............................................................................................................................. 15 5.03 Certificates of Insurance ........................................................................................................................................ 15 5.04 Contractor’s Liability Insurance ........................................................................................................................... 16 5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance .................................................................................................................................. 17 5.06 Property Insurance –Not Applicable ..................................................................................................................... 17 5.07 Waiver of Rights ..................................................................................................................................................... 17 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds .................................................................................................... 18 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace ....................................................................................... 18 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer ..................................................................................... 18

ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................................................................................... 19 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence .......................................................................................................................... 19 6.02 Labor; Working Hours ........................................................................................................................................... 19 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment....................................................................................................................... 19 6.04 Progress Schedule .................................................................................................................................................. 19 6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” ................................................................................................................................. 19 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ............................................................................................... 21 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ...................................................................................................................................... 22 6.08 Permits ................................................................................................................................................................... 22 6.09 Laws and Regulations ............................................................................................................................................ 22 6.10 Taxes ...................................................................................................................................................................... 22 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas ................................................................................................................................... 23 6.12 Record Documents ................................................................................................................................................. 23 6.13 Safety and Protection ............................................................................................................................................. 23 6.14 Safety Representative ............................................................................................................................................. 24 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs ........................................................................................................................ 24 6.16 Emergencies ........................................................................................................................................................... 24 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples ................................................................................................................................. 24


00700 - 4

6.18 Continuing the Work .............................................................................................................................................. 25 6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee .................................................................................................... 25 6.20 Indemnification ...................................................................................................................................................... 26 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services .......................................................................................................... 26

ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE ......................................................................................................................... 26 7.01 Related Work at Site ............................................................................................................................................... 26 7.02 Coordination .......................................................................................................................................................... 27 7.03 Legal Relationships ................................................................................................................................................ 27

ARTICLE 8 - OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES ...................................................................................................................... 27 8.01 Communications to Contractor .............................................................................................................................. 27 8.02 Replacement of Engineer ....................................................................................................................................... 27 8.03 Furnish Data .......................................................................................................................................................... 27 8.04 Pay When Due ....................................................................................................................................................... 27 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests .............................................................................................................. 28 8.06 Insurance ............................................................................................................................................................... 28 8.07 Change Orders ....................................................................................................................................................... 28 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals .......................................................................................................................... 28 8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................................... 28 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ................................................................................................ 28 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ..................................................................................................................... 28

ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................... 28 9.01 Owner’s Representative ......................................................................................................................................... 28 9.02 Visits to Site ........................................................................................................................................................... 28 9.03 Project Representative ........................................................................................................................................... 28 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work .............................................................................................................................. 29 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work ....................................................................................................................................... 29 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments ..................................................................................................... 29 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work ...................................................................................................................... 29 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................................................... 29 9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities ..................................................................................... 29

ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS ........................................................................................................... 30 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................................................... 30 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ....................................................................................................................... 30 10.03 Execution of Change Orders .................................................................................................................................. 30 10.04 Notification to Surety ............................................................................................................................................. 30 10.05 Claims .................................................................................................................................................................... 30

ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................. 31 11.01 Cost of the Work .................................................................................................................................................... 31 11.02 Allowances ............................................................................................................................................................. 33 11.03 Unit Price Work ..................................................................................................................................................... 33

ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES ..................................................... 33 12.01 Change of Contract Price ...................................................................................................................................... 33 12.02 Change of Contract Times ..................................................................................................................................... 34 12.03 Delays .................................................................................................................................................................... 34

ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ....... 35 13.01 Notice of Defects .................................................................................................................................................... 35 13.02 Access to Work ....................................................................................................................................................... 35 13.03 Tests and Inspections ............................................................................................................................................. 35 13.04 Uncovering Work ................................................................................................................................................... 35 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work ..................................................................................................................................... 36 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ............................................................................................................. 36 13.07 Correction Period .................................................................................................................................................. 36 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ............................................................................................................................... 37 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work...................................................................................................................... 37

ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION .............................................................................. 37 14.01 Schedule of Values ................................................................................................................................................. 37 14.02 Progress Payments................................................................................................................................................. 37 14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title .............................................................................................................................. 39 14.04 Substantial Completion .......................................................................................................................................... 39 14.05 Partial Utilization .................................................................................................................................................. 40


00700 - 5

14.06 Final Inspection ..................................................................................................................................................... 40 14.07 Final Payment ........................................................................................................................................................ 40 14.08 Final Completion Delayed ..................................................................................................................................... 41 14.09 Waiver of Claims ................................................................................................................................................... 41

ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ......................................................................................... 41 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work ..................................................................................................................................... 41 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ........................................................................................................................... 41 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ............................................................................................................... 42 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate .............................................................................................................. 42

ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION ................................................................................................................................ 43 16.01 Methods and Procedures ....................................................................................................................................... 43

ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS ......................................................................................................................................... 43 17.01 Giving Notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 43 17.02 Computation of Times ............................................................................................................................................ 43 17.03 Cumulative Remedies ............................................................................................................................................. 43 17.04 Survival of Obligations .......................................................................................................................................... 43 17.05 Controlling Law ..................................................................................................................................................... 43 17.06 Headings ................................................................................................................................................................ 43


00700 - 6

GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda--Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement--The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Application for Payment--The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Asbestos--Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 5. Bid--The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 6. Bidder--The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner. 7. Bidding Documents--The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda). 8. Bidding Requirements--The Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, bid security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements.

9. Change Order--A document recommended by Engineer which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 10. Claim--A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Contract--The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. 12. Contract Documents-- Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop Drawings, other Contractor’s submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. 13. Contract Price--The moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). 14. Contract Times--The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if any, (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) com-plete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment. 15. Contractor--The individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement. 16. Cost of the Work--See Paragraph 11.01.A for definition. 17. Drawings--That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined.


00700 - 7

18. Effective Date of the Agreement--The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 19. Engineer--The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 20. Field Order--A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 21. General Requirements--Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications. The General Requirements pertain to all sections of the Specifications. 22. Hazardous Environmental Condition--The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work. 23. Hazardous Waste--The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time. 24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations--Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinanc-es, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 25. Liens--Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 26. Milestone--A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate comple-tion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 27. Notice of Award--The written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement. 28. Notice to Proceed--A written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Con-tract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents.

29. Owner--The individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. 30. PCBs--Polychlorinated biphenyls. 31. Petroleum--Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude oils. 32. Progress Schedule--A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. 33. Project--The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part. 34. Project Manual--The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 35. Radioactive Material--Source, special nucle-ar, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 36. Related Entity -- An officer, director, partner, employee, agent, consultant, or subcontractor. 37. Resident Project Representative--The autho-rized representative of Engineer who may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 38. Samples--Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 39. Schedule of Submittals--A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related construction activities.


00700 - 8

40. Schedule of Values--A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 41. Shop Drawings--All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 42. Site--Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. 43. Specifications--That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. 44. Subcontractor--An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 45. Substantial Completion--The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 46. Successful Bidder--The Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an award. 47. Supplementary Conditions--That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 48. Supplier--A manufacturer, fabricator, suppli-er, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor. 49. Underground Facilities--All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and

any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 50. Unit Price Work--Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 51. Work--The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 52. Work Change Directive--A written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 1.02 Terminology A. The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the following meaning. B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives 1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered”, “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the requirements of and information in the Contract Documents and conformance with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any


00700 - 9

duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. C. Day 1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. Defective 1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:

a. does not conform to the Contract Documents, or b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s -recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05).

E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. When “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “pro-vide” is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, “provide” is implied. F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Docu-ments, words or phrases which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning.

ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish. B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall each deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) which Contractor and Owner respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run upon issuance of the Notice to Proceed. 2.04 Starting the Work A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run. 2.05 Before Starting Construction A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: 1. a preliminary Progress Schedule; indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and 3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdi-


00700 - 10

vides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.06 Preconstruction Conference A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records. 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. 1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor. 2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all.

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Docu-ments. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be provided whether or not specifically called for at no additional cost to Owner. C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as provided in Article 9. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations 1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regula-tions in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a Supplier shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, or Engineer, or any of, their Related Entities, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake respon-sibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents.


00700 - 11

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which Contractor may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. 2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any standard, specification, manual or code, or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04. 3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambigu-ity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and:

a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, code, or instruction (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in viola-tion of such Law or Regulation).

3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents

A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work Change Directive. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: 1. A Field Order; 2. Engineer’s approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; (Subject to the provisions of Paragraph 6.17.D.3); or 3. Engineer’s written interpretation or clarification. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other individual or entity performing or furnishing all of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor, shall not: 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or Engineer’s consultants, including electronic media editions; or 2. reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaption by Engineer. B. The prohibition of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. 3.06 Electronic Data A. Copies of data furnished by Owner or Engineer to Contractor or Contractor to Owner or Engineer that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user’s sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern.


00700 - 12

B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60-day acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data’s creator. ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDI-TIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in Owner’s furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.

4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents; and 2. Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their Related Entities with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsur-face or physical condition at or contiguous to the Site that is uncovered or revealed either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any “technical data” on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or


00700 - 13

4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connec-tion therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of Owner's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contractor) of Engineer’s findings and conclusions. C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following:

a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 4.03.A; and b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03.

2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if:

a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, explo-ration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for

Contractor prior to Contractor's making such final commitment; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A.

3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, Owner and Engineer, and any of their Related Entities shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Sup-plementary Conditions: 1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for:

a. reviewing and checking all such information and data, b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, during construction, and d. the safety and protection of all such Under-ground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.

B. Not Shown or Indicated 1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable


00700 - 14

accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Under-ground Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. 2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 4.05 Reference Points A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents.

B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their Related Entities with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or re-vealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible. D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to Contractor written notice: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or


00700 - 15

Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stop-page or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 7. G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06. G shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the conse-quences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.

ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Compa-nies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of the agent’s authority to act. C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.B and 5.02. 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.03 Certificates of Insurance A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence


00700 - 16

of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain. B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase and maintain. 5.04 Contractor’s Liability Insurance A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees; 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sus-tained:

a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or b. by any other person for any other reason;

5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.

B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall: 1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supple-mentary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as addi-tional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. include completed operations insurance; 4. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor’s indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20; 5. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so provide); 6. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07; and 7. with respect to completed operations insur-ance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final payment.

a. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supple-mentary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter.


00700 - 17

5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. 5.06 Property Insurance – NOT APPLICABLE A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supple-mentary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: 1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured; 2. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all-risk” or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, (other than caused by flood) and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifi-cally required by the Supplementary Conditions; 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer; 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner; 6. include testing and startup; and 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to

each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance or additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. C. All the policies of insurance (and the certifi-cates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accor-dance with Paragraph 5.07. D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supple-mentary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser’s own expense. E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not such other insurance has been procured by Owner. 5.07 Waiver of Rights A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supple-mentary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain


00700 - 18

provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or additional insureds thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for: 1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and 2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07. C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them. 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of

Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order . B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to Owner’s exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties. 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other party's interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly. 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies,


00700 - 19

but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR’S RE-SPONSIBILITIES 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superin-tendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor’s representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications given to or received from the superintendent shall be binding on Contractor. 6.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Docu-ments. Contractor shall at all times maintain good disci-pline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will not permit the performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner’s written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor,

transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. 6.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjust-ments will comply with any provisions of the General Re-quirements applicable thereto. 2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Times may only be made by a Change Order. 6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for review under the circumstances described below.


00700 - 20

1. “Or-Equal” Items: If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an “or-equal” item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineer’s sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:

a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:

1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole, 3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and

b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:

1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times, and 2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents.

2. Substitute Items

a. If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. c. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as

supplemented in the General Requirements and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. d. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application:

1) shall certify that the proposed substi-tute item will:

a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, b) be similar in substance to that specified, and c) be suited to the same use as that specified;

2) will state:

a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will preju-dice Contractor’s achievement of Substantial Completion on time; b) whether or not use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Docu-ments (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item; and c) whether or not incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in con-nection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty;

3) will identify:

a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified , and b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services;

4) and shall contain an itemized esti-mate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change,


00700 - 21

B. Substitute Construction Methods or Proce-dures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow Engineer, in Engineer’s sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements for review by Engineer will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2. C. Engineer’s Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an approved Shop Drawing for an “or equal.” Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. E. Engineer’s Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute item so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. F. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or “or-equal” at Contractor’s expense. 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcon-tractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as a replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor,

Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, Owner’s acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reason-able objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall consti-tute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject defective Work. C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity, nor 2. shall anything in the Contract Documents create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities per-forming or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Engineer through Contractor.


00700 - 22

F. The divisions and sections of the Specifica-tions and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcon-tractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appro-priate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as an additional insured on the property insurance provided in Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, and Engineer,, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain the same. 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of

any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.08 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supple-mentary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. 6.09 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applica-ble to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work. However, it shall not be Contractor’s primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 6.10 Taxes A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work.


00700 - 23

6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 1. Contractor shall confine construction equip-ment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the com-pletion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.

6.12 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engi-neer for Owner. 6.13 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precau-tions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. C. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Draw-ings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or , or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be


00700 - 24

liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). D. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.14 Safety Representative A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordi-nating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.16 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protec-tion of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accor-dance with the acceptable Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require. 1. Shop Drawings

a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements.

b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D.

2. Samples: Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accor-dance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals.

a. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications. b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D.

B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals , any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. Submittal Procedures 1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified:

a. all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; b. the suitability of all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; c. all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; and d. shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the


00700 - 25

requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.

2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review and approval of that submittal. 3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations, that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop Drawing’s or Sample Submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submit-ted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. D. Engineer’s Review 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Docu-ments. 2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of con-struction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 3. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1. E. Resubmittal Procedures 1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of cor-rected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required,

new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. 6.18 Continuing the Work A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its Related Entities shall be entitled to rely on representation of Contractor’s warranty and guarantee. B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Sub-contractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. observations by Engineer; 2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; 3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; 5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptabil-ity by Engineer;


00700 - 26

6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 7. any correction of defective Work by Owner. 6.20 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable . B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, partners, or employees by any employ-ee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of: 1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve, maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or 2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services

A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to Engineer. C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 6.17.D.1. E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 7.01 Related Work at Site A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owner’s employees, or via other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by


00700 - 27

utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Con-tract Documents, then: 1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and 2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, proper and safe access to the Site, a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Condi-tions: 1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified;

2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 3. the extent of such authority and responsibili-ties will be provided. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. 7.03 Legal Relationships A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of Owner. B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractor’s actions or inactions. C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of Contractor’s action or inactions. ARTICLE 8 - OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. 8.02 Replacement of Engineer A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer. 8.03 Furnish Data A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. 8.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.C and 14.07.C.


00700 - 28

8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner’s duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized by Engineer in preparing the Contract Documents. 8.06 Insurance A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, in respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insur-ance are set forth in Article 5. 8.07 Change Orders A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03. 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03.B. 8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undis-closed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 4.06. 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. If and to the extent Owner has agreed to furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents, Owner’s responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions.

ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 Owner’s Representative A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and responsi-bilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and will not be changed without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.02 Visits to Site A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at inter-vals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer's visits or observations of Contractor's Work Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 9.03 Project Representative A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as


00700 - 29

provided in Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Docu-ments. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Owner or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments A. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see Paragraph 6.17. B. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, see Paragraph 6.21. C. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. D. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work

A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters between Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 30 days of the event giving rise to the question B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written decision on the issue referred. If Owner or Contractor believe that any such decision entitles them to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The date of Engineer’s decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced for the purposes of Paragraph 10.05.B. C. Engineer’s written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. 9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other


00700 - 30

individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be respon-sible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the require-ments of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsi-bility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply to, the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any. ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A.Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04.B. 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropri-ate Change Orders recommended by Engineer covering: 1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and 3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A. 10.04 Notification to Surety A. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. 10.05 Claims A. Engineer’s Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies


00700 - 31

either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Claims. B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim, shall be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant’s last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). C. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any, take one of the following actions in writing: 1. deny the Claim in whole or in part, 2. approve the Claim, or 3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial. D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. E. Engineer’s written action under Paragraph 10.05.C or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or denial. F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 10.05.

ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 11.01 Cost of the Work A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items, and shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B. 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time at the Site. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make pay-ments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids,


00700 - 32

if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to Engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Supplemental costs including the following:

a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and mainte-nance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the perfor-mance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equip-ment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph

5.06.D), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, expresses, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.

B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attor-neys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee. 2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.


00700 - 33

5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B. C. Contractor’s Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C. D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 11.02 Allowances A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. B. Cash Allowances 1. Contractor agrees that:

a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and b. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation , overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.

C. Contingency Allowance

1. Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.

11.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 10.05 if: 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and signifi-cantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect any other item of Work; and 3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.01 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.


00700 - 34

B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by applica-tion of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or 2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or 3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C). C. Contractor’s Fee: The Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work:

a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor’s fee shall be 15 percent; b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent; c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraph 12.01.C.2.a is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor; d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4, 11.01.A.5, and 11.01.B;

e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive.

12.02 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12. 12.03 Delays A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in Paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplat-ed by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times , or both. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and


00700 - 35

Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjustment is essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this Paragraph 12.03.C. D. Owner, Engineer and the Related Entities of each of them shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of Engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.01 Notice of Defects A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. All defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. 13.02 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspecting, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s Site safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.

B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below; 2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.04.B shall be paid as provided in said Paragraph 13.04.C; and 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Con-tract Documents. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.04 Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer’s observation and replaced at Contractor’s expense. B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for


00700 - 36

observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment. C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. D. If, the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work A. Promptly after receipt of notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).

B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. 13.07 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor’s use by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions: 1. repair such defective land or areas; or 2. correct such defective Work; or 3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work re-moved and replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications . D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such


00700 - 37

correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. E. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and, prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness) and the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner. 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, take posses-sion of Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s

representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09. ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.01 Schedule of Values A. The Schedule of Values established as provid-ed in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Applica-tion for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.02 Progress Payments A. Applications for Payments 1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another


00700 - 38

location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. 2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. B. Review of Applications 1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations on the Site of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional and on Engineer's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:

a. the Work has progressed to the point indicat-ed; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accor-dance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 9.07, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work.

3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that:

a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsi-bilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents; or b. that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor.

4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer:

a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work, or d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens.

5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because of subse-quently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because:

a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or replace-ment; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;


00700 - 39

c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.09; or d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 15.02.A.

C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Thirty days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. D. Reduction in Payment 1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer because:

a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s performance or furnish-ing of the Work; b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph 15.02.A.

2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to Owner’s satisfaction the reasons for such action. 3. If it is subsequently determined that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 14.02.C.1.

14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, , Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to Owner notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of Owner’s objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will within said 14 days execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or correct-ed) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommen-dation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer in writing prior to Engineer’s issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer’s aforesaid recommendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment.


00700 - 40

E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list. 14.05 Partial Utilization A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following condi-tions. 1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substan-tially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance. 14.06 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in

writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.07 Final Payment A. Application for Payment 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents (as provided in Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. 2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by:

a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.B.7; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; c. a list of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work.

3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien. B. Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance


00700 - 41

1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicat-ing in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for Payment and accompanying docu-mentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated damages, will become due and , will be paid by Owner to Contractor. 14.08 Final Completion Delayed A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor’s final Application for Payment (for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. 14.09 Waiver of Claims A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute:

1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in writing as still unsettled. ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjust-ment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause: 1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04); 2. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. Contractor’s disregard of the authority of Engineer; or 4. Contractor’s violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving


00700 - 42

Contractor (and surety ) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of Contractor: 1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), 2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and 3. complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient. C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C, Contractor’s services will not be terminated if Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of said notice. E. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of Paragraphs 15.02.B, and 15.02.C. 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience

A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in


00700 - 43

Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph. ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.05.E. B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above. C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineer’s action under Paragraph 10.05.C or a denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor: 1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions, or 2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process, or 3. gives written notice to the other party of their intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if:

1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or 2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 17.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regula-tions, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 17.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warran-ties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Docu-ments, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor. 17.05 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 17.06 Headings

A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions.



00800-1

SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

1. These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect.

SC-1 The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions which are defined in the Standard

General Conditions of the Construction Contract have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions.

SC-4.02 Add the following sentence to 4.02.A.2: “See Plans and Project Manual for subsurface and physical conditions.” SC-6.06 Add new paragraph immediately following 6.06.D:

6.06.D.1 OWNER or ENGINEER may furnish to any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or organization, to the extent practical, information about amounts paid to CONTRACTOR in accordance with CONTRACTOR’S Applications for Payment on account of the particular Subcontractors, Suppliers, other person’s or other organization’s work.

SC-9.08 Delete paragraph 9.08 of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in

its place: 9.08 ENGINEER will have authority to determine the actual quantities and

classifications of items of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR, and the written decisions of ENGINEER on such matters will be final, binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR and not subject to appeal (except as modified by ENGINEER to reflect changed factual conditions).

SC-14.02.B.5 Add new paragraphs immediately following 14.02.B.5:

SC-14.02.B.5e Failure to make payment to Subcontractors or Supplier or for labor or materials.

SC-14.02.B.5.f Contractor has damaged and not suitably repaired OWNERS’ or

private property. SC-14.02.B.5.g Liability for liquidated damages has been incurred by Contractor.

SC-16.01 Delete paragraph 16.01 of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

16.01 Methods and Procedures

A. Subject to the right of either party to submit a claim to a court of

competent jurisdiction in the first instance, Owner or Contractor may elect, by mutual consent, to participate in non-binding mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The non-binding mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for non-binding mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association by mutual



00800-2

agreement of the parties. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.05.E.

B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the non-binding mediation

process in good faith. The process shall be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above.

C. If the Claim is not resolved by non-binding mediation, Engineer’s action

under Paragraph 10.05.C or a denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor:

1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process

provided for in the Supplementary Conditions, or 2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another

dispute resolution process, or 3. gives written notice to the other party of their intent to submit the

claim to a court of competent jurisdiction.

2. Insurance The Contractor agrees to take out and maintain during the term of this Agreement at its expense adequate insurance coverage with an insurance company or companies acceptable to the Owner to cover the liability accepted by the Contractor in the indemnity provisions of this Agreement to limits and provisions identified in the applicable Appendix of these Contract Documents and entitled Minimum Requirements for Certificates of Insurance for Contractors/Subcontractors Working on the Property of the Pease Development Authority at Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier.

3. Indemnification

The Contractor shall indemnify, hold harmless and defend the Owner and the State of New Hampshire, their officers, board members, agents and employees (the "Indemnitees") from and against all losses, suits, claims, liabilities, penalties, fines, judgments, costs and expenses, including without limitation attorney's fees, consultants' fees and experts' fees arising out of, or in any manner predicated upon personal injury, death or property damage resulting from, related to, caused by or arising out of (or which may be claimed to arise out of) the Contractor's performance of its obligations under this Agreement; and is caused in whole or in part by any negligent or willful act or omission of the Contractor, its sub-contractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by either the Contractor or its subcontractors, or anyone for whose acts any of the foregoing may be liable. The agreements contained in the preceding sentence do not extend to claims for damages caused by gross negligence or willful misconduct of the Indemnitees without contributory fault on the part of any person, firm or corporation.

In any and all claims against the Indemnitees or any one of the Indemnitees by any employee of the Contractor, its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by an employee or subcontractor of the Contractor, or anyone for whose acts of such employees and subcontractors may be liable, the indemnification obligation shall not be limited in any way by a limitation on the amount of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefits acts. In the event that any action or proceeding is brought against the Indemnitees or any one of the Indemnitees by reason of any matter for which the Contractor has hereby agreed to indemnify, hold harmless and defend, the Contractor, upon notice from the Indemnitees or any one of them,



00800-3

covenants to resist or defend such action or proceeding with counsel acceptable to the Indemnitees or any one of them as the case may be. Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing herein shall be deemed to constitute a waiver of the sovereign immunity of the State of New Hampshire and the Owner which are hereby reserved to the State of New Hampshire and the Owner. The provisions of this indemnification shall survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement, and the Contractor's obligations hereunder shall apply whenever any one of the Indemnitees incur costs or liabilities described above.

4. Termination Without Fault

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, it is understood and agreed by the parties hereto that all obligations of the Owner hereunder, including the continuance of payments, are contingent upon the availability and continued appropriation of State funds, and in no event shall the immediately Owner be liable for payments hereunder in excess of such available or appropriated funds. In the event of a reduction, termination or failure to appropriate any or all such available funds or appropriations or a reduction of expenditure of State funds, the Owner may, by written notice to the Contractor, immediately terminate this Agreement in whole or in part in accordance with the following conditions:

A. When this Agreement, or any portion thereof, is terminated before completion of all items

of work therein, payment will be made for the actual items of work completed. Payment of items of work not completed at time of termination shall be the greater of the following amounts: (1) a percentage of completion of the particular item at time of termination of (2) such amount as shall be mutually agreed upon by the parties. No claim for loss of anticipated profits on items or units of work not completed will be allowed.

STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS

Qualifications-1

Attach this statement, fully completed, to the Bid Form and submit to the Owner on the date and time for opening of bids. All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. Where necessary, questions shall be answered on separate attached sheets. The Contractor may submit any additional information he/she desires. 1. Name of Contractor:

Contractor is: Corporation ( ) Partnership ( ) Individual ( ) 2. Permanent main office address:

Treasury Number (Employer’s Identification No.): 3. When organized: 4. If a corporation, where incorporated: 5. How many years have you been engaged in the business under your present firm or trade name? 6. General character of work performed by your company. 7. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? ( ) Yes ( ) No

If yes, where and why? 8. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? ( ) Yes ( ) No

If yes, where and why?

STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS

Qualifications-2

9. List of references (minimum of three) 10. List major equipment available for this contract. Please state Owned, Rented, or Subcontracted.

Notice of Award Dated Project: Owner: Owner's Contract No.:

Contract: Engineer's Project No.:

Bidder:

Bidder's Address: (send Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested)

You are notified that your Bid dated for the above Contract has been considered. You are the Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for (Indicate total Work, alternates or sections or Work awarded.) The Contract Price of your Contract is

Dollars ($ ). (Insert appropriate data if Unit Prices are used. Change language for Cost-Plus contracts.) copies of each of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany this Notice of Award.

sets of the Drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise made available to you immediately. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within [7] days of the date you receive this Notice of Award. 1. Deliver to the Owner [ ] fully executed counterparts of the Contract.

2. Deliver with the executed Contract the Contract security Bonds as specified in the Instructions to Bidders (Section 00200) and General Conditions (Paragraph 5.01).

3. Deliver to the Owner certificates of insurance as specified in the Supplementary Conditions (Section 0800).

4. Other conditions precedent:

Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in default, annul this Notice of Award and declare your Bid security forfeited. Within ten days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully executed counterpart of the Contract Documents. Owner

By: Authorized Signature

Title Copy to Engineer

Notice to Proceed Dated Project:

Owner: Owner's Contract No.:

Contract: Engineer's Project No.:

Contractor:

Contractor's Address: [send Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested]

Before you may start any Work at the Site, the General and Supplementary Conditions provides that you and Owner must each deliver to the other (with copies to Engineer and other identified additional insureds) certificates of insurance which each is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with the Contract Documents. Also, before you may start any Work at the Site, you must :

Submit Schedule of Values

Submit Project Schedule

Attend Preconstruction Meeting

Owner

Given by:

Authorized Signature

Title

Date

Copy to Engineer

00610-0

GENERAL CONTRACTOR

RELEASE FORM That the undersigned, upon receipt of the balance due us of $ , waive any right or rights and all lien

or claim of or right to lien under the statutes of the State of New Hampshire relating to mechanic's liens, for materials and

labor furnished under the Contract for the Pease Development Authority – Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier: Bulkhead

Rehabilitation. We certify that all bills incurred by us as the General Contractor for this project for materials and supplies

that all labor and all Contractors have been paid by us in full with the exception of the following in the amounts stated:

Names Amounts

We also certify that upon receipt of the balance due us, we will pay the foregoing amounts promptly in full.

DATE: BY: _______________________________________________________ General Contractor NOTARIZATION: ______________________________________________________________ Notary Public My Commission Expires: _______________________________________________

00610-0

SUBCONTRACTORS AND ALL MATERIAL SUPPLIERS

WAIVER OF LIEN FORM

To: Pease Development Authority – Division of Ports & Harbors

Whereas the undersigned has been engaged as a Subcontractor or as Material

Supplier by the General Contractor for the Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier:

Bulkhead Rehabilitation to furnish work, labor or materials for said Project for Pease Development Authority.

Now, therefore the undersigned, upon receipt of the balance due us of $ waive and release any and all lien

of claim of or right to lien under the Statutes of the State of New Hampshire, relating to mechanic's liens, with respect to

and on said above described premises, and the improvements thereon, and on the material, fixtures, apparatus or

machinery furnished and on the money funds, or other considerations due or to become due, the Subcontractor or

Supplier from the General Contractor and/or the Owner of said premises, on account of labor, services, material, fixtures,

or machinery heretofore furnished, or which may be furnished at any time hereafter by the undersigned, to or on account

of the said General Contractor and/or said Owner for the above described premises.

Given under the hand and seal of the undersigned, this day of , 2020.

BY: ____________________________________________________________ Subcontractor or Material Supplier NOTARIZATION: _________________________________________________ Notary Public My Commission Expires: _________________________________

00610-0

PERFORMANCE BOND

Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business): OWNER (Name and Address): CONTRACT Date: Amount: Description (Name and Location): BOND Bond Number: Date (Not earlier than Contract Date): Amount: Modifications to this Bond Form: Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms printed on the reverse side hereof, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent, or representative.

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: Signature: (Seal) (Seal) Name and Title: Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal By: Signature and Title (Attach Power of Attorney) (Space is provided below for signatures of additional parties, if required.)

Attest: Signature and Title CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: Signature: (Seal) (Seal) Name and Title: Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal By: Signature and Title (Attach Power of Attorney) Attest: Signature and Title:

EJCDC No. C-610 (2002 Edition) Originally prepared through the joint efforts of the Surety Association of America, Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee,

the Associated General Contractors of America, and the American Institute of Architects.

1. Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to Owner for the performance of the Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2. If Contractor performs the Contract, Surety and Contractor have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Paragraph 3.1. 3. If there is no Owner Default, Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after:

3.1. Owner has notified Contractor and Surety, at the addresses described in Paragraph 10 below, that Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with Contractor and Surety to be held not later than 15 days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Contract. If Owner, Contractor and Surety agree, Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and

3.2. Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated

Contractor's right to complete the Contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than 20 days after Contractor and Surety have received notice as provided in Paragraph 3.1; and

3.3. Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to:

1. Surety in accordance with the terms of the Contract;

2. Another contractor selected pursuant to Paragraph 4.3 to

perform the Contract. 4. When Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, Surety shall promptly and at Surety's expense take one of the following actions:

4.1. Arrange for Contractor, with consent of Owner, to perform and complete the Contract; or

4.2. Undertake to perform and complete the Contract itself, through its

agents or through independent contractors; or

4.3. Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by Owner and Contractor selected with Owner's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Contract, and pay to Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by Owner resulting from Contractor Default; or

4.4. Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or

obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances:

1. After investigation, determine the amount for which it may

be liable to Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to Owner; or

2. Deny liability in whole or in part and notify Owner citing reasons therefor.

5. If Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond 15 days after receipt of an additional written notice from Owner to Surety demanding that Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to Owner. If Surety proceeds as provided in Paragraph 4.4, and Owner refuses the payment tendered or Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to Owner. 6. After Owner has terminated Contractor's right to complete the Contract, and if Surety elects to act under Paragraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of Surety to Owner shall not be greater than those of Contractor under the Contract, and the responsibilities of Owner to Surety shall not be greater than those of Owner under the Contract. To a limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Contract, Surety is obligated without duplication for:

6.1. The responsibilities of Contractor for correction of defective Work and completion of the Contract;

6.2. Additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from Contractor's Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of Surety under Paragraph 4; and

6.3. Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the

Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of Contractor.

7. Surety shall not be liable to Owner or others for obligations of Contractor that are unrelated to the Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, or successors. 8. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations. 9. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the Work or part of the Work is located and shall be instituted within two years after Contractor Default or within two years after Contractor ceased working or within two years after Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 10. Notice to Surety, Owner, or Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. 11. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory requirement in the location where the Contract was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 12. Definitions.

12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by Owner in settlement of insurance or other Claims for damages to which Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of Contractor under the Contract.

12.2. Contract: The agreement between Owner and Contractor identified on

the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.

12.3. Contractor Default: Failure of Contractor, which has neither been

remedied nor waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Contract.

12.4. Owner Default: Failure of Owner, which has neither been remedied nor

waived, to pay Contractor as required by the Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof.

00615-1

PAYMENT BOND

Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.

CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business): OWNER (Name and Address): CONTRACT Date: Amount: Description (Name and Location): BOND Bond Number: Date (Not earlier than Contract Date): Amount: Modifications to this Bond Form: Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms printed on the reverse side hereof, do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent, or representative.

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: Signature: (Seal) (Seal) Name and Title: Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal By: Signature and Title (Attach Power of Attorney) (Space is provided below for signatures of additional parties, if required.)

Attest: Signature and Title CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: Signature: (Seal) (Seal) Name and Title: Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal By: Signature and Title (Attach Power of Attorney) Attest: Signature and Title:

EJCDC No. C-615 (2002 Edition) Originally prepared through the joint efforts of the Surety Association of America, Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee, the Associated General Contractors of America, the American Institute of Architects, the American Subcontractors Association, and the Associated Specialty Contractors.

00615-2

1. Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to Owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished by Claimants for use in the performance of the Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2. With respect to Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if Contractor:

2.1. Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and

2.2. Defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless Owner from all claims,

demands, liens, or suits alleging non-payment by Contractor by any person or entity who furnished labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract, provided Owner has promptly notified Contractor and Surety (at the addresses described in Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens, or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens, or suits to Contractor and Surety, and provided there is no Owner Default.

3. With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if Contractor promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due. 4. Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until:

4.1. Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with Contractor have given notice to Surety (at the addresses described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim.

4.2. Claimants who do not have a direct contract with Contractor:

1. Have furnished written notice to Contractor and sent a copy,

or notice thereof, to Owner, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials or equipment were furnished or supplied, or for whom the labor was done or performed; and

2. Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from

Contractor, or not received within 30 days of furnishing the above notice any communication from Contractor by which Contractor had indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and

3. Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a

written notice to Surety and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to Contractor.

5. If a notice by a Claimant required by Paragraph 4 is provided by Owner to Contractor or to Surety, that is sufficient compliance. 6. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at Surety's expense take the following actions:

6.1. Send an answer to that Claimant, with a copy to Owner, within 45 days after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed.

6.2. Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.

7. Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by Surety.

8. Amounts owed by Owner to Contractor under the Contract shall be used for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any performance bond. By Contractor furnishing and Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by Contractor in the performance of the Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to Owner's priority to use the funds for the completion of the Work. 9. Surety shall not be liable to Owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of Contractor that are unrelated to the Contract. Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 10. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Contract or to related Subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 11. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the Work or part of the Work is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Paragraph 4.1 or Paragraph 4.2.3, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 12. Notice to Surety, Owner, or Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the addresses shown on the signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, Owner, or Contractor, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page. 13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory requirement in the location where the Contract was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory Bond and not as a common law bond. 14. Upon request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. 15. DEFINITIONS

15.1. Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor, or with a first-tier subcontractor of Contractor, to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or rental equipment used in the Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the Work of Contractor and Contractor's Subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished.

15.2. Contract: The agreement between Owner and Contractor identified on

the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.

15.3. Owner Default: Failure of Owner, which has neither been remedied nor

waived, to pay Contractor as required by the Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof

.

FOR INFORMATION ONLY – Name, Address and Telephone Surety Agency or Broker: Owner’s Representative (engineer or other party):

EJCDC No. C-620 (2002 Edition) Page 1 of 3 Prepared by the Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Associated General Contractors of America and the Construction Specifications Institute.

Contractor’s Application For Payment No. ________ Application Period: Application Date:

To (Owner): From (Contractor): Via (Engineer)

Project: Contract:

Owner's Contract No.: Contractor's Project No.: Engineer's Project No.:

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

Change Order Summary

Approved Change Orders 1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT PRICE .......................................................................... $

Number Additions Deductions 2. Net change by Change Orders.......................................................................... $

3. CURRENT CONTRACT PRICE (Line 1 ± 2) ....................................................... $

4. TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED TO DATE

(Column F on Progress Estimate) ................................................................... $

5. RETAINAGE:

a. _____ % x $_________________ Work Completed .................................... $

b. _____ % x $_________________ Stored Material ....................................... $

c. Total Retainage (Line 5a + Line 5b) ........................................................... $

6. AMOUNT ELIGIBLE TO DATE (Line 4 - Line 5c) .............................................. $

TOTALS 7. LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS (Line 6 from prior Application) ....................... $

8. AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION .................................................................. $

NET CHANGE BY 9. BALANCE TO FINISH, PLUS RETAINAGE

CHANGE ORDERS (Column G on Progress Estimate + Line 5 above) .......................................... $

CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION

The undersigned Contractor certifies that: (1) all previous progress payments received from Owner on account of Work done under the Contract have been applied on account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations incurred in connection with Work covered by prior Applications for Payment; (2) title of all Work, materials and equipment incorporated in said Work or otherwise listed in or covered by this Application for Payment will pass to Owner at time of payment free and clear of all Liens, security interests and encumbrances (except such as are covered by a Bond acceptable to Owner indemnifying Owner against any such Liens, security interest or encumbrances); and (3) all Work covered by this Application for Payment is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not defective.

Payment of: $____________________________________________________ (Line 8 or other - attach explanation of other amount) is recommended by: _____________________________________________________ _____________________ (Engineer) (Date) Payment of: $____________________________________________________ (Line 8 or other - attach explanation of other amount) is approved by: _____________________________________________________ _____________________

(Owner) (Date) By: Date: Approved by: _____________________________________________________ _____________________

Funding Agency (if applicable) (Date)

EJCDC No. C-620 (2002 Edition) Page 2 of 3 Prepared by the Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Associated General Contractors of America and the Construction Specifications Institute.

Progress Estimate Contractor’s Application

For (contract): Application Number:

Application Period: Application Date:

A B Work Completed E F G

Item C D Total Completed % Balance to Specification Section No.

Description Scheduled Value

From Previous Application (C + D)

This Period Materials Presently Stored (not in C or D)

and Stored to Date (C + D + E)

(F) B

Finish (B - F)

Totals

EJCDC No. C-620 (2002 Edition) Page 2a of 3 Prepared by the Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Associated General Contractors of America and the Construction Specifications Institute.

Progress Estimate Contractor’s Application



A B C D E F G

Item Bid Quantity

Unit Price

Bid Value

Estimated Quantity Installed

Value Materials Presently Stored

(not in C)

Total Completed and Stored to Date (D +

E)

% (F) B

Balance to Finish (B - F)

Bid Item No. Description

Totals

205-1

Stored Material Summary Contractor's Application



A B C D E F G

Invoice No. Shop Drawing Transmittal No. Materials Description

Stored Previously Stored this Month Incorporated in Work Materials Remaining in

Storage ($) (D + E - F)

Date (Month/Year)

Amount ($)

Amount ($)

Subtotal

Date (Month/Year) Amount ($)

Totals

DIVISION 1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier Bulkhead Rehabilitation 5252

SECTION 01 11 00

SUMMARY OF WORK08/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.1.1 Project Description

1.1.1.1 Removals

The work includes the removal of the following items for the purpose of the bulkhead rehabilitation:

a. Top portions of the existing steel sheet pile bulkhead, including the steel cap, timber curb, and timber fender pile.

b. Remove the temporary timber shoring provided to stabilize the existing bulkhead.

c. Remove existing fuel dispenser building, concrete pad, underground fuel lines, underground conduits, wiring, and concrete bollards.

d. Remove the existing Icehouse Building.

e. Remove and salvage the existing jib crane along the bulkhead, concrete barriers, and steel deck plates.

f. Remove existing pavement, pier timber elements, and revetment as required to drive the replacement sheet pile.

g. Remove existing pad mounted transformer, conduits, and wiring in coordination with Eversource.

1.1.1.2 Installation

Rehabilitation work includes driving sheet pile in front of the existing sheet pile, excavating behind the existing wall to install tie rod extensions and exterior wales. A concrete cap, curb, and jib crane foundations will be installed. The work will also include the installation of handrails, fender piles, floating dock, guide piles, 2 jib cranes, fuel dispenser pad, lighting, bituminous pavement, electrical utilities, fuel dispenser conduits, fuel building enclosure, security cameras, and incidental related work.

1.1.2 Owner Provided Equipment

a. Jib Cranes

b. Fuel Point of Sale System

c. Gas Dispenser and Hose Reel

d. Diesel Dispenser and Hose Reel

SECTION 01 11 00 Page 1


1.1.3 Equipment to be Salvaged

a. Existing Jib Crane

b. Existing Concrete Barriers

c. Existing Steel Pier Deck Plates

d. Existing Icehouse CCTV cameras

e. Existing Icehouse light fixtures

1.1.4 Work Coordination

The work requires coordination between fuel, electric, and structural disciplines. Included within this contract is the installation of a replacement electrical transformer at the facility. The following tasks are summarized below. Other ancillary task are not mentioned, but are included within the work described below:

a. Replacement utility pole to be provided by Eversource.

b. Provide primary conduits from replacement utility pole to the transformer. Transformer provided by Eversource.

c. Provide, locate, and install precast concrete pad, detention trench, and site protection bollards in coordination with Eversource and Owner.

d. Provide secondary conduits and conductors from the transformer to meters provided by Eversource. Coordinate conduit runs and trenching with Eversource.

e. Coordinate all power interruptions with Owner. Power interruption(s) longer than 24 hours will not be permitted.

f. Coordinate all electrical service removals with Eversource.

Additional work under this contract includes restoring the existing fuel system to functional service. The work includes replacement of the existing fuel sump, damaged fuel lines, and re-installation of the fuel dispensers, reel, and point of sale terminal. Installation of these work items requires coordination with electrical trades to provide service to the dispensers, point of sale terminal, and sump pumps.

1.1.5 Location

The work is located at the Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier in Portsmouth, New Hampshire as indicated on the drawings.

1.2 OCCUPANCY OF PREMISES

Building(s) will be occupied during performance of work under this Contract.

Before work is started, arrange with the Owner a sequence of procedures, means of access, space for storage of materials and equipment, scheduel of utility outages,and use of approaches.



1.3 EXISTING WORK

a. Remove or alter existing work in such a manner as to prevent injury or damage to any portions of the existing work which remain.

b. Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been altered during construction operations to match existing or adjoining work, as approved by the Owner. At the completion of operations, existing work must be in a condition equal to or better than that which existed before new work started.

1.4 LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES

Obtain digging permits prior to start of excavation, and comply with Owner's requirements for locating and marking underground utilities. Verify existing utility locations indicated on contract drawings, within area of work.

Identify and mark all other utilities not managed and located by the local utility companies. Scan the construction site with Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR), electromagnetic, or sonic equipment, and mark the surface of the ground or paved surface where existing underground utilities are discovered. Verify the elevations of existing piping, utilities, and any type of underground obstruction not indicated, or specified to be removed, that is indicated or discovered during scanning, in locations to be traversed by piping, ducts, and other work to be conducted or installed.

1.4.1 Notification Prior to Excavation

Notify the Owner at least 15 days prior to starting excavation work.

1.5 SALVAGE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

Items designated on the drawings to be salvaged remain the property of the Owner. Segregate, itemize, deliver and off-load the salvaged property at the designated storage area.

The Owner may designate additional items to be salvaged which will remain the property of the Pease Development Authority - Division of Ports and Harbors.

Maintain property control records for material or equipment designated as salvage. Use a system of property control that is approved by the Owner. Store and protect salvaged materials and equipment until disposition by the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

-- End of Section --



SECTION 01 14 00

WORK RESTRICTIONS11/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

List of Contact Personnel

1.2 SPECIAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS

a. Contractor must submit a work schedule for approval to the Owner within 30 days of Notice of Award.

b. Schedule must be updated on a weekly basis and reviewed by the Owner.

c. The Timber Pier and Floating Docks will remain in operation during the entire contruction period. Conduct operations so as to cause the least possible interference with normal operations of activity.

d. Permission to interrupt any Activity roads, railroads, or utility service must be requested in writing a minimum of 15 calendar days prior to the desired date of interruption.

1.3 CONTRACTOR ACCESS AND USE OF PREMISES

1.3.1 Activity Regulations

Ensure that Contractor personnel employed on the Activity become familiar with and obey Activity regulations including safety, fire, traffic and security regulations. Keep within the limits of the work and avenues of ingress and egress. Wear hard hats in designated areas. Do not enter any restricted areas unless required to do so and until cleared for such entry. Mark Contractor equipment for identification.

1.3.1.1 Subcontractors and Personnel Contacts

Provide a list of contact personnel of the Contractor and subcontractors including addresses and telephone numbers for use in the event of an emergency. As changes occur and additional information becomes available, correct and change the information contained in previous lists.

1.3.1.2 No Smoking Policy

Smoking is prohibited except in designated smoking areas. Discarding tobacco materials other than into designated tobacco receptacles is considered littering. The Owner will identify designated smoking areas.

1.3.2 Working Hours

Regular working hours must consist of a 10 hour period, between 7 a.m. and 5



p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding Federal holidays.

1.3.3 Work Outside Regular Hours

Work outside regular working hours requires Owner approval. Make application 15 calendar days prior to such work to allow arrangements to be made by the Owner for inspecting the work in progress, giving the specific dates, hours, location, and type of work to be performed.

1.3.4 Utility Cutovers and Interruptions

a. Make utility cutovers and interruptions after normal working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, and Government holidays. Conform to procedures required in paragraph WORK OUTSIDE REGULAR HOURS.

b. Ensure that new utility lines are complete, except for the connection, before interrupting existing service.

c. Interruption to water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, telephone service, electric service, air conditioning, heating, fire alarm, compressed air, and fuel system are considered utility cutovers pursuant to the paragraph WORK OUTSIDE REGULAR HOURS.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.




SECTION 01 32 01.00 10

PROJECT SCHEDULE02/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS



Initial Project Schedule

Periodic Schedule Update

1.2 PROJECT SCHEDULER

Designate an authorized representative to be responsible for the preparation of the schedule and all required updating. The authorized representative must be experienced in scheduling construction projects similar in size and nature to this project with scheduling software that meets the requirements of this specification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Prepare for approval a Project Schedule. Show in the schedule the proposed sequence to perform the work and dates contemplated for starting and completing all schedule activities. The scheduling of the entire project is required. The scheduling of construction is the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor management personnel must actively participate in its development. Subcontractors and suppliers working on the project must also contribute in developing and maintaining an accurate Project Schedule. Provide a schedule that is a forward planning as well as a project monitoring tool.

3.2 APPROVED PROJECT SCHEDULE

Use the approved Project Schedule to measure the progress of the work and to aid in evaluating time extensions. The schedule will provide the basis for and be submitted with all progress payments. If the Contractor fails tosubmit any schedule with the progress payment, the Owner may withholdapproval of progress payments until the the required schedule is submitted.

3.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE DETAILED REQUIREMENTS

3.3.1 Level of Detail Required

Develop the Project Schedule to the appropriate level of detail to address

SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 1


major milestones and to allow for satisfactory project planning and execution. Failure to develop the Project Schedule to an appropriate level of detail will result in its disapproval.

3.3.2 Scheduled Project Completion and Activity Calendars

The schedule interval must extend from NTP date to the required contractcompletion date. The contract completion activity (End Project) mustfinish based on the required contract duration in the accepted contractproposal, as adjusted for any approved contract time extensions. The firstscheduled work period must be the day after NTP is received by theContractor. Schedule activities on a calendar to which the activitylogically belongs. Original durations must account for anticipated normaladverse weather.

3.3.3 Milestones

Milestone activities are to be used for significant project events including, but not limited to, project phasing, project start and end activities, or interim completion dates.

3.4 PROJECT SCHEDULE SUBMISSIONS

3.4.1 Initial Project Schedule Submission

Submit the Initial Project Schedule for approval within 30 calendar days after notice to proceed is issued. The schedule must demonstrate a reasonable and realistic sequence of activities which represent all work through the entire contract performance period. The Initial Project Schedule must be at a reasonable level of detail as determined by the Owner.

3.4.2 Periodic Schedule Updates

Update the Project Schedule on a regular basis. Provide a draft Periodic Schedule Update for review at the schedule update meetings as prescribed in the paragraph PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE MEETINGS. These updates will enable the Owner to assess Contractor's progress.

3.5 PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE

3.5.1 Periodic Schedule Update Meetings

Conduct periodic schedule update meetings for the purpose of reviewing the proposed Periodic Schedule Update, Narrative Report, Schedule Reports, and progress payment. Following the periodic schedule update meeting, make corrections to the draft submission.

3.5.2 Update Submission Following Progress Meeting

Submit the complete Periodic Schedule Update of the Project Schedule containing all approved progress, revisions, and adjustments, not later than 4 work days after the periodic schedule update meeting.

3.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS

Conduct progress meetings with the Owner for the purpose of jointly reviewing the actual progress of the project as compared to the as planned progress and to review planned activities. Use the current approved schedule update for the purposes of this meeting. At the progress meetings,

SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 2


address the status of RFIs, RFPs and Submittals.


SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 3


SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES08/18

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

Each submittal is to be complete and in sufficient detail to allow readydetermination of compliance with contract requirements.

Proposed deviations from the contract requirements are to be clearlyidentified. Include, within submittals, items such as: Contractor's,manufacturer's, or fabricator's drawings; descriptive literature including(but not limited to) catalog cuts, diagrams, operating charts or curves;test reports; samples; O&M manuals (including parts list); certifications; warranties; and other such required submittals.

All submittals require Owner approval and are to be scheduled and madeprior to the acquisition of the material or equipment covered thereby.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Submittal Descriptions (SD)

Submittal requirements are specified in the technical sections. Examples and descriptions of submittals identified by the Submittal Description (SD) numbers and titles follow:


Submittals that are required prior to or at the start of construction (work) or the next major phase of the construction on a multiphase contract.

Certificates Of Insurance

Surety Bonds

List Of Proposed Subcontractors

List Of Proposed Products

Construction Progress Schedule

Submittal Register

Schedule Of Prices

Health And Safety Plan

Work Plan

Quality Control (QC) plan

Environmental Protection Plan



SD-02 Shop Drawings

Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate some portion of the work.

Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in producing the product and as aids to the Contractor for integrating the product or system into the project.

Drawings prepared by or for the Contractor to show how multiple systems and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated.

SD-03 Product Data

Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and other characteristics of materials, systems or equipment for some portion of the work.

Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended product warranties.

SD-05 Design Data

Design calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to a part of work.

SD-06 Test Reports

Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a material, product or system identical to the material, product or system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified requirements. Unless specified in another section, testing must have been within three years of date of contract award for the project.

Report that includes findings of a test required to be performed on an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared for the project before shipment to job site.

Report that includes finding of a test made at the job site or on sample taken from the job site, on portion of work during or after installation.

Investigation reports

Daily logs and checklists

Final acceptance test and operational test procedure

SD-07 Certificates

Statements printed on the manufacturer's letterhead and signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material attesting that the product, system, or material meets specification requirements. Must be dated after award of project contract and clearly name the project.

Document required of Contractor, or of a manufacturer, supplier, installer or Subcontractor through Contractor. The document purpose is



to further promote the orderly progression of a portion of the work by documenting procedures, acceptability of methods, or personnel qualifications.

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or material, including special notices and (SDS)concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions.

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Data provided by the manufacturer, or the system provider, including manufacturer's help and product line documentation, necessary to maintain and install equipment, for operating and maintenance use by facility personnel.

Data required by operating and maintenance personnel for the safe and efficient operation, maintenance and repair of the item.

Data incorporated in an operations and maintenance manual or control system.

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative requirements or to establish an administrative mechanism.

Special requirements necessary to properly close out a construction contract. For example, Record Drawings and as-built drawings. Also, submittal requirements necessary to properly close out a major phase of construction on a multi-phase contract.

1.2.2 Approving Authority

Owner or designated person authorized to approve the submittal.

1.2.3 Work

As used in this section, on-site and off-site construction required by contract documents, including labor necessary to produce submittals, construction, materials, products, equipment, and systems incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction. In exception, excludes work to produce SD-01 submittals.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with this section.


Submittal Register; G

1.4 PROJECT SUBMITTAL REGISTER

A sample Project Submittal Register showing items of equipment and materials for when submittals are required by the specifications is provided as "Appendix A - Submittal Register."



1.4.1 Submittal Management

Prepare and maintain a submittal register, as the work progresses. Do not change data that is output in columns (c), (d), (e), and (f) as delivered by Owner; retain data that is output in columns (a), (g), (h), and (i) as approved. As an attachment, provide a submittal register showing items of equipment and materials for which submittals are required by the specifications. This list may not be all-inclusive and additional submittals may be required. The Owner will provide the initial submittal register in electronic format with the following fields completed, to the extent that will be required by the Owner during subsequent usage.

Column (c): Lists specification section in which submittal is required.

Column (d): Lists each submittal description (SD Number. and type, e.g., SD-02 Shop Drawings) required in each specification section.

Column (e): Lists one principal paragraph in each specification section where a material or product is specified. This listing is only to facilitate locating submitted requirements. Do not consider entries in column (e) as limiting the project requirements.

Thereafter, the Contractor is to track all submittals by maintaining a complete list, including completion of all data columns and all dates on which submittals are received by and returned by the Owner.

1.4.2 Preconstruction Use of Submittal Register

Submit the submittal register. Include the QC plan and the project schedule. Verify that all submittals required for the project are listed and add missing submittals. Coordinate and complete the following fields on the register submitted with the QC plan and the project schedule:

Column (a) Activity Number: Activity number from the project schedule.

Column (g) Contractor Submit Date: Scheduled date for the approving authority to receive submittals.

Column (h) Contractor Approval Date: Date that Contractor needs approval of submittal.

Column (i) Contractor Material: Date that Contractor needs material delivered to Contractor control.

1.4.3 Contractor Use of Submittal Register

Update the following fields in the Owner-furnished submittal register program with each submittal throughout the contract.

Column (b) Transmittal Number: List of consecutive, Contractor-assigned numbers.

Column (j) Action Code (k): Date of action used to record Contractor's review when forwarding submittals to QC.



Column (l) Date submittal transmitted.

Column (q) Date approval was received.

1.4.4 Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register

Update the following fields:

Column (b) Transmittal Number: List of consecutive, Contractor-assigned numbers.

Column (l) Date submittal was received.

Column (m) through (p) Dates of review actions.

Column (q) Date of return to Contractor.

1.4.5 Action Codes

1.4.5.1 Owner Review Action Codes

"A" - "Approved as submitted"

"AN" - "Approved as noted"

"RR" - "Disapproved as submitted"; "Revise and Resubmit"

"NR" - "Not Reviewed"

"RA" - "Receipt Acknowledged"

1.4.6 Delivery of Copies

Submit an updated electronic copy of the submittal register to the Owner with each invoice request.

1.5 VARIATIONS

Variations from contract requirements require both the Designer of Record (DOR) and Owner approval and will be considered where advantageous to the Owner.

1.5.1 Considering Variations

Specifically point out variations from contract requirements in transmittal letters. Failure to point out variations may cause the Owner to require rejection and removal of such work at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.5.2 Proposing Variations

When proposing variation, deliver a written request to the Owner, with documentation of the nature and features of the variation and why the variation is desirable and beneficial to the Owner. If lower cost is a benefit, also include an estimate of the cost savings. In addition to documentation required for variation, include the submittals required for the item. Clearly mark the proposed variation in all documentation.



1.5.3 Warranting that Variations are Compatible

When delivering a variation for approval, the Contractor warrants that this contract has been reviewed to establish that the variation, if incorporated, will be compatible with other elements of work.

1.5.4 Review Schedule Extension

In addition to the normal submittal review period, a period of 10 working days will be allowed for the Owner to consider submittals with variations.

1.6 SCHEDULING

Schedule and submit concurrently product data and shop drawings covering component items forming a system or items that are interrelated. Submit pertinent certifications at the same time. No delay damages or time extensions will be allowed for time lost in late submittals.

a. Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing, and processing of submittals with performance of work so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing. The Contractor is responsible for additional time required for Owner reviews resulting from required resubmittals. The review period for each resubmittal is the same as for the initial submittal.

b. Submittals required by the contract documents are listed on the submittal register. If a submittal is listed in the submittal register but does not pertain to the contract work, the Contractor is to include the submittal in the register and annotate it "N/A" with a brief explanation. Approval by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of supplying submittals required by the contract documents but that have been omitted from the register or marked "N/A."

c. Resubmit the submittal register and annotate it monthly with actual submission and approval dates. When all items on the register have been fully approved, no further resubmittal is required.

Owner review will be completed within 10 working days after the date of submission.

1.7 APPROVING AUTHORITY

Owner or designated representative will:

a. Note the date on which the submittal was received.

b. Review submittals for approval within the scheduling period specified and only for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with contract documents.

c. Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in paragraph REVIEW NOTATIONS and with comments and markings appropriate for the action indicated.

Upon completion of review of submittals requiring approval, stamp and date submittals. The submittals will be returned to the Contractor.



1.7.1 Review Notations

Submittals will be returned to the Contractor with the following notations:

a. Submittals marked "approved" or "accepted" authorize proceeding with the work covered.

b. Submittals marked "approved as noted" or "approved, except as noted, resubmittal not required," authorize proceeding with the work covered provided that the Contractor takes no exception to the corrections.

c. Submittals marked "not approved," "disapproved," or "revise and resubmit" indicate incomplete submittal or noncompliance with the contract requirements or design concept. Resubmit with appropriate changes. Do not proceed with work for this item until the resubmittal is approved.

d. Submittals marked "not reviewed" indicate that the submittal has been previously reviewed and approved, is not required, does not have evidence of being reviewed and approved by Contractor, or is not complete. A submittal marked "not reviewed" will be returned with an explanation of the reason it is not reviewed. Resubmit submittals returned for lack of review by Contractor or for being incomplete, with appropriate action, coordination, or change.

e. Submittals marked "receipt acknowledged" indicate that submittals have been received by the Owner. This applies only to "information-only submittals" as previously defined.

1.8 DISAPPROVED SUBMITTALS

Make corrections required by the Owner. If the Contractor considers any correction or notation on the returned submittals to constitute a change to the contract drawings or specifications, give notice to the Owner. The Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and design of connection details and the construction of work. Failure to point out variations may cause the Owner to require rejection and removal of such work at the Contractor's expense.

If changes are necessary to submittals, make such revisions and resubmit in accordance with the procedures above. No item of work requiring a submittal change is to be accomplished until the changed submittals are approved.

1.9 APPROVED SUBMITTALS

The Owner's approval of submittals is not to be construed as a complete check, and indicates only that the general method of construction, materials, detailing, and other information are satisfactory.

Approval or acceptance by the Owner for a submittal does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for meeting the contract requirements or for any error that may exist.

After submittals have been approved or accepted by the Owner, no resubmittal for the purpose of substituting materials or equipment will be considered unless accompanied by an explanation of why a substitution is necessary.



1.10 APPROVED SAMPLES

Approval of a sample is only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and is not be construed to change or modify any contract requirements. Before submitting samples, provide assurance that the materials or equipment will be available in quantities required in the project. No change or substitution will be permitted after a sample has been approved.

Match the approved samples for materials and equipment incorporated in the work. If requested, approved samples, including those that may be damaged in testing, will be returned to the Contractor, at its expense, upon completion of the contract. Unapproved samples will also be returned to the Contractor at its expense, if so requested.

Failure of any materials to pass the specified tests will be sufficient cause for refusal to consider, under this contract, any further samples of the same brand or make as that material. The Owner reserves the right to disapprove any material or equipment that has previously proved unsatisfactory in service.

Samples failing to meet contract requirements will automatically void previous approvals. Replace such materials or equipment to meet contract requirements.

1.11 STAMPS

Stamps used by the Contractor on the submittal data to certify that the submittal meets contract requiremens is to be similar to the following:

________________________________________________________________________ | CONTRACTOR | | | | (Firm Name) | | | | | | | | _____ Approved | | | | | | _____ Approved with corrections as noted on submittal data and/or | | attached sheets(s) | | | | | | | | SIGNATURE: __________________________________________________________ | | | | TITLE: ______________________________________________________________ | | | | DATE: _______________________________________________________________ | | | |________________________________________________________________________|

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.


(a) (b) (c) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)

Line

Activity #

Transmittal #

Specification Section

SD # Submittal Description Item Submitted Paragraph #

Classification: GOVT or A/E

Reviewer Submit

Approval Needed

By

Material Needed

ByAction Code

Date Of Action

Date FWD to APPR / Auth

Date RCD From CONTR

Date FWD To Other Revwr

Date RCD From Other Reviewer

Action Code

Date Of Action

Mailed To CONTR/ Date

RCD From APPR

Authority Remarks1 01 14 00 1 Preconstruction Submittals List of Contact Personnel 1.3.1.12 01 32 01.00 10 1 Preconstruction Submittals Initial Project Schedule 3.4.13 01 32 01.00 10 1 Preconstruction Submittals Periodic Schedule Update 3.5.24 01 33 00 1 Preconstruction Submittals Submittal Register 1.4 G5 01 35 26 1 Preconstruction Submittals Accident Prevention Plan (APP) 1.66 01 35 26 6 Test Reports Notifications and Reports 1.117 01 35 26 6 Test Reports Accident Reports 1.11.28 01 35 26 6 Test Reports LHE Inspection Reports 1.11.39 01 35 26 7 Certificates Crane Operators 1.5.1.3

10 01 35 26 7 Certificates Critical Lift Plan 1.6.2.111 01 35 26 7 Certificates Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) 1.712 01 35 26 7 Certificates Hot Work Permit 1.8.113 01 78 00 3 Product Data Warranty Management Plan 1.5.1

14 01 78 00 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Manuals 3.5

15 01 78 00 11 Closeout Submittals As-Built Drawings 3.116 01 78 00 11 Closeout Submittals Record Drawings 2.117 01 78 00 11 Closeout Submittals Record Drawings 3.218 01 78 00 11 Closeout Submittals Final Approved Shop Drawings 3.319 01 78 00 11 Closeout Submittals Construction Contract Specifications 3.420 02 41 00 1 Preconstruction Submittals Demolition Plan 1.2.221 02 41 00 1 Preconstruction Submittals Existing Conditions 1.122 02 81 00 1 Preconstruction Submittals Hauling Contractor 1.5.423 02 81 00 1 Preconstruction Submittals Lead Waste Management Plan 1.5.524 02 81 00 1 Preconstruction Submittals Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan 1.5.625 02 81 00 6 Test Reports Air Sampling Results 1.5.2.126 02 81 00 7 Certificates Competent Person 1.5.127 02 81 00 7 Certificates Air Sampling Professional 1.5.228 02 81 00 11 Closeout Submittals Manifests 3.329 03 31 29 2 Shop Drawings Reinforcing steel 1.6.2.130 03 31 29 2 Shop Drawings Formwork 1.6.2.231 03 31 29 2 Shop Drawings Construction joints 3.2.532 03 31 29 3 Product Data Non-shrink grout 2.2.233 03 31 29 3 Product Data Preformed joint filler 2.2.634 03 31 29 3 Product Data Materials for Curing Concrete 2.2.535 03 31 29 3 Product Data Crack Repair 3.8.436 03 31 29 5 Design Data Mixture design 1.6.137 03 31 29 5 Design Data Formwork Calculations 1.6.3.238 03 31 29 6 Test Reports Concrete mixture proportions 1.6.4.139 03 31 29 6 Test Reports Fly ash 1.6.4.240 03 31 29 6 Test Reports Natural pozzolan 1.6.4.241 03 31 29 6 Test Reports Ground iron blast-furnace slag 1.6.4.342 03 31 29 6 Test Reports Aggregates 1.6.4.443 03 31 29 6 Test Reports Admixtures 1.6.4.5

TITLE: Portsmouth Commercial Fish Pier Bulkhead Rehabilitation

SUBMITTAL REGISTERJOB NAME: 5252LOCATION:

CONTRACT NO:CONTRACTOR:

CONTRACTOR SCHEDULE DATES APPROVING AUTHORITY

(d)

CONTRACTOR ACTION

1 OF 5


Line

Activity #

Transmittal #




Reviewer Submit

Approval Needed

By

Material Needed

ByAction Code

Date Of Action


Date RCD From CONTR



Action Code

Date Of Action


RCD From APPR

Authority Remarks





(d)

CONTRACTOR ACTION

44 03 31 29 6 Test Reports Cement 1.6.4.645 03 31 29 6 Test Reports Water 1.6.4.746 03 31 29 6 Test Reports Field Quality Control 3.847 03 31 29 7 Certificates Curing concrete elements 1.6.3.1

48 03 31 29 7 Certificates Concrete placement and compaction 1.6.3.2

49 03 31 29 7 Certificates Quality assurance 1.6.3.3

50 03 31 29 7 Certificates Field testing technician and testing agency 1.6.3.4

51 03 31 29 7 Certificates Mixture designs 1.6.3.552 03 31 29 7 Certificates Batch Tickets 1.6.3.653 05 05 23.16 3 Product Data Welding Procedure Qualifications 1.4

54 05 05 23.16 3 Product Data Welder, Welding Operator, and Tacker Qualification 1.4.3

55 05 05 23.16 3 Product Data Previous Qualifications 1.4.156 05 05 23.16 3 Product Data Pre-Qualified Procedures 1.4.257 05 05 23.16 3 Product Data Welding Electrodes and Rods 2.158 05 05 23.16 6 Test Reports Weld Inspection Log 3.259 05 05 23.16 7 Certificates Certified Welding Inspector 1.4.460 05 12 00 2 Shop Drawings Fabrication Drawings 1.3.161 05 12 00 3 Product Data Non-Shrink Grout 2.5.162 05 12 00 6 Test Reports Bolts, Nuts, and Washers 2.363 05 12 00 6 Test Reports Bolt Testing Reports 3.7.1.164 05 12 00 7 Certificates Steel 2.265 05 12 00 7 Certificates Bolts, Nuts, and Washers 2.366 05 12 00 7 Certificates Galvanizing 2.667 05 30 00.01 1 Preconstruction Submittals Installation Procedures Plan 3.1.168 05 30 00.01 2 Shop Drawings Cleats 2.1.169 05 30 00.01 3 Product Data Cleats 2.1.170 05 30 00.01 3 Product Data Anchorage Hardware 2.271 05 30 00.01 3 Product Data Plates 2.272 05 30 00.01 3 Product Data Nuts and Washers 2.273 05 30 00.01 3 Product Data Grout 2.374 05 30 00.01 3 Product Data Sealants 2.475 05 30 00.01 3 Product Data Coating System Data Sheets 2.576 05 30 00.01 5 Design Data Design Calculations 1.477 05 30 00.01 6 Test Reports Anchorage Hardware 2.278 05 30 00.01 6 Test Reports Test Reports 3.2.179 05 30 00.01 6 Test Reports Laboratory Testing Results 2.680 05 30 00.01 7 Certificates Cleats 2.1.181 05 30 00.01 7 Certificates Anchorage Hardware 2.282 05 30 00.01 7 Certificates Plates 2.283 05 30 00.01 7 Certificates Nuts and Washers 2.284 05 30 00.01 7 Certificates Grout 2.3

2 OF 5


Line

Activity #

Transmittal #




Reviewer Submit

Approval Needed

By

Material Needed

ByAction Code

Date Of Action


Date RCD From CONTR



Action Code

Date Of Action


RCD From APPR

Authority Remarks





(d)

CONTRACTOR ACTION

85 05 30 00.01 7 Certificates Sealants 2.486 05 30 00.01 7 Certificates Anchor Testing Personnel 2.687 05 30 00.01 7 Certificates Testing Laboratory 2.688 06 13 33 2 Shop Drawings Timberwork 2.189 06 13 33 6 Test Reports Preservative Treatment 1.4.190 06 13 33 6 Test Reports Delivery Inspection List 1.4.391 06 13 33 7 Certificates SDS and CIS 1.4.292 06 13 33 7 Certificates Best Management Practices (BMPs) 1.4.493 09 97 13.26 3 Product Data Coal tar epoxy-polyamide 2.1.1.1

94 09 97 13.26 3 Product Data Manufacturer's recommendations and literature 3.3.2

95 09 97 13.26 7 Certificates Coal tar epoxy-polyamide 2.1.1.196 26 20 00 2 Shop Drawings Panelboards 2.1197 26 20 00 2 Shop Drawings Marking Strips 3.1.8.198 26 20 00 3 Product Data Receptacles 2.199 26 20 00 3 Product Data Circuit Breakers 2.11.3

100 26 20 00 3 Product Data Switches 2.8101 26 20 00 3 Product Data Enclosed Circuit Breakers 2.12102 26 20 00 3 Product Data Metering 2.17103 26 20 00 3 Product Data Surge Protective Devices 2.18104 26 20 00 6 Test Reports 600-volt Wiring Test 3.4.2105 26 20 00 6 Test Reports Grounding System Test 3.4.4106 26 20 00 6 Test Reports Ground-fault Receptacle Test 3.4.3107 26 20 00 6 Test Reports Phase Rotation Test 3.4.6108 26 20 00 7 Certificates Fuses 2.9

109 26 20 00 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Electrical Systems 1.5.1

110 26 20 00 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Metering 2.17

111 26 27 14.00 20 2 Shop Drawings Installation Drawings 1.4.1112 26 27 14.00 20 3 Product Data Electricity meters 2.1.4113 26 27 14.00 20 3 Product Data Current transformer 2.1.3114 26 27 14.00 20 3 Product Data Potential transformer 2.1.2115 26 27 14.00 20 3 Product Data communications 2.2116 26 27 14.00 20 3 Product Data Configuration Software 3.1.3117 26 27 14.00 20 6 Test Reports Acceptance checks and tests 3.2.1118 26 27 14.00 20 6 Test Reports System functional verification 3.2.2

119 26 27 14.00 20 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Electricity Meters and Accessories 1.5.1

120 26 27 14.00 20 11 Closeout Submittals System functional verification 3.2.2121 26 42 13.00 20 2 Shop Drawings Drawings 3.1122 26 42 13.00 20 3 Product Data Anodes 2.1123 26 42 13.00 20 11 Closeout Submittals Reports 3.2.2124 26 56 00 1 Preconstruction Submittals LED Luminaire Warranty 1.7.1125 26 56 00 1 Preconstruction Submittals Electronic Ballast Warranty 1.7.2

3 OF 5


Line

Activity #

Transmittal #




Reviewer Submit

Approval Needed

By

Material Needed

ByAction Code

Date Of Action


Date RCD From CONTR



Action Code

Date Of Action


RCD From APPR

Authority Remarks





(d)

CONTRACTOR ACTION

126 26 56 00 2 Shop Drawings Luminaire Drawings 1.5.1.1127 26 56 00 2 Shop Drawings Poles 1.5.1.2 G128 26 56 00 3 Product Data LED, Luminaires 2.2

129 26 56 00 3 Product Data Energy Star Label for LED Luminaire Product 2.2

130 26 56 00 3 Product Data Luminaire Light Sources 2.2.2

131 26 56 00 3 Product Data Luminaire Power Supply Units (Drivers) 2.2.3

132 26 56 00 3 Product Data Time Switch 2.3.2133 26 56 00 3 Product Data Photocell 2.3.1134 26 56 00 3 Product Data Steel Poles 2.4.1135 26 56 00 5 Design Data Design Data for Luminaires 1.5.2136 26 56 00 7 Certificates Luminaire Useful Life Certificate 1.7.1137 26 56 00 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Steel Poles 2.4.1138 31 23 00.00 20 6 Test Reports Borrow Site Testing 1.5139 31 23 00.00 20 6 Test Reports Fill and backfill 3.10.2.1140 31 23 00.00 20 6 Test Reports Density tests 3.10.2.2

141 31 41 16 1 Preconstruction Submittals Delivery, Storage, And Handling Plans 1.5

142 31 41 16 2 Shop Drawings Metal Sheet Piling 2.1143 31 41 16 3 Product Data Mechanical Splice 2.2144 31 41 16 3 Product Data Driving 3.2.2.2145 31 41 16 3 Product Data Pile Driving Equipment 3.2.1146 31 41 16 3 Product Data Pulling and Redriving 3.2.6147 31 41 16 6 Test Reports Materials Tests 2.4.1148 31 41 16 11 Closeout Submittals Pile Driving Record 3.4149 31 62 16.16 2 Shop Drawings Pile Placement 3.1.3150 31 62 16.16 3 Product Data Steel Pipe Piles 2.1.1151 31 62 16.16 3 Product Data Pile Driving Equipment 1.5152 31 62 16.16 3 Product Data Pile Caps 2.1.2153 31 62 16.16 3 Product Data Delivery, Storage, And Handling 1.3154 31 62 16.16 7 Certificates Contractor Qualifications 1.4155 31 62 16.16 11 Closeout Submittals Pile Installation Records 3.1.2156 31 62 19.13 3 Product Data Piles 2.1.1157 31 62 19.13 3 Product Data Pile Driving Equipment 3.1.1158 31 62 19.13 3 Product Data Pile Caps 2.1.4159 31 62 19.13 6 Test Reports Preservative Treatment 1.4.1160 31 62 19.13 6 Test Reports Delivery Inspection List 1.4.3161 31 62 19.13 7 Certificates SDS and CIS 1.4.2162 31 62 19.13 7 Certificates Best Management Practices (BMPs) 1.4.4163 31 62 19.13 11 Closeout Submittals Pile Driving Records 3.1.2.2164 32 12 17.01 5 Design Data Pavement mix design 2.2165 33 08 55 3 Product Data Sumps 2.2.1.1166 33 08 55 3 Product Data Manhole Covers 2.2.1.2

4 OF 5


Line

Activity #

Transmittal #




Reviewer Submit

Approval Needed

By

Material Needed

ByAction Code

Date Of Action


Date RCD From CONTR



Action Code

Date Of Action


RCD From APPR

Authority Remarks





(d)

CONTRACTOR ACTION

167 33 08 55 3 Product Data Product Piping 2.3.1168 33 08 55 3 Product Data Duct Piping 2.3.2169 33 08 55 6 Test Reports Line Quality Test 3.3.3

170 33 08 55 6 Test Reports Bureau of Weights and Measures a Placed In Service/Inspection Report 3.4

171 33 08 55 7 Certificates Contractor Certifications 3.6172 33 08 55 11 Closeout Submittals Closeout Documentation 3.9173 35 51 13.00 22 3 Product Data Mooring Hardware 2.5174 35 51 13.00 22 3 Product Data Fender Elements 2.6175 35 51 13.00 22 3 Product Data Pile Guide Assemblies 2.4176 35 51 13.00 22 3 Product Data Floatation Drums 2.3177 35 51 13.00 22 3 Product Data Timber Float Drawings 2.1

178 35 51 13.00 22 5 Design Data Timber Float System Design Calculations 1.5

179 35 51 13.00 22 6 Test Reports Timber preservative inspection 1.4.2180 35 51 13.00 22 6 Test Reports Delivery inspection list 1.4.3181 35 51 13.00 22 7 Certificates SDS and CIS 1.4.1182 35 51 13.00 22 7 Certificates Connection Hardware 2.2.2183 35 51 13.00 22 7 Certificates Floating Dock Manufacturer 1.4.4

5 OF 5


SECTION 01 35 26

SAFETY REQUIREMENTS11/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY PROFESSIONALS (ASSP)

ASSP A10.34 (2001; R 2012) Protection of the Public on or Adjacent to Construction Sites

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME B30.3 (2016) Tower Cranes

ASME B30.5 (2018) Mobile and Locomotive Cranes

ASME B30.8 (2015) Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks

ASME B30.9 (2018) Slings

ASME B30.20 (2018) Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices

ASME B30.22 (2016) Articulating Boom Cranes

ASME B30.26 (2015; INT Jun 2010 - Jun 2014) Rigging Hardware

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM F855 (2015) Standard Specifications for Temporary Protective Grounds to Be Used on De-energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IEEE 1048 (2003) Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines

IEEE C2 (2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017) National Electrical Safety Code

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 10 (2018; TIA 18-1) Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers

NFPA 51B (2014) Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work



NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2; TIA 17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6; TIA 17-7; TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10; TIA 17-11; TIA 17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA 17-14; TIA 17-15; TIA 17-16; TIA 17-17 ) National Electrical Code

NFPA 70E (2018; TIA 18-1; TIA 81-2) Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

NFPA 241 (2019) Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements Manual

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

29 CFR 1910.147 The Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag Out)

29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

29 CFR 1926.16 Rules of Construction

29 CFR 1926.1400 Cranes and Derricks in Construction

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Competent Person (CP)

The CP is a person designated in writing, who, through training, knowledge and experience, is capable of identifying, evaluating, and addressing existing and predictable hazards in the working environment or working conditions that are dangerous to personnel, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures with regards to such hazards.

1.2.2 Competent Person, Excavation/Trenching

A CP, Excavation/Trenching, is a person meeting the competent person requirements as defined in 29 CFR 1926, who has been designated in writing to be responsible for the immediate supervision, implementation and monitoring of the excavation/trenching program, who through training, knowledge and experience in excavation/trenching is capable of identifying, evaluating and addressing existing and potential hazards and, who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures with regard to such hazards.

1.2.3 High Risk Activities

High Risk Activities are activities that involve work at heights, crane and rigging, excavations and trenching, scaffolding, electrical work, and confined space entry.



1.2.4 High Visibility Accident

A High Visibility Accident is any mishap which may generate publicity or high visibility.

1.2.5 Load Handling Equipment (LHE)

LHE is a term used to describe cranes, hoists and all other hoisting equipment (hoisting equipment means equipment, including crane, derricks, hoists and power operated equipment used with rigging to raise, lower or horizontally move a load).

1.2.6 Medical Treatment

Medical Treatment is treatment administered by a physician or by registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even when provided by a physician or registered personnel.

1.2.7 Near Miss

A Near Miss is a mishap resulting in no personal injury and zero property damage, but given a shift in time or position, damage or injury may have occurred (e.g., a worker falls off a scaffold and is not injured; a crane swings around to move the load and narrowly misses a parked vehicle).

1.2.8 Operating Envelope

The Operating Envelope is the area surrounding any crane or load handling equipment. Inside this "envelope" is the crane, the operator, riggers and crane walkers, other personnel involved in the operation, rigging gear between the hook, the load, the crane's supporting structure (i.e. ground or rail), the load's rigging path, the lift and rigging procedure.

1.2.9 Qualified Person (QP)

The QP is a person designated in writing, who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated their ability to solve or resolve problems related to the subject matter, the work, or the project.

1.2.10 Load Handling Equipment (LHE) Accident or Load Handling Equipment Mishap

A LHE accident occurs when any one or more of the eight elements in the operating envelope fails to perform correctly during operation, including operation during maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or death; material or equipment damage; dropped load; derailment; two-blocking; overload; or collision, including unplanned contact between the load, crane, or other objects. A dropped load, derailment, two-blocking, overload and collision are considered accidents, even though no material damage or injury occurs. A component failure (e.g., motor burnout, gear tooth failure, bearing failure) is not considered an accident solely due to material or equipment damage unless the component failure results in damage to other components (e.g., dropped boom, dropped load, or roll over).



1.3 SUBMITTALS



Accident Prevention Plan (APP)

SD-06 Test Reports

Notifications and Reports

Accident Reports

LHE Inspection Reports

SD-07 Certificates

Crane Operators

Critical Lift Plan

Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)

Hot Work Permit

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this contract, comply with the most recent edition of federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work. Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria, ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirements govern.

1.5 SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES, AND MEETINGS

1.5.1 Personnel Qualifications

1.5.1.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)

The SSHO must ensure that the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.16 are met for the project. Provide a Safety oversight team that includes a minimum of one (1) Competent Person at each project site to function as the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO). The SSHO or an equally-qualified Alternate SSHO must be at the work site at all times to perform safety and occupational health management, surveillance, inspections, and implement and administer the Contractor's safety program and Accident Prevention Plan.

1.5.1.1.1 Additional Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) Requirements and Duties

The SSHO may also serve as the Quality Control Manager.

1.5.1.2 Competent Person Qualifications

Competent Persons for high risk activities include confined space, cranes



and rigging, excavation/trenching, fall protection, and electrical work. The CP for these activities must be designated in writing, and meet the requirements for the specific activity (i.e. competent person, fall protection).

The Competent Person identified in the Contractor's Safety and Health Program and accepted Accident Prevention Plan, must be on-site at all times when the work that presents the hazards associated with their professional expertise is being performed.

1.5.1.3 Crane Operators

For mobile cranes with Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacities of 50,000 pounds or greater, designate crane operators as qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators (i.e. union, a government agency, or an organization that tests and qualifies crane operators). Provide proof of current qualification.

1.5.2 Personnel Duties

1.5.2.1 Duties of the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)

The SSHO must:

a. Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection, identified hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and actual dates of corrections. Attach safety inspection logs to the Contractors' daily production report.

b. Conduct mishap investigations and complete required accident reports. Report mishaps and near misses.

c. Use and maintain OSHA's Form 300 to log work-related injuries and illnesses occurring on the project site for Prime Contractors and subcontractors, and make available to the Owner upon request. Post and maintain the Form 300A on the site Safety Bulletin Board.

d. Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site.

e. Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work meetings including preparatory meetings, and periodic in-progress meetings.

f. Review, implement and enforce accepted APP and AHAs.

g. Establish a Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Deficiency Tracking System that lists and monitors outstanding deficiencies until resolution.

h. Ensure subcontractor compliance with safety and health requirements.

i. Maintain a list of hazardous chemicals on site and their material Safety Data Sheets (SDS).

j. Maintain a weekly list of high hazard activities involving energy, equipment, excavation, entry into confined space, and elevation, and be prepared to discuss details during QC Meetings.

k. Provide and keep a record of site safety orientation and indoctrination



for Contractor employees, subcontractor employees, and site visitors.

Superintendent, QC Manager, and SSHO are subject to dismissal if the above duties are not being effectively carried out. If Superintendent, QC Manager, or SSHO are dismissed, project work will be stopped and will not be allowed to resume until a suitable replacement is approved and the above duties are again being effectively carried out.

1.5.3 Meetings

1.5.3.1 Preconstruction Conference

a. Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant role in accident prevention on the project must attend the preconstruction conference. This includes the project superintendent, Site Safety and Occupational Health officer, quality control manager, or any other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the development of the APP (including the Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs) and special plans, program and procedures associated with it).

b. Discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans, programs, procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that will be developed and implemented during the performance of the contract. This list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the conference. In addition, establish a schedule for the preparation, submittal, and review of AHAs to preclude project delays.

c. Deficiencies in the submitted APP must be corrected, and the APP re-submitted for review prior to the start of construction. Work is not permitted to begin until an APP is established that is acceptable to the Owner.

1.6 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)

A qualified person must prepare the written site-specific APP. The APP must be job-specific and address any unusual or unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written. The APP must interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health program referenced in the APP in the applicable APP element, and made site-specific. The Owner considers the Prime Contractor to be the "controlling authority" for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors. Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts, and inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention responsibilities are being carried out. The APP must be signed by an officer of the firm (Prime Contractor senior person), the individual preparing the APP, the on-site superintendent, the designated SSHO, the Contractor Quality Control Manager, and any designated Certified Safety Professional (CSP) or Certified Health Physicist (CIH). The SSHO must provide and maintain the APP and a log of signatures by each subcontractor foreman, attesting that they have read and understand the APP, and make the APP and log available on-site. If English is not the foreman's primary language, the Prime Contractor must provide an interpreter.

Submit the APP to the Owner 15 calendar days prior to the date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance. Work cannot proceed without an accepted APP. Once reviewed and accepted by the Owner, the APP and



attachments will be enforced as part of the contract. Disregarding the provisions of this contract or the accepted APP is cause for stopping of work, at the discretion of the Owner, until the matter has been rectified. Continuously review and amend the APP, as necessary, throughout the life of the contract. Changes to the accepted APP must be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Owner, project superintendent, SSHO and Quality Control Manager. Incorporate unusual or high-hazard activities not identified in the original APP as they are discovered. Should any severe hazard exposure (i.e. imminent danger) become evident, stop work in the area, secure the area, and develop a plan to remove the exposure and control the hazard. Notify the Owner within 24 hours of discovery. Eliminate and remove the hazard. In the interim, take all necessary action to restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite personnel, visitors, the public (as defined by ASSP A10.34), and the environment.

1.6.1 Names and Qualifications

a. Names and qualifications (resumes including education, training, experience and certifications) of site safety and health personnel designated to perform work on this project to include the designated Site Safety and Health Officer and other competent and qualified personnel to be used. Specify the duties of each position.

b. Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons. As a minimum, designate and submit qualifications of competent persons for each of the following major areas: excavation; scaffolding; fall protection; hazardous energy; confined space; health hazard recognition, evaluation and control of chemical, physical and biological agents; and personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection, use and maintenance.

1.6.2 Plans

1.6.2.1 Critical Lift Plan - Crane or Load Handling Equipment

Provide a signed weight handling Critical Lift Plan for the following:

a. Lifts over 75 percent of the capacity of the crane or hoist (or liftsover 50 percent of the capacity of barge mounted mobile crane's hoist) at any radius of lift.

b. Lifts involving more than one crane or hoist.

c. Lifts of personnel.

d. Lifts involving non-routine rigging and operation, sensitive equipment, or unusual safety risks.

1.6.2.1.1 Critical Lift Plan Planning and Schedule

Critical lifts require detailed planning and additional or unusual safety precautions. Develop and submit a critical lift plan 15 calendar days prior to on-site work.

1.6.2.1.2 Lifts of Personnel

For lifts of personnel, demonstrate compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1400.



1.6.2.2 Barge Mounted Mobile Crane Lift Plan

For barge mounted mobile cranes, barge stability calculationsidentifying barge list and trim based on anticipated loading; andload charts based on calculated list and trim. The amount of listand trim must be within the crane manufacturer's requirements.

1.6.2.3 Excavation Plan

Identify the safety and health aspects of excavation, and provide and prepare the plan in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.

1.6.2.4 Site Demolition Plan

Identify the safety and health aspects, and prepare in accordance with Section 02 41 00 DEMOLITION.

1.7 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)

Before beginning each activity, task or Definable Feature of Work (DFOW) involving a type of work presenting hazards not experienced in previous project operations, or where a new work crew or subcontractor is to perform the work, the Contractor(s) performing that work activity must prepare an AHA. AHAs must be developed by the Prime Contractor, subcontractor, or supplier performing the work, and provided for Prime Contractor review and approval before submitting to the Owner. AHAs must be signed by the SSHO, Superintendent, QC Manager and the subcontractor Foreman performing the work. Submit the AHA for review at least 15 working days prior to the start of each activity task, or DFOW. The Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to revise and resubmit the AHA if it fails to effectively identify the work sequences, specific anticipated hazards, site conditions, equipment, materials, personnel and the control measures to be implemented.

AHAs must identify competent persons required for phases involving high risk activities, including confined entry, crane and rigging, excavations, trenching, electrical work, fall protection, and scaffolding.

1.7.1 AHA Management

Review the AHA list periodically and update as necessary when procedures, scheduling, or hazards change. Use the AHA during daily inspections by the SSHO to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of the required safety and health controls for that work activity.

1.7.2 AHA Signature Log

Each employee performing work as part of an activity, task or DFOW must review the AHA for that work and sign a signature log specifically maintained for that AHA prior to starting work on that activity. The SSHO must maintain a signature log on site for every AHA. Provide employees whose primary language is other than English, with an interpreter to ensure a clear understanding of the AHA and its contents.



1.8 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION

1.8.1 Safety Bulletin Board

Within one calendar day(s) after commencement of work, erect a safety bulletin board at the job site. Where size, duration, or logistics of project do not facilitate a bulletin board, an alternative method, acceptable to the Owner, that is accessible and includes all mandatory information for employee and visitor review, may be deemed as meeting the requirement for a bulletin board. Additional items required to be posted include:

a. Hot work permit.

1.8.2 Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Deficiency Tracking System

Establish a SOH deficiency tracking system that lists and monitors the status of SOH deficiencies in chronological order. Use the tracking system to evaluate the effectiveness of the APP. The list must be posted on the project bulletin board and updated daily, and provide the following information:

a. Date deficiency identified;

b. Description of deficiency;

c. Name of person responsible for correcting deficiency;

d. Projected resolution date;

e. Date actually resolved.

1.9 SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS

Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project, including those listed in paragraph REFERENCES. Maintain applicable equipment manufacturer's manuals.

1.10 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT

Contractors must arrange for their own emergency medical treatment. Owner has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment.

1.11 NOTIFICATIONS and REPORTS

1.11.1 Mishap Notification

Notify the Owner as soon as practical, but no more than twenty-four hours, after any mishaps, including recordable accidents, incidents, and near misses, any report of injury, illness, or any property damage. For LHE or rigging mishaps, notify the Owner as soon as practical but not more than 4 hours after mishap. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining appropriate medical and emergency assistance and for notifying fire, law enforcement, and regulatory agencies. Immediate reporting is required for electrical mishaps, to include Arc Flash; shock; uncontrolled release of hazardous energy (includes electrical and non-electrical); load handling equipment or rigging; fall from height (any level other than same surface); and underwater diving. These mishaps must be investigated in depth to identify all causes and to recommend hazard control measures.



Within notification include Contractor name; contract title; type of contract; name of activity, installation or location where accident occurred; date and time of accident; names of personnel injured; extent of property damage, if any; extent of injury, if known, and brief description of accident (for example, type of construction equipment used and PPE used). Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until an investigation is conducted.

1.11.2 Accident Reports

a. Conduct an accident investigation for recordable injuries and illnesses, property damage, and near misses, to establish the root cause(s) of the accident. Complete the accident report and provide it to the Owner within 5 calendar days of the accident.

b. Near Misses: Near miss reports are considered positive and proactive Contractor safety management actions.

c. Conduct an accident investigation for any load handling equipment accident (including rigging accidents) to establish the root cause(s) of the accident. Complete a LHE Accident Report (Crane and Rigging Accident Report) form and provide the report to the Owner within 30 calendar days of the accident. Do not proceed with crane operations until cause is determined and corrective actions have been implemented to the satisfaction of the Owner.

1.11.3 LHE Inspection Reports

Submit LHE inspection reports required in accordance with EM 385-1-1 and as specified herein with Daily Reports of Inspections.

1.12 HOT WORK

1.12.1 Permit and Personnel Requirements

Submit and obtain a written permit prior to performing "Hot Work" (i.e. welding or cutting) or operating other flame-producing/spark producing devices, from the Portsmouth Fire Department. CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CRITERIA BEFORE A PERMIT IS ISSUED. Provide at least two 20 pound 4A:20 BC rated extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". The extinguishers must be current inspection tagged, and contain an approved safety pin and tamper resistant seal. It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any "Hot Work" done onsite. The Fire Watch must be trained in accordance with NFPA 51B and remain on-site for a minimum of one hour after completion of the task or as specified on the hot work permit.

When starting work, require personnel to familiarize themselves with the fire protection procedures and place in memory the emergency Portsmouth Fire Department phone number. REPORT ANY FIRE, NO MATTER HOW SMALL, TO THE PORTSMOUTH FIRE DEPARTMENT IMMEDIATELY.

1.12.2 Work Around Flammable Materials

Obtain permit approval from a NFPA Certified Marine Chemist for "HOT WORK" within or around flammable materials (such as fuel systems or welding/cutting on fuel pipes) or confined spaces (such as sewer wet wells, manholes, or vaults) that have the potential for flammable or explosive atmospheres.



1.13 SEVERE STORM PLAN

In the event of a severe storm warning, the Contractor must:

a. Secure outside equipment and materials and place materials that could be damaged in protected areas.

b. Check surrounding area, including roof, for loose material, equipment, debris, and other objects that could be blown away or against existing facilities.

c. Ensure that temporary erosion controls are adequate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER WORK

Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 241, the APP, the AHA, Federal and State OSHA regulations, and other related submittals and activity fire and safety regulations. The most stringent standard prevails.

PPE is governed in all areas by the nature of the work the employee is performing. Use personal hearing protection at all times in designated noise hazardous areas or when performing noise hazardous tasks. Safety glasses must be worn or carried/available on each person. Mandatory PPE includes:

a. Hard Hat

b. Long Pants

c. Appropriate Safety Shoes

d. Appropriate Class Reflective Vests

3.1.1 Worksite Communication

Employees working alone in a remote location or away from other workers must be provided an effective means of emergency communications (i.e., cellular phone, two-way radios, land-line telephones or other acceptable means). The selected communication must be readily available (easily within the immediate reach) of the employee and must be tested prior to the start of work to verify that it effectively operates in the area/environment. An employee check-in/check-out communication procedure must be developed to ensure employee safety.

3.1.2 Unforeseen Hazardous Material

If material(s) that may be hazardous to human health upon disturbance are encountered during construction operations, stop that portion of work and notify the Owner immediately. Within 14 calendar days the Owner will determine if the material is hazardous. If material is not hazardous or poses no danger, the Owner will direct the Contractor to proceed without change. If material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary



to accomplish the work, the Owner will provide direction.

3.2 FALL PROTECTION PROGRAM

Establish a fall protection program, for the protection of all employees exposed to fall hazards. Within the program include company policy, identify roles and responsibilities, education and training requirements, fall hazard identification, prevention and control measures, inspection, storage, care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and evacuation procedures.

3.3 EQUIPMENT

3.3.1 Material Handling Equipment (MHE)

a. Material handling equipment such as forklifts must not be modified with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless specifically delineated in the manufacturer's printed operating instructions. Material handling equipment fitted with personnel work platform attachments are prohibited from traveling or positioning while personnel are working on the platform.

b. The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Material Handling Equipment Operators must be trained in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910, Subpart N.

c. Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks must be licensed in accordance with OSHA.

3.3.2 Load Handling Equipment (LHE)

The following requirements apply. In exception, these requirements do not apply to commercial truck mounted and articulating boom cranes used solely to deliver material and supplies (not prefabricated components, structural steel, or components of a systems-engineered metal building) where the lift consists of moving materials and supplies from a truck or trailer to the ground; to cranes installed on mechanics trucks that are used solely in the repair of shore-based equipment; to crane that enter the activity but are not used for lifting; nor to other machines not used to lift loads suspended by rigging equipment. However, LHE accidents occurring during such operations must be reported.

a. Rigging gear must comply with OSHA, ASME B30.9 Standards safety standards.

b. Comply with the LHE manufacturer's specifications and limitations for erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the work. Perform erection under the supervision of a designated person (as defined in ASME B30.5). Perform all testing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures.

c. Comply with ASME B30.5 for mobile and locomotive cranes, ASME B30.22 for articulating boom cranes, ASME B30.3 for construction tower cranes, ASME B30.8 for floating cranes and floating derricks, ASME B30.9 for slings, ASME B30.20 for below the hook lifting devices and ASME B30.26 for rigging hardware.

d. When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines,



operators and riggers must be alert to this special hazard and follow the requirements of ASME B30.5 or ASME B30.22 as applicable.

e. Do not use crane suspended personnel work platforms (baskets) unless the Contractor proves that using any other access to the work location would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible. Do not lift personnel with a line hoist or friction crane. Additionally, submit a specific AHA for this work. Ensure the activity and AHA are thoroughly reviewed by all involved personnel.

f. Inspect, maintain, and recharge portable fire extinguishers as specified in NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.

g. All employees must keep clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended loads, except for employees required to handle the load.

h. Use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers.

i. The crane hook/block must be positioned directly over the load. Side loading of the crane is prohibited.

j. A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel access where accessible areas of the LHE's rotating superstructure poses a risk of striking, pinching or crushing personnel.

k. Maintain inspection records including shift, monthly, and annual inspections, the signature of the person performing the inspection, and the serial number or other identifier of the LHE that was inspected. Records must be available for review by the Owner.

l. Maintain written reports of operational and load testing listing the load test procedures used along with any repairs or alterations performed on the LHE. Reports must be available for review by the Owner.

m. Certify that all LHE operators have been trained in proper use of all safety devices (e.g. anti-two block devices).

n. Take steps to ensure that wind speed does not contribute to loss of control of the load during lifting operations. At wind speeds greater than 20 mph, the operator, rigger and lift supervisor must cease all crane operations, evaluate conditions and determine if the lift may proceed. Base the determination to proceed or not on wind calculations per the manufacturer and a reduction in LHE rated capacity if applicable. Include this maximum wind speed determination as part of the activity hazard analysis plan for that operation.

o. Lifts where the load weight is greater than 90 percent of the equipment's capacity are prohibited.

3.3.3 Machinery and Mechanized Equipment

a. Proof of qualifications for operator must be kept on the project site for review.

b. Manufacture specifications or owner's manual for the equipment must be on-site and reviewed for additional safety precautions or requirements that are sometimes not identified by OSHA. Incorporate such additional safety precautions or requirements into the AHAs.



3.4 EXCAVATIONS

3.4.1 Utility Locations

Provide a third party, independent, private utility locating company to positively identify underground utilities in the work area in addition to any locating service and coordinated with the utility department. Any markings made during the utility investigation must be maintained throughout the contract.

3.4.2 Utility Location Verification

Physically verify underground utility locations, including utility depth, by hand digging using wood or fiberglass handled tools when any adjacent construction work is expected to come within 3 feet of the underground system. Digging within 2 feet of a known utility must not be performed bymeans of mechanical equipment; hand digging must be used. If constructionis parallel to an existing utility expose the utility by hand digging every100 feet if parallel within 5 feet of the excavation.

3.4.3 Shoring Systems

Trench and shoring systems must be identified in the accepted safety planand AHA. Manufacture tabulated data and specifications or registeredengineer tabulated data for shoring or benching systems must be readilyavailable on-site for review. Job-made shoring or shielding must have theregistered professional engineer stamp, specifications, and tabulated data.Extreme care must be used when excavating near direct burial electricunderground cables.

3.4.4 Utilities Within and Under Concrete, Bituminous Asphalt, and Other Impervious Surfaces

Utilities located within and under concrete slabs or pier structures, bridges, parking areas, and the like, are extremely difficult to identify. Whenever contract work involves chipping, saw cutting, or core drilling through concrete, bituminous asphalt or other impervious surfaces, the existing utility location must be coordinated with utility departments in addition to location and depth verification by a third party, independent, private locating company. The third party, independent, private locating company must locate utility depth by use of Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR), X-ray, bore scope, or ultrasound prior to the start of demolition and construction. Outages to isolate utility systems must be used in circumstances where utilities are unable to be positively identified. The use of historical drawings does not alleviate the Contractor from meeting this requirement.

3.5 ELECTRICAL

3.5.1 Conduct of Electrical Work

Electrical work is to be conducted in a de-energized state unless there is no alternative method for accomplishing the work. Cables that will be cut must be positively identified and de-energized prior to performing each cut. Positive cable identification must be made prior to submitting any outage request for electrical systems. Arrangements are to be coordinated with the Owner and Utilities Company for identification. The Owner will not accept an outage request until the Contractor satisfactorily documents that the circuits have been clearly identified. Attach temporary grounds in



accordance with ASTM F855 and IEEE 1048. Perform all high voltage cable cutting remotely using hydraulic cutting tool. When racking in or live switching of circuit breakers, no additional person other than the switch operator is allowed in the space during the actual operation. Plan so that work near energized parts is minimized to the fullest extent possible. Use of electrical outages clear of any energized electrical sources is the preferred method.

When working in energized substations, only qualified electrical workers are permitted to enter. When work requires work near energized circuits as defined by NFPA 70, high voltage personnel must use personal protective equipment that includes, as a minimum, electrical hard hat, safety shoes, insulating gloves and electrical arc flash protection for personnel as required by NFPA 70E. Insulating blankets, hearing protection, and switching suits may also be required, depending on the specific job and as delineated in the Contractor's AHA. Ensure that each employee is familiar with and complies with these procedures and 29 CFR 1910.147.

3.5.2 Qualifications

Electrical work must be performed by QP personnel with verifiable credentials who are familiar with applicable code requirements. Verifiable credentials consist of State, National and Local Certifications or Licenses that a Master or Journeyman Electrician may hold, depending on work being performed, and must be identified in the appropriate AHA. Journeyman/Apprentice ratio must be in accordance with State and Local requirements applicable to where work is being performed.

3.5.3 Arc Flash

Conduct a hazard analysis/arc flash hazard analysis whenever work on or near energized parts greater than 50 volts is necessary, in accordance with NFPA 70E.

All personnel entering the identified arc flash protection boundary must be QPs and properly trained in NFPA 70E requirements and procedures. Unless permitted by NFPA 70E, no Unqualified Person is permitted to approach nearer than the Limited Approach Boundary of energized conductors and circuit parts. Training must be administered by an electrically qualified source and documented.

3.5.4 Grounding

Ground electrical circuits, equipment and enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 to provide a permanent, continuous and effective path to ground.

Check grounding circuits to ensure that the circuit between the ground and a grounded power conductor has a resistance low enough to permit sufficient current flow to allow the fuse or circuit breaker to interrupt the current.

3.5.5 Testing

Temporary electrical distribution systems and devices must be inspected,



tested and found acceptable for Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) protection, polarity, ground continuity, and ground resistance before initial use, before use after modification and at least monthly. Monthly inspections and tests must be maintained for each temporary electrical distribution system, and signed by the electrical CP or QP.

3.5.6 Portable Extension Cords

Size portable extension cords in accordance with manufacturer ratings forthe tool to be powered and protected from damage. Immediately removed fromservice all damaged extension cords. Portable extension cords must meetthe requirements of NFPA 70E and OSHA electrical standards.




SECTION 01 35 30.01

SAFETY, HEALTH, AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION11/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



16 CFR 1303 Lead Paint

29 CFR 1926.59 Hazard Communication

40 CFR 204 Noise Emission Standards for Construction Equipment

40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 61.145 Standard for Demolition

40 CFR 61.150 Standard for Waste Disposal

49 CFR 178 Specifications for Packagings

29 CFR 1910.1025 Lead

29 CFR 1910.120 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response

29 CFR 1926.62 Lead

29 CFR 1926.106 Working Over or Near Water

40 CFR 262 Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 763 Asbestos

1.2 REFERENCE STATUES

The statutes listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.

a. Clean Air Act (CAA) (42 U.S.C. 7401 to 7642)

b. Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1251 to 1387)

c. Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) (42 U.S.C. 9601 to 9675)

d. Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA)

SECTION 01 35 30.01 Page 1


(7 U.S.C.136 to 139y)

e. Noise Control Act (NCA) (42 U.S.C. 4901 to 4918)

f. Residential Lead-Based Paint Exposure Reduction Act (15 U.S.C. 2681 to 2692)

g. Toxic Substance Control Act (TSCA) (15 U.S.C. 2601 to 2654)

h. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) (42 U.S.C. 6901 to 6992K)

1.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

a. Conduct hazardous material testing on all coatings, timber, and soil requiring demolition.

b. If, during the course of work, material is found that may be hazardous to human health upon disturbance during construction operations, stop that portion of work and notify the Owner immediately. Within 14 calendar days, the Owner will determine if the material is hazardous. If the material is not hazardous or poses no danger, the Owner will direct the Contractor to proceed without change. If material is necessary to accomplish work, the Owner will issue a contract modification.

c. If asbestos is the hazard of concern, the materials must be tested following the negative assessment protocol found in 40 CFR 763, Asbestos Hazards and Emergency Response Act (AHERA).

d. All materials proposed to be exported from project site must be stockpiled for testing before off-site disposal.

e. Excess materials deemed to be free of contaminated soil must be disposed of off-site.

f. Excess materials deemed to contain contaminates must be stockpiled on-site. The stockpile must be controlled to prevent run-off and dust being generated by these materials. The cost of stockpiling and handling these materials including stabilization must not be paid separately.

g. Control operations so as to prevent the potential for mixing contaminated soils with uncontaminated soils.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

a. Sediment. Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by runoff water.

b. Solid Waste. Rubbish, debris, sanitary waste, and other discarded solid materials resulting from industrial, commercial, and agricultural operations, and from community activities.

c. Rubbish. A variety of combustible and noncombustible wastes such as paper, boxes, glass, crockery, metal, lumber, cans, and bones.

d. Debris. Includes combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as ashes, waste materials that result from construction or maintenance and repair



work, leaves, and tree trimmings.

e. Chemical Wastes. Includes salts, acids, alkalies, herbicides, pesticides, and organic chemicals.

f. Sanitary Wastes.

(1) Sewage. Wastes characterized as domestic sanitary sewage.

(2) Garbage. Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and consumption of food.

g. Asbestos and Asbestos Materials. Asbestos means actinolite, amosite, antophyllite, chrysotile, crocidolite, and tremolite. Asbestos material means asbestos or any material containing asbestos such as asbestos waste, scrap, debris bags, containers, equipment, and asbestos-contaminated clothing consigned for disposal. Friable asbestos material means any material that contains more than one percent asbestos by weight and that can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder, when dry, by hand pressure.

h. Oily Waste. Includes petroleum products and bituminous materials.

i. Hazardous Material (HM). Chemicals defined by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.59 and under the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations (Title 49 CFR Parts 100 through 199) which are determined by the Secretary of Transportation to present risks to safety, health, and property during transportation. The DOT regulations include requirements for shipping papers, package marking, labeling, transport vehicle placarding, and training of personnel handling hazardous materials.

j. Hazardous Substance. Substances defined under the Clean Water Act and CERCLA as chemicals that are harmful to aquatic life or the environment and are regulated, if spilled or otherwise released to the environment. The EPA has designated "reportable quantities" for each hazardous substance under CERCLA. If an amount equal to or greater than the reportable quantity of a hazardous substance is released to the environment, that spill must be reported.

k. Hazardous Waste (HW). Substances which are hazardous and have been discarded are regulated as hazardous waste under RCRA or State Health and Safety Codes and their implementing regulations. A waste is hazardous if it meets certain levels of reactivity, ignitability, corrosivity, or toxicity, or is otherwise listed as a hazardous waste in Title 40 CFR 261 or in the respective State Health and Safety Code or Code of Regulations.

l. Lead Containing Paint. Paint or other similar surface coating material containing lead or lead compounds and in which the lead content is in excess of 0.06% by weight of the total nonvolatile content of the paint or the weight of the dried paint film. Abatement of paint containing even trace amounts of lead must meet the requirements of Federal and State laws for protection of employees (e.g., 29 CFR 1926.62).

1.5 SUBMITTALS




SD-07 Certificates

Solid Waste Disposal Permit

Upon disposal, provide copies of the acceptance receipts for the material from the disposal site.


Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or material, including special notices and (MSDS)concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

Provide and maintain environmental protection during the life of the Contract to control pollution or to correct conditions that develop during construction. Comply with all Federal, State, and local laws and regulations pertaining to water, air, soil, and noise pollution.

1.7 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES

a. Do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy trees or shrubs without special written permission from the Owner. Protect existing trees that may be damaged by construction operations.

b. Construction equipment is to be kept in good repair without leaks of hydraulic or lubricating fluids. If such leaks or drips do occur, they must be cleaned up immediately. Drip pans must be utilized when vehicles are parked. Confine equipment maintenance and/or repair to one location. Control runoff in this area to prevent contamination of soils and water.

c. At or before Contract completion, obliterate all signs of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads, work areas, structures, foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess or waste materials, and all other vestiges of construction. Temporary roads, parking areas, staging areas, and similar temporary use areas where excavation has been accomplished must be graded in conformance with surrounding areas. Restore all disturbed areas to their original condition.

1.8 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF WASTE

With the exception of materials specifically indicated or specified to be salvaged for reused in construction, or turned over to the Owner, all wastes and demolished materials become the Contractor's property and must be removed from the job site daily.

a. Hazardous Waste Disposal. Any hazardous waste generated by work under this contract is the responsibility of the Contractor and must be disposed of in accordance with all applicable federal, state, and local regulatory requirements. Along with the Owner, the Contractor is the co-generator of any hazardous waste. As the other co-generator, the Owner must make available its facility's EPA generator ID number for manifesting of hazardous waste. Arrange and be responsible for the transportation and final disposal of any hazardous waste. Comply with applicable parts of 40 CFR 262. Any manifest of hazardous waste must be signed by the Owner's Hazardous Materials/Hazardous Waste Coordinator



at the work site (hereinafter "HM/HW Coordinator"). Contact the HM/HW Coordinator for disposal of any hazardous waste. No contractor or subcontractor must have the authority to sign a hazardous waste manifest using the facility's EPA generator ID number. Only the HM/HW Coordinator may sign a manifest for hazardous waste.

b. HM/HW Spill Response. Store chemical waste in corrosion resistant containers labeled to identify type of waste and date filled. Comply with 49 CFR 178. Remove containers from Owner property and dispose of in accordance with Federal, State, and local regulations. Submit a certified copy of the acceptance receipts for these materials, indicating quantities. For oil and hazardous material spills that may be large enough to violate Federal, State, and local regulations, notify the Owner immediately.

c. Comply with 40 CFR 262 and 263, 29 CFR 1910.120, and state regulations for removal, transportation and disposal of hazardous waste as discussed in the Contractor's HM/HW Handling Plan.

d. Lead:

(1) Lead-Based Paint, The contractor must comply with all applicable local, state, and Federal laws and regulations regarding lead-based or lead-containing paint, when engaging in lead-based paint activities or when addressing lead-based paint hazards. Compliance with all such laws and regulations must be indicated in the HM/HW Abatement Plan. Whenever this contract provides more than one standard for regulating lead-based paint, the contractor must comply with the most restrictive law or regulation. Applicable laws or regulations include, but are not limited to, 16 CFR 1303, Ban of Lead-Containing Paint; 29 CFR 1910.1025, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for General Industry; and 29 CFR 1926.62, Lead Exposure in Construction; 15 U.S.C. 2601, et. seq., and the Residential Lead-Based Paint Exposure Reduction Act.

(2) Lead-Contaminated Material Abatement: Do not release lead or lead-contaminated materials into the environment. Do not dispose of lead or lead-contaminated materials except in accordance with hazardous waste laws. When handling and storing lead-contaminated materials, comply with 42 U.S.C. 9601-9675, 42 U.S.C. 6901-6991, and all other applicable Federal, state, and local environmental laws and regulations.

(3) Painting Over Lead Based Paint: If it is intended that the contractor is to paint over lead-based paint, prepare surfaces in accordance with the HM/HW abatement plan. Record the exact, detailed locations where the lead-based paint was removed or had new paint applied over it. Provide copies of these records to the Owner.

e. Asbestos: In no case, will any asbestos be cut or otherwise treated without compliance with all Federal, state and local laws and regulations including 40 CFR 61.150, National Emission Standards for Asbestos. Provide all notices to the EPA as required by 40 CFR 61.145 prior to commencing asbestos removal work. Whenever this contract provides more than one standard for asbestos abatement, comply with the most restrictive law or regulation. Provide 48 hours written notice to the Owner before commencing any asbestos work. Should there be any question as to the existence of asbestos in any material that may be



disturbed, it must be treated as if it were asbestos until positively identified.

1.9 DUST CONTROL

Keep dust down at all times, including non-working hours, weekends, and holidays. No dry power brooming is permitted. Instead, use vacuuming, wet mopping, wet sweeping, or wet power brooming. Air blowing is permitted only for cleaning nonparticulate debris, such as steel reinforcing bars. No grit blasting is permitted unless dust is confined and collected. Only wet cutting of concrete blocks, concrete, and asphalt is permitted. No unnecessary shaking of bags is permitted where bagged cement, concrete mortar, and plaster is used.

1.10 NOISE

Make the maximum use of "Low-noise-emission products" as certified by EPA and described at 40 CFR 204. No blasting or use of explosives is permitted. Comply with applicable portions of the Noise Control Act (NCA). Comply with all other federal, state, and local noise control laws and regulations.

1.11 WORKING OVER OR NEAR WATER

When working over or near water, comply with 29 CFR 1926.106.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.




SECTION 01 78 00

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS05/19

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

1.1.1 As-Built Drawings

As-built drawings are the marked-up drawings, maintained by the Contractor on-site, that depict actual conditions and deviations from the Contract Documents. These deviations and additions may result from coordination required by, but not limited to: contract modifications; official responses to submitted Requests for Information (RFI's); direction from the Owner; design that is the responsibility of the Contractor, and differing site conditions. Maintain the as-builts throughout construction as red-lined hard copies on site. These files serve as the basis for the creation of the record drawings.

1.1.2 Record Drawings

The record drawings are the final compilation of actual conditions reflected in the as-built drawings.

1.2 SOURCE DRAWING FILES

Request the full set of electronic drawings, in the source format, for Record Drawing preparation, after award and at least 30 days prior to required use.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Warranty Management Plan


Operation and Maintenance Manuals


As-Built Drawings

Record Drawings

Final Approved Shop Drawings

Construction Contract Specifications



1.4 WARRANTY MANAGEMENT

1.4.1 Warranty Management Plan

Include within the warranty management plan all required actions and documents to assure that the Owner receives all warranties to which it is entitled. The plan narrative must contain sufficient detail to render it suitable for use by future maintenance and repair personnel, whether tradesmen, or of engineering background, not necessarily familiar with this contract. The term "status" as indicated below must include due date and whether item has been submitted or was accomplished. Assemble information in a binder and turn over to the Owner upon acceptance of the work. The construction warranty period must begin on the date of project acceptance and continue for the full product warranty period. Conduct a joint 6 month and 12 month warranty inspection, measured from time of acceptance, by the Contractor and Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

Drawings showing final as-built conditions of the project. This paragraphcovers record drawings complete, as a requirement of the contract. The terms "drawings," "contract drawings," "drawing files," "working record drawings" and "final record drawings" refer to contract drawings which are revised to be used for final record drawings showing as-built conditions. The final CAD record drawings must consist of one set of electronic CAD drawing files in the specified format, 2 sets of prints, and one set of the approved working Record drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

Provide and maintain two black line print copies of the PDF contract drawings for As-Built Drawings. Maintain the as-builts throughout construction as red-lined hard copies on site or red-lined PDF files.

3.2 FINAL RECORD DRAWINGS

Submit the final record PDF and CAD drawings package for the entire project within 20 days of substantial completion of all phases of work. Submit one set of ANSI D size PDF and CAD files on optical disc, read-only memory (ROM), two sets of ANSI D size prints and one set of the approved working record drawings. The package must be complete in all details and identical in form and function to the contract drawing files supplied by the Owner.

3.3 FINAL APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS

Submit final approved project shop drawings 30 days after transfer of the completed facility.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS

Submit final PDF file record construction contract specifications, including revisions thereto, 30 days after transfer of the completed facility.



3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Provide onecopy of the Operation and Maintenance Manual for final approval no later than 30 calendar days prior to contract completion.

Operation and Maintenance Manuals must be consistent with the manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions, general operating procedures, and safety precautions. Bind information in manual format and grouped by technical sections. Test data must be legible and of good quality. Light-sensitive reproduction techniques are acceptable provided finished pages are clear, legible, and not subject to fading. Pages for vendor data and manuals must be bound in 3-ring, loose-leaf binders. Organize data by separate index and tabbed sheets, in a loose-leaf binder. Binder must lie flat with printed sheets that are easy to read. Caution and warning indications must be clearly labeled.

3.6 CLEANUP

Leave premises "broom clean." Remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. Sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped areas. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and construction facilities from the site.



DIVISION 2

EXISTING CONDITIONS


SECTION 02 41 00

DEMOLITION05/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY PROFESSIONALS (ASSP)

ASSP A10.6 (2006) Safety & Health Program Requirements for Demolition Operations - American National Standard for Construction and Demolition Operations

U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)

FAA AC 70/7460-1 (2015; Rev L) Obstruction Marking and Lighting

1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

1.2.1 Definitions

1.2.1.1 Demolition

Demolition is the process of wrecking or taking out any load-supporting structural member of a facility together with any related handling and disposal operations.

1.2.1.2 Deconstruction

Deconstruction is the process of taking apart a facility with the primary goal of preserving the value of all useful building materials.

1.2.1.3 Demolition Plan

Demolition Plan is the planned steps and processes for managing demolition activities and identifying the required sequencing activities and disposal mechanisms.

1.2.1.4 Deconstruction Plan

Deconstruction Plan is the planned steps and processes for dismantling all or portions of a structure or assembly, to include managing sequencing activities, storage, re-installation activities, salvage and disposal mechanisms.

1.2.2 Demolition Plan

Prepare a Demolition Plan and submit proposed salvage, demolition, deconstruction, and removal procedures for approval before work is



started. Include in the plan procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, coordination with other work in progress a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and of the sequence of operations. Plan shall be approved by the Owner prior to work beginning.

1.2.3 General Requirements

Do not begin demolition or deconstruction until authorization is received from the Owner. The work includes demolition, deconstruction, salvage of identified items and materials, and removal of resulting rubbish and debris. Remove rubbish and debris from Owner's property daily, unless otherwise directed. Store materials that cannot be removed daily in areas specified by the Owner.

1.3 ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE

Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Owner. Repair or replace damaged items as approved by the Owner. Coordinate the work of this section with all other work indicated. Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded. Increase structural supports or add new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this contract. Do not overload structural elements or pavements to remain. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition, deconstruction, or removal work. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement require approval by the Owner prior to performing such work.

1.3.1 Existing Construction Limits and Protection

Do not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or necessary for installation of new construction. Provide temporary shoring and bracing to prevent settlement or other movement. Provide protective measures to control accumulation and migration of dust and dirt in all work areas. Remove snow, dust, dirt, and debris from work areas daily.

1.3.2 Utility Service

Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect against damage during demolition and deconstruction operations.

1.3.3 Facilities

Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities. Ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left unsupported and place and secure bracing, shoring, or lateral supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this contract.

1.4 BURNING

The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be permitted.



1.5 AVAILABILITY OF WORK AREAS

Areas in which the work is to be accomplished must be coordinated with the Owner.

1.6 SUBMITTALS



Demolition Plan

Existing Conditions

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. Conform to the safety requirements contained in ASSP A10.6. Comply with the Environmental Protection Agency requirements specified. Use of explosives will not be permitted.

1.7.1 Dust and Debris Control

Prevent the spread of dust and debris and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or pollution. Debris which falls into the river must be removed for proper disposal. The Owner may perform periodic underwater inspections to ensure materials are removed from the river.

1.8 PROTECTION

1.8.1 Traffic Control Signs

a. Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal work, use traffic barricades with flashing lights. Anchor barricades in a manner to prevent displacement by wind. Notify the Ownerprior to beginning such work.

Provide a minimum of 2 FAA type L-810 steady burning red obstruction lights on temporary structures (including cranes) over 100 feet, but less than 200 ft, above ground level. The use of LED based obstruction lights are not permitted. For temporary structures (including cranes) over 200 ft above ground level provide obstruction lighting in accordance with FAA AC 70/7460-1. Light construction and installation shall comply with FAA AC 70/7460-1. Lights shall be operational during periods of reduced visibility, darkness, and as directed by the Owner.

1.8.2 Protection of Personnel

Before, during and after the demolition work continuously evaluate the condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and around the project site. No area, section, or structural element will be allowed to be left standing without sufficient bracing, shoring, or lateral support to prevent collapse or failure while workmen remove debris or perform other work in the immediate



area.

1.9 RELOCATIONS

Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with workmen skilled in the trades involved. Repair or replace items to be relocated which are damaged with new undamaged items as approved by the Owner.

1.10 EXISTING CONDITIONS

Before beginning any demolition or deconstruction work, survey the site and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. Record existing conditions in the presence of the Owner showing the condition of structures and other facilities adjacent to areas of alteration or removal. Digital photographs and or video submitted on a CD with a photo log will be acceptable as a record of existing conditions. Include in the record a description of surface conditions that exist prior to starting work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify and document all required outages which will be required during the course of work, and to note these outages on the record document. Submit survey results.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIAL

a. Comply with excavating, backfilling, and compacting procedures for soils used as backfill material to fill voids, depressions or excavations resulting from demolition or deconstruction of structures.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED

3.1.1 Structures

a. Remove existing structures indicated to be removed on the drawings.

b. Demolish structures in a systematic manner from the top of the structure to the ground.

c. Locate demolition and deconstruction equipment along the structure and remove materials so as to not impose excessive loads on the existing structures.

3.1.2 Utilities and Related Equipment

3.1.2.1 General Requirements

Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by the Owner. Do not begin demolition or deconstruction work until all utility disconnections have been made. Shut off and cap utilities for future use, as indicated.

3.1.2.2 Disconnecting Existing Utilities

Remove existing utilities, as indicated, and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility.



When utility lines are encountered but are not indicated on the drawings, notify the Owner prior to further work in that area.

3.1.3 Paving and Slabs

Remove concrete and asphaltic concrete paving and slabs as indicated. Provide neat sawcuts at limits of pavement removal as indicated.

3.1.4 Concrete

Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of a minimum 2 inch. Make each cut in walls perpendicular to the face and in alignment with the cut in the opposite face. Break out the remainder of the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished work, and the remaining concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete.

3.1.5 Patching

Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished work, patch and repair these holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces, using on-site materials when available. Where new work is to be applied to existing surfaces, perform removals and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new work. Finished surfaces of patched area shall be flush with the adjacent existing surface and shall match the existing adjacent surface as closely as possible as to texture and finish.

3.1.6 Mechanical Equipment and Fixtures

Disconnect mechanical hardware at the nearest connection to existing services to remain, unless otherwise noted. Disconnect mechanical equipment and fixtures at fittings. Remove service valves attached to the unit. Do not remove equipment until approved.

3.1.6.1 Piping

Disconnect piping at unions, flanges and valves, and fittings as required to reduce the pipe into straight lengths for practical storage. Carefully dismantle piping that previously contained gas, gasoline, oil, or other dangerous fluids, with precautions taken to prevent injury to persons and property. Store piping outdoors until all fumes and residues are removed. Classify piping not designated for salvage, or not reusable, as scrap metal.

3.1.7 Jib Crane Hoists

Remove jib crane hoists, and similar conveying equipment, as whole units, to the most practical extent. Remove and prepare items for salvage or disposal without damage to any of the various parts.

3.2 CONCURRENT EARTH-MOVING OPERATIONS

Do not begin excavation, filling, and other earth-moving operations that are sequential to demolition or deconstruction work in areas occupied by structures to be demolished or deconstructed until all demolition and deconstruction in the area has been completed and debris removed. Fill holes, open basements and other hazardous openings.



3.3 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL

3.3.1 Title to Materials

Except for materials or equipment scheduled for salvage, all materials and equipment removed and not reused or salvaged, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Owner's property. Title to materials resulting from demolition and deconstruction, and materials and equipment to be removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Owner of the Contractor's demolition, deconstruction, and removal procedures, and authorization by the Owner to begin demolition and deconstruction. The Owner will not be responsible for the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after contract award. Showing for sale or selling materials and equipment on site is prohibited.

3.3.2 Salvaged Materials and Equipment

Remove materials and equipment for Owner salvage including existing jib cranes and steel deck plates.

a. Salvage items and material to the maximum extent possible.

b. Store all materials salvaged for the Contractor as approved by the Owner and remove from the Owner's property before completion of the contract.

c. Remove salvaged items to remain the property of the Owner in a manner to prevent damage, and packed or crated to protect the items from damage while in storage or during shipment. Items damaged during removal or storage must be repaired or replaced to match existing items. Properly identify the contents of containers. Place items onsite for removal by the Owner.

3.3.3 Unsalvageable and Non-Recyclable Material

Properly dispose of unsalvageable and non-recyclable combustible and noncombustible material off site.

3.4 CLEANUP

Remove debris and rubbish from basement and similar excavations. Remove and transport the debris in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Apply local regulations regarding hauling and disposal.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS

3.5.1 Regulation of Removed Materials

Dispose of debris, rubbish, scrap, and other nonsalvageable materials resulting from removal operations with all applicable federal, state and local regulations as contractually specified off the site. Storage of removed materials on the project site is prohibited.




SECTION 02 81 00

TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS11/18

PART 1 GENERAL

Work in this section includes requirements for worker protection and waste disposal related to the demolition of the Icehouse building.

a. The removal of building surfaces may result in dust and debris exposing workers to levels of lead above the OSHA Action Level. Work protection, training, and engineering controls reference herein must be strictly adhered to, until completed of the exposure assessment with results indicating exposures below the "Action Level". This section identified worker protection involved in the demolition and disposal procedures for lead impacted materials. Specifically for the approach to handling, management, and abatement as applicable to the work conditions.

b. The removal and disposal of asbestos-containing materials (ACM) impacted during demolition and disposal of the Icehouse building. This work includes but is not limited to, the removal and disposal of caulking.

The Contractor is responsible for conducting this project and supervising all work in a manner that is in conformance with all federal, state, and local regulations and guidelines pertaining to asbestos abatement.

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Refer to Appendix B "Hazardous Materials Assessment for Asbestos, Lead-Based Paint, PCBs in Caulking, and Universal Waste at Icehouse Portsmouth Fish Pier" prepared by Northeast Test Consultants dated January 31, 2020.

1.2 REFERENCES



29 CFR 1910.1001 Asbestos

29 CFR 1910.1025 Lead

29 CFR 1926.59 Hazard Communication

29 CFR 1926.62 Lead

29 CFR 1926.65 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response

29 CFR 1926.1101 Asbestos



1.3 DEFINITIONS

1.3.1 Abatement

Procedures to control fiber releases from Asbestos-Containing Materials; including removal, encapsulation, and enclosure.

1.3.2 ACM

Asbestos-Containing Materials.

1.3.3 Action Level (AL)

The allowable employee exposure, without regard to use of respiratory protection, to an airborne concentration of lead over an eight hour time weighted average (TWA), as defined by OSHA. The current action level is thirty micrograms per cubic meter of air (35 ug/m3).

1.3.4 Asbestos

The name given to a number of naturally occurring fibrous silicates. This includes the serpentine forms and the amphiboles and includes chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite, anthophyllite, and actinolite, or any of these forms, which have been chemically altered.

1.3.5 Asbestos Control Area

The area where asbestos removal operations are performed which is isolated by physical boundaries which assist in the prevention of the uncontrolled release of asbestos dust, fibers, or debris. The regulated area must comply with requirements of regulated are of demarcation, access, respirators, prohibited activities, competent persons and exposure assessments and monitoring.

1.3.6 Asbestos Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)

The maximum airborne concentration of asbestos fibers to which an employee is allowed to be exposed. 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter of air as an 8-hour time weighted average and 1.0 fibers/cc averaged over a sampling period of 30 minutes as an Excursion Limit as defined by 29 CFR 1926.1101.

1.3.7 Caulking

Resilient mastic compound often having a silicone bituminous or rubber base; used to seal cracks, fill joints, and prevent leakage. Typical applications: around windows, and doors. Caulking is at joints between two dissimilar materials (i.e. masonry to wood, masonry to steel).

1.3.8 Competent Person

A person meeting the requirements for competent person as specified in 29 CFR 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1926.62 including a person capable of identifying existing hazardous materials in the work place and selecting the appropriate control strategy for exposure, who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate to eliminate hazards.

1.3.9 Encapsulants

Specific materials in various forms used to chemically or physically entrap



asbestos fibers in various configurations to prevent these fibers from becoming airborne. There are four types of encapsulants as follows which must comply with performance requirements as specified herein.

a. Removal Encapsulant (can be used as a wetting agent).

b. Bridging Encapsulant (used to provide a tough, durable surface coating to asbestos containing material).

c. Penetrating Encapsulant (used to penetrate the asbestos containing material encapsulating all asbestos fibers and preventing fiber release due to routine mechanical damage).

d. Lock-Down Encapsulant (used to seal off or "lock-down" minute asbestos fibers left on surfaces from which asbestos containing material has been removed).

1.3.10 Friable Asbestos Material

One percent asbestos containing material that can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure when dry.

1.3.11 "High Efficiency Particulate Air" (HEPA)

A type of filtering system capable of filtering out particles of 0.3 microns diameter from a body of air at 99.97% efficiency or greater.

1.3.12 Lead

Refers to metallic lead, inorganic lead compounds and organic lead soaps. Excluded from this definition are other organic lead compounds.

1.3.13 Lead Work Area

An area enclosed in a manner to prevent the spread of lead dust, paint, chips, or debris resulting from lead-containing paint disturbance.

1.3.14 Lead Paint

Refers to paints, glazes and other surface coatings containing a toxic level of lead.

1.3.15 Toxic Level of Lead

A level of lead, when present in dried paint of plaster, contains more than 0.50% lead by dry weight as measured by atomic absorption spectrophotometry (AAS).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Approval is required for all submittals,submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


Hauling Contractor

Lead Waste Management Plan



Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan

SD-06 Test Reports

Air Sampling Results

SD-07 Certificates

Competent Person

Air Sampling Professional


Manifests


1.5.1 Competent Person (CP)

Submit name, address, and telephone number of the CP selected to perform responsibilities specified herein. Provide documented construction project-related experience with implementation of OSHA's Lead in Construction Standard 29 CFR 1926.62 and and OSHA's Asbestos in Construction Standard 29 CFR 1926.1101. Documentation must shown the ability to assess occupational and environmental exposure to lead and asbestos, experience with the use of respirators, personal protective equipment, and other exposure reduction methods to protect employee health. Submit proper documentation that the CP is trained and certified in accordance with federal, state, and local laws.

1.5.2 Air Sampling Professional

Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the testing laboratory selected to perform the air analysis, testing, and reporting of airborne concentrations of lead or asbestos.

1.5.2.1 Air Sampling Results

The Air Sampling Professional must document all air sampling results and provide a report to the Owner within 48 hours after sample collection. Sampling must be conducted in accordance with methods described in 29 CFR 1910.1001, 29 CFR 1926.1101, 29 CFR 1910.1025, and 29 CFR 1926.62.

1.5.3 Laws and Regulations Requirements

Comply with Federal, state, and local laws and regulations which are applicable.

1.5.4 Hauling Contractor

Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the hauling contractor, location of the landfill to be used and standards for proof of acceptance by the receiving facility.

1.5.5 Lead Waste Management Plan

The Lead Waste Management Plan must comply with applicable requirements of federal, state, and local hazardous waste regulations and provide the



following:

a. Names and qualifications of each contractor that will be transporting, storing, treating, and disposing of wastes. Include the facility point of contact.

b. Estimated quantities of wastes to be generated and disposed of.

c. List of waste handling equipment to be used in performing the work, to include cleaning, volume reduction, and transport equipment.

d. Spill prevention, containment, and cleanup contingency measures including a health and safety plan to be implemented in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.65.

e. Work Plan and schedule for waste containment, removal, and disposal. Proper containment of the waste include using acceptable waste containers as well as proper marking/labeling of the containers. Wastes must be cleaned up and containerized daily.

f. Hauling Contractor information must be submitted and include the name, address, and ID number of the hauler, waste transfer route, and proposed disposal site.

1.5.6 Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan

Submit a detailed plan of the safety precautions and work procedures to be used in the removal and demolition of materials containing asbestos. The plan must be prepared, signed by the CP. The Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan must comply with applicable requirements of federal, state, and local hazardous waste regulations and include the following:

a. List of precise personal protective equipment to be used, including, but not limited to, respiratory protection.

b. Work Plan detailing the location of asbestos, including control areas, removal method, and disposal plan. Include type of wetting agent and asbestos sealer to be used, locations of local exhaust equipment, planned air monitoring strategies, and description of the method to be employed in order to control environmental pollution.

The Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan must be approved in writing prior to removal of the Icehouse begins.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Polyethylene Sheet

Polyethylene sheet in a roll size to minimize the frequency of joints must be delivered to the jobsite with factory label indicating 6-mil.

2.1.2 Polyethylene Disposable Bags

Polyethylene disposable bags must be 6-mil with pertinent pre-printed label. Tie wraps for bags must be plastic, 5-inches long (minimum), pointed and looped to secure filled plastic bags.



2.1.3 Tape or Adhesive Spray

Tape or adhesive spray will be capable of sealing joints in adjacent polyethylene sheets and for attachment of polyethylene sheet to finished or unfinished surfaces of dissimilar materials and capable of adhering under both dry and wet conditions, including use of amended water.

2.1.4 Impermeable Containers

Impermeable containers are to be used to receive and retain any lead containing or contaminated materials until disposal at an acceptable disposal site. Containers must be labeled in accordance with EPA and DOT standards.

2.1.5 Surfactant (Wetting Agent)

Surfactant (wetting agent), must consist of fifty percent polyoxyethylene ether and fifty percent polyoxyethylene ester, or equivalent, and must be mixed with water to provide a concentration of 1 ounce of surfactant to 5 gallons of water or as directed by manufacturer.

2.1.6 Encapsulants

Encapsulants must conform to current USEPA requirements, must contain no toxic or hazardous substances as defined in 29 CFR 1926.59.

2.2 EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS

Provide miscellaneous equipment and tools necessary to handle hazardous materials and hazardous wastes in a safe and environmentally sound manner.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WORK PROCEDURE

The material identified as LIGHT GRAY SEALANT in between the metal insulated panel on the First Floor Level of the Icehouse is non-friable material in its current state.

Friable materials can be crumbled by hand pressure and readily release asbestos fibers when impacted. Comparatively, non-friable materials do not crumble under hand pressure and do not readily release asbestos fibers into the surrounding atmosphere.

Materials containing equal to or greater than 1% of asbestos are a regulated material under the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR 1926.1101, US EPA, and State of New Hampshire Asbestos Management Rules.

All Work operations which would impact asbestos containing materials must be in compliance with asbestos regulations set forth in OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101; US EPA Title 40-CFR, Part 61 NESHAP, Subparts A and M (General Provisions and Asbestos Standards, respectively); & State of New Hampshire Department of Environmental Services (NHDES), Chapter Env-A 1800, Asbestos Management Control.

Generated waste materials must be properly packaged and disposed of as asbestos waste in accordance with US EPA and NHDES regulatory requirements if rendered into friable condition, thereby making it a Regulated Asbestos



Containing Materials (RACM).

If the material is not rendered into a friable condition, it is a Category II Non-Friable material in its present state and can be disposed of at any licensed municipal or construction & demolition debris landfill.

This material cannot go to any recycling facility or any other facility that would render it into a friable state at any time.

3.2 LEAD PAINT WORK PROCEDURE

Demolition activities that may impact metal-containing painted components are a concern with respect to the generation of airborne dusts; therefore, safety measures such as the use of engineering controls are essential in order to protect human health and the environment.

Contractors performing demolition activities in which excessive amounts of lead dusts may potentially be generated must be trained in the hazards of exposure to such materials and the subsequent control of the impacted environment, removal, cleaning, packaging, and handling of these materials as well as wearing of NIOSH approved respirators, use of disposable clothing, and other requirements of the OSHA Lead Standard for Construction, 29 CFR 1926.62.

Workers must not be exposed to airborne LEAD levels greater than 50 ug/m3 as an eight-hour time weighted average (TWA) as outlined in 29 CFR 1926.62, Lead Standard. The OSHA Action for Lead Exposure is 35 ug/m3.

The painted components analyzed for Total Lead with results greater than 0.009 percent do not require any special waste handling or disposal as long as the demolition debris are not recycled to a facility that would burn the material.

The lead content in the paint adhered to building materials will likely not result in TCLP Lead Value equal to or greater than 5.0 milligrams per Liter.

If free paint chips are produced and collected separately from any demolition debris where lead paint testing indicated >0.5% Total Lead by Weight, then these paint chips should be packaged and disposed of as lead containing waste as the loose paint debris material itself without the dilution effect of the substrate materials will in all probability result in TCLOP values equal to or greater than 5.0 milligrams per Liter, classifying it as an EPA hazardous waste stream material.

3.3 WASTE DISPOSAL

All waste materials, except as specified otherwise, shall become the property of the Contractor and must be disposed of as specified in applicable local, state, and federal regulations.

Submit copies of manifests and receipts acknowledging disposal of all hazardous waste material from the project showing delivery date, quantity and appropriate signature of landfill's authorized representative.



DIVISION 3

CONCRETE


SECTION 03 31 29

MARINE CONCRETE03/07

PART 1 GENERAL

This specification detial the requirements for the design, production, and placement of concrete required for this project. The concrete is a specialty design mix with an anticipated 50 year service life.

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)

ACI 117 (2010; Errata 2011) Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary

ACI 121R (2008) Guide for Concrete Construction Quality Systems in Conformance with ISO 9001

ACI 214R (2011) Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete

ACI 301 (2016) Specifications for Structural Concrete

ACI 304.2R (2017) Guide to Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods

ACI 304R (2000; R 2009) Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete

ACI 305R (2010) Guide to Hot Weather Concreting

ACI 306.1 (1990; R 2002) Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting

ACI 308.1 (2011) Specification for Curing Concrete

ACI 309R (2005) Guide for Consolidation of Concrete

ACI 347R (2014; Errata 1 2017) Guide to Formwork for Concrete

ACI SP-15 (2011) Field Reference Manual: Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete ACI 301-05 with Selected ACI References

ACI SP-2 (2007; Abstract: 10th Edition) ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection



ACI SP-66 (2004) ACI Detailing Manual

AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)

AASHTO M 182 (2005; R 2017) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

AWS D1.4/D1.4M (2011) Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel


ASTM A615/A615M (2016) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM C31/C31M (2019) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

ASTM C33/C33M (2018) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C39/C39M (2018) Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

ASTM C42/C42M (2018a) Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete

ASTM C59/C59M (2000; R 2011) Gypsum Casting Plaster and Gypsum Molding Plaster

ASTM C94/C94M (2018) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C143/C143M (2015) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete

ASTM C150/C150M (2018) Standard Specification for Portland Cement

ASTM C171 (2016) Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

ASTM C172/C172M (2017) Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

ASTM C173/C173M (2016) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method

ASTM C231/C231M (2017a) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method



ASTM C260/C260M (2010a; R 2016) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C494/C494M (2017) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C618 (2019) Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete

ASTM C989/C989M (2018a) Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars

ASTM C1017/C1017M (2013; E 2015) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete

ASTM C1077 (2017) Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation

ASTM C1157/C1157M (2017) Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement

ASTM C1260 (2014) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)

ASTM C1567 (2013) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)

ASTM D512 (2012) Chloride Ion in Water

ASTM D516 (2016) Standard Test Method for Sulfate Ion in Water

ASTM E329 (2018) Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection

STATE OF NEW HAMPSHIRE, DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (NHDOT)

NHDOT (2016) State of New Hampshire, Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications

1.2 DEFINITIONS

a. "Cementitious material" as used herein shall include portland cement, pozzolan, fly ash, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.

b. "Design strength" (f'c) is the specified compressive strength of concrete to meet structural design criteria.

c. "Marine concrete" is that concrete that will be in contact with or subject to submersion, tidal variations, splash, or spray from



water in navigable waterways.

d. "Pozzolan" is a silicious or silicious and aluminous material, which in itself possesses little or no cementitious value but will, in finely divided form and in the presence of moisture, chemically react with calcium hydroxide at ordinary temperatures to form compounds possessing cementitious properties.

e. "Field test strength" (fcr) is the required compressive strength of concrete to meet structural and durability criteria. Determine (fcr) during mixture proportioning process.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Reinforcing steel

Formwork

Construction joints

Reproductions of contract drawings are unacceptable.

SD-03 Product Data

Non-shrink grout

Preformed joint filler

Materials for Curing Concrete

Crack Repair Material

SD-05 Design Data

Mixture design

Formwork Calculations

SD-06 Test Reports

Concrete mixture proportions

Fly ash

Natural pozzolan

Ground iron blast-furnace slag

Aggregates

Admixtures

Cement



Water

Field Quality Control

Provide results for fresh concrete testing (slump, water-cement ratio, temperature, air content) and compressive strength test of cured cylinders.

SD-07 Certificates

Curing concrete elements

Concrete placement and compaction

Quality assurance

Field testing technician and testing agency

Mixture designs

Batch Tickets

1.4 MODIFICATION OF REFERENCES

Accomplish work in accordance with ACI publications except as modified herein. Consider the advisory or recommended provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for the words "should" or "could" or "may," wherever they appear. Interpret reference to the "Building Official," the "Structural Engineer," and the "Architect/Engineer" to mean the Owner.

1.4.1 NHDOT

Where included in the NHDOT Specifications, replace the terms "Resident," "State," "Engineer," and "Bureau of Materials and Research" with "Owner". Where the NHDOT specification Section 520 is more restrictive than this specification section for materials, batching, mixing, transporting, placing, and curing, conform to NHDOT 520.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Do not deliver concrete until vapor barrier, forms, reinforcement, embedded items, and chamfer strips are in place and ready for concrete placement. ACI 301 and ASTM A615/A615M for job site storage of materials. Store reinforcement of different sizes and shapes in separate piles or racks raised above the ground. Protect materials from contaminants such as grease, oil, and dirt. Ensure materials can be accurately identified after bundles are broken and tags removed.


1.6.1 Concrete Mixture Design

At least 30 days prior to concrete placement, submit proportions for the concrete mixture that meets the properties specified and is suitable for the job conditions. Submit a complete list of materials including type; brand; source and amount of cement, aggregate, fly ash, (or slag pozzolans), ground slag, polypropylene fibers, anti-washout and other admixtures for underwater concreting, corrosion inhibitors; and applicable



reference specifications. Submit additional data regarding concrete aggregates if the source of aggregate changes. An identical concrete mixture previously approved and used within the past 12 months by the NHDOT may be used if copies of the previous approval, location, and aggregate, fly ash, and pozzolan test results are submitted. The approval of aggregate, fly ash, and pozzolan test results shall have been within 6 months of submittal date. Obtain acknowledgement of receipt prior to concrete placement. The mixture shall be prepared by an accredited laboratory experienced in this field and under the direction of a licensed/registered civil engineer, who shall sign all reports and designs.

1.6.2 Drawings

1.6.2.1 Reinforcing Steel

ACI SP-66. Provide bending and cutting diagrams, assembly diagrams, splicing placement and laps of bars, shapes, dimensions, and details of bar reinforcing, accessories, and concrete cover. Do not scale dimensions from structural drawings to determine lengths of reinforcing bars. Only complete drawings will be accepted.

1.6.2.2 Formwork

At the contractor's option, the contractor shall submit formwork drawings or submit formwork information followed by a field inspection by the Owner.

a. Formwork Drawings. ACI 347R. Include design calculations indicating arrangement of forms, sizes and grades of supports (lumber), panels, and related components. Indicate placement schedule, construction, location and method of forming control joints, and material and method to be used to patch form-tie holes. Include locations of embedded items. Furnish drawings and descriptions of shoring as required for horizontal concrete members.

b. Formwork Information. ACI 347R. Identify sizes and grades of supports (lumber), panels, and related components. Provide a description of materials and methods to be used to patch form-tie holes. The Contractor shall give 72-hour notice prior to the time the completed formwork will be available for field inspection. Neither the exercise nor waiver of the inspection will affect the Owner's right to enforce contractual provisions.

1.6.3 Certificates

1.6.3.1 Curing Concrete Elements

Submit proposed materials and methods for curing concrete elements.

1.6.3.2 Concrete Placement and Compaction

a. Submit technical literature for equipment and methods proposed for use in placing concrete. Include pumping or conveying equipment including type, size and material for pipe, valve characteristics, and the maximum length and height concrete will be pumped. No adjustments shall be made to the mixture design to facilitate pumping.

b. Submit technical literature for equipment and methods proposed for vibrating and compacting concrete. Submittal shall include technical literature describing the equipment including vibrator diameter,



length, frequency, amplitude, centrifugal force, and manufacturer's description of the radius of influence under load. Where flat work is to be cast, provide similar information relative to the proposed compacting screed or other method to ensure dense placement.

c. Concrete placement plan must clearly outline anticipated lift placement for each placement location. Provide formwork calculations, stamped by a licensed professional engineer, indicating formwork is adequate for anticipated lift height.

1.6.3.3 Quality Assurance

Develop and submit a quality control plan in accordance with the guidelines of ACI 121R and as specified herein. The plan shall include plans for the concrete supplier, the reinforcing steel supplier, and installer. Maintain a copy of ACI SP-15 and CRSI Manual of Practice at the project site.

1.6.3.4 Field Testing Technician and Testing Agency

Submit data on qualifications of proposed testing agency and technicians for approval by the Owner's Representative prior to performing any work.

a. Work on concrete under this contract shall be performed by an ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician Grade 1 or Grade 2 qualified in accordance with ACI SP-2 or equivalent. Equivalent certification programs shall include requirements for written and performance examinations as stipulated in ACI SP-2.

b. Testing agencies that perform testing services on reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329.

c. Testing agencies that perform testing services on concrete materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1077.

1.6.3.5 Mixture Designs

Provide a detailed report of materials and methods used, test results, and the field test strength (fcr) for marine concrete required to meet durability requirements.

1.6.3.6 Batch Tickets

Submit batch ticket for each load of concrete delivered to the project site.

1.6.4 Test Reports

1.6.4.1 Concrete Mixture Proportions

a. Submit copies of test reports by independent test labs conforming to ASTM C1077 showing that the mixture has been successfully tested to produce concrete with the properties specified and that mixture will be suitable for the job conditions. Test reports shall be submitted along with the concrete mixture proportions. Obtain approval before concrete placement.

b. Fully describe the processes and methodology whereby mixture proportions were developed and tested and how proportions will be adjusted during progress of the work to achieve, as closely as possible, the designated levels of relevant properties.



1.6.4.2 Fly Ash and Natural Pozzolan

Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C618. Submit test results performed within 6 months of submittal date.

1.6.4.3 Ground Iron Blast-Furnace Slag

Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C989/C989M for ground iron blast-furnace slag. Submit test results performed within 6 months of submittal date.

1.6.4.4 Aggregates

Submit test results for aggregate quality in accordance with ASTM C33/C33M, and the combined graduation curve for grading proposed for use in the work and used in the mixture qualification. Where there is potential for alkali-silica reaction, provide results of tests conducted in accordance with ASTM C1567 or ASTM C1260. Submit results of all tests during progress of the work in tabular and graphical form as noted above, describing the cumulative combined aggregate grading and the percent of the combined aggregate retained on each sieve.

1.6.4.5 Admixtures

Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C494/C494M and ASTM C1017/C1017M for concrete admixtures, ASTM C260/C260M for air-entraining agent, and manufacturer's literature and test reports for corrosion inhibitor and anti-washout admixture. Submitted data shall be based upon tests performed within 6 months of submittal.

1.6.4.6 Cement

Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C150/C150M portland cement and/or ASTM C59/C59M and ASTM C1157/C1157M for blended cement. Submit current mil data.

1.6.4.7 Water

Submit test results in accordance with ASTM D512 and ASTM D516.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE

2.1.1 Durability and Strength

Meet the requirements of NHDOT Class AAA (Overlay), or Class AA.

2.1.2 Required Average Strength of Concrete

The minimum compressive strength (fcr) of the selected mixture shall equal or exceed the strength required under ACI 301 for laboratory mixture designs and which passes the test indicated in the subparagraph entitled "Chloride Ion Penetration." The average compressive strength produced under field tests shall be the minimum compressive strength (fcr) required during construction.



2.2 MATERIALS

2.2.1 Concrete Mixture

All materials, including cementitious, aggregates, admixtures, and water, shall be in accordance with NHDOT 520.

2.2.2 Nonshrink Grout

In accordance with NHDOT Qualified Products List for Fast Setting Grouts for Anchor Bolts.

2.2.3 Materials for Forms

Provide wood, plywood, or steel. Use plywood or steel forms where a smooth form finish is required. Lumber shall be square edged or tongue-and-groove boards, free of raised grain, knotholes, or other surface defects. Plywood: PS-1, B-B concrete form panels or better. Steel form surfaces shall not contain irregularities, dents, or sags.

2.2.3.1 Form Ties and Form-Facing Material

a. Provide a form tie system that does not leave mild steel after break-off or removal any closer than 2 inches from the exposed surface. Do not use wire alone. Form ties and accessories shall not reduce the effective cover of the reinforcement.

b. Form-facing material shall be structural plywood or other material that can absorb air trapped in pockets between the form and the concrete and some of the high water-cementitious materials ratio surface paste. Maximum use is three times. Provide forms with a form treatment to prevent bond of the concrete to the form.

c. As an alternate to using an absorptive wood form contact face as a form liner, use "Zendrain" or an approved equal in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

2.2.4 Reinforcement

2.2.4.1 Reinforcing Bars

ACI 301 unless otherwise specified. ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60.

2.2.5 Materials for Curing Concrete

2.2.5.1 Impervious Sheeting

ASTM C171; waterproof paper, clear or white polyethylene sheeting, or polyethylene-coated burlap.

2.2.5.2 Pervious Sheeting

AASHTO M 182.

2.2.6 Preformed Joint Filler

NHDOT 520.2.7.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FORMS

a. ACI 301. Set forms mortar-tight and true to line and grade. Chamfer above grade exposed joints, edges, and external corners of concrete 0.75 inch unless otherwise indicated. Forms submerged in water shall be watertight.

b. Provide formwork with clean-out openings to permit inspection and removal of debris. Formwork shall be gasketed or otherwise rendered sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of paste or grout under heavy, high-frequency vibration. Use a release agent that does not cause surface dusting. Limit reuse of plywood to no more than three times. Reuse may be further limited by the Owner's Representative if it is found that the pores of the plywood are clogged with paste to the degree that the wood does not absorb the air or the high water-cementitious materials ratio concrete surface.

c. Patch form tie holes with a nonshrink patching material in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and subject to approval.

3.1.1 Coating

Before concrete placement, coat the contact surfaces of forms with a nonstaining mineral oil, nonstaining form coating compound, or two coats of nitrocellulose lacquer. Do not use mineral oil on forms for surfaces to which adhesive, paint, or other finish material is to be applied.

3.1.2 Removal of Forms and Supports

After placing concrete, forms shall remain in place for a minimum of 7 days.

3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

3.2.1 Reinforcement Supports

Place reinforcement and secure with noncorrodible chairs, spacers, or hangers. Support reinforcement on the ground with concrete or other noncorrodible material, having a compressive strength equal to or greater than the concrete being placed.

3.2.2 Splicing

ACI 301. Stagger splices one splice length minimum. Unless noted otherwise, no more than 50 percent of the reinforcing steel can be spliced at any location. Do not splice at points of maximum stress. AWS D1.4/D1.4M. Welded splices shall be approved prior to use.

3.2.3 Cover

Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be 3 inches unless otherwise noted. Placement tolerance is plus 1/4 inch.

3.2.4 Setting Miscellaneous Material and Anchorages

Place and secure anchors, bolts, pipe sleeves, conduits, and other such items in position before concrete placement. Plumb anchor bolts and check location and elevation. Temporarily fill voids in sleeves with readily



removable material to prevent the entry of concrete. Electrically isolate exposed steel work and its anchor systems from the primary steel reinforcement with at least 2 inches of concrete. Coat exposed steel work to reduce corrosion. Take particular care to ensure against corrosion on edges and horizontal surfaces. Use epoxy coatings for protection of carbon steel plates and fittings.

3.2.5 Construction Joints

Provide plans depicting the location of construction joints for approval by the Owner. Locate joints to least impair strength. Continue reinforcement across joints unless otherwise indicated.

3.2.6 Expansion Joints and Contraction Joints

Place contraction joints at 20 ft intervals, either formed, saw cut, or cut with a jointing tool, to a depth of 1 inch and width of 1/2 inch after the surface has been finished. Sawed joints shall be completed within 4 to 12 hours after concrete placement. Protect joints from intrusion of foreign matter by filling with joint sealant.

3.3 BATCHING, MEASURING, MIXING, AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE

ASTM C94/C94M, ACI 301, and ACI 304R, except as modified herein. Batching equipment shall be such that the concrete ingredients are consistently measured within the following tolerances: 1 percent for cement and water, 2 percent for aggregate, and 3 percent for admixtures. Furnish mandatory batch tickets imprinted with mix identification, batch size, batch design and measured weights, moisture in the aggregates, and time batched for each load of ready mix concrete. When a pozzolan is batched cumulatively with the cement, it shall be batched after the cement has entered the weight hopper.

3.3.1 Measuring

Make measurements at intervals as specified in paragraphs entitled "Sampling" and "Testing."

Adjust batch proportions to replicate the mixture design using methods provided in the approved quality assurance plan. Base the adjustments on results of tests of materials at the batch plant for use in the work. Maintain a full record of adjustments and the basis for each.

3.3.2 Mixing

ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301. Machine mix concrete. Begin mixing within 30 minutes after the cement has been added to the aggregates. Place concrete within 90 minutes of either addition of mixing water to cement and aggregates or addition of cement to aggregates if the air temperature is less than 85 degrees F. Reduce mixing time and place concrete within 60 minutes if the air temperature is greater than 85 degrees F except as follows: if set retarding admixture is used and slump requirements can be met, limit for placing concrete may remain at 90 minutes. Dissolve admixtures in the mixing water and mix in the drum to uniformly distribute the admixture throughout the batch.

3.3.3 Transporting

Transport concrete from the mixer to the forms as rapidly as practicable.



Prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. Clean transporting equipment thoroughly before each batch. Do not use aluminum pipe or chutes. Remove concrete which has segregated in transporting and dispose of as directed.

3.4 PLACING CONCRETE

Place concrete as soon as practicable after the forms and the reinforcement have been inspected and approved. Do not place concrete when weather conditions prevent proper placement and consolidation; in uncovered areas during periods of precipitation; or in standing water. Prior to placing concrete, remove dirt, construction debris, water, snow, and ice from within the forms. Deposit concrete as close as practicable to the final position in the forms. Do not exceed a free vertical drop of 3 feet from the point of discharge. Place concrete in one continuous operation from one end of the structure towards the other or lifts for vertical construction.

3.4.1 Vibration

Comply with the requirements of ACI 309R and ASTM A615/A615M using vibrators with a minimum frequency of 9000 vibrations per minute (VPM). Use only high cycle or high frequency vibrators. Motor-in-head 60 cycle vibrators may not be used. For walls and deep beams, use a minimum of two vibrators with the first to melt down the mixture and the second to thoroughly consolidate the mass. Provide a spare vibrator at the casting site whenever concrete is placed. Place concrete in 18 inch maximum vertical lifts. Insert and withdraw vibrators approximately 18 inches apart. Penetrate at least 8 inches into the previously placed lift with the vibrator when more than one lift is required. Extract the vibrator using a series of up and down motions to drive the trapped air out of the concrete and from between the concrete and the forms.

For slab construction use vibrating screeds designed to consolidate the full depth of the concrete. Where beams and slabs intersect, use an internal vibrator to consolidate the beam. Do not vibrate concrete placed with anti-washout admixtures. Vibrators shall be equipped with rubber vibrator heads.

3.4.2 Pumping

ACI 304R and ACI 304.2R. Pumping shall not result in separation or loss of materials nor cause interruptions sufficient to permit loss of plasticity between successive increments. Loss of slump in pumping equipment shall not exceed 2 inches. Do not use pipe made of aluminum or aluminum alloy. Avoid rapid changes in pipe sizes. Limit maximum size of coarse aggregate to 33 percent of the diameter of the pipe. Maximum size of well rounded aggregate shall be limited to 40 percent of the pipe diameter. Take samples for testing at both the point of delivery to the pump and at the discharge end. Air content tested at the pump hose discharge must be within the specified limits.

3.4.3 Cold Weather

ACI 306.1. Do not allow concrete temperature to decrease below 50 degrees F. Obtain approval prior to placing concrete when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or when concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing temperatures within 24 hours. Cover concrete and provide sufficient heat to maintain 50 degrees F minimum adjacent to both the formwork and the structure while curing. Limit the rate of cooling to 5 degrees F in any one



hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours after heat application.

3.4.4 Hot Weather

ACI 305R. Maintain required concrete temperature using Figure 2.1.5, "Effect of Concrete Temperatures, Relative Humidity, and Wind Velocity on the Rate of Evaporation of Surface Moisture From Concrete" in ACI 305R to prevent the evaporation rate from exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square foot of exposed concrete per hour. Cool ingredients before mixing or use other suitable means to control concrete temperature and prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete. Shade the fresh concrete as soon as possible after placing. Start curing when the surface of the fresh concrete is sufficiently hard to permit curing without damage. Provide water hoses, pipes, spraying equipment, and water hauling equipment, where job site is remote to water source, to maintain a moist concrete surface throughout the curing period. Provide burlap cover or other suitable, permeable material with fog spray or continuous wetting of the concrete when weather conditions prevent the use of either liquid membrane curing compound or impervious sheets. For vertical surfaces, protect forms from direct sunlight and add water to top of structure once concrete is set.

3.5 SURFACE FINISHES EXCEPT FLOOR, SLAB, AND PAVEMENT

3.5.1 Defects

Repair formed surfaces by removing minor honeycombs, pits greater than one square inch surface area or 0.25 inch maximum depth, or otherwise defective areas. Provide edges perpendicular to the surface and patch with nonshrink grout. Patch tie holes and defects when the forms are removed. Concrete with extensive honeycomb including exposed steel reinforcement, cold joints, entrapped debris, separated aggregate, or other defects which affect the serviceability or structural strength will be rejected, unless correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval of corrective action prior to repair. The surface of the concrete shall not vary more than the allowable tolerances of ACI 347R. Exposed surfaces shall be uniform in appearance and finished to a smooth form finish unless otherwise indicated. Repair cracks greater than 0.006 inches wide with flexible sealant.

3.5.2 Not Against Forms (Top Surfaces)

Finish surfaces not otherwise specified with wood floats to even surfaces, and match adjacent finishes.

3.5.3 Formed Surfaces

3.5.3.1 Tolerances

ACI 117 and as indicated.

3.5.3.2 As-Cast Form

Provide form facing material producing a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. Arrange facing material in an orderly and symmetrical manner and keep seams to a practical minimum. Support forms as necessary to meet required tolerances. Material with raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents, or other defects which will impair the texture of the concrete surface shall not be used. Patch tie holes and defects and completely remove fins.



3.6 FINISHES FOR HORIZONTAL CONCRETE SURFACES

3.6.1 Finish

ACI 301. Place, consolidate, and immediately strike off concrete to obtain proper contour, grade, and elevation before bleedwater appears. Permit concrete to attain a set sufficient for floating and supporting the weight of the finisher and equipment. If bleedwater is present prior to floating the surface, drag excess water off or remove by absorption with porous materials. Do not use dry cement to absorb bleedwater.

3.6.1.1 Scratched

Use for surfaces intended to receive bonded applied cementitious applications. After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, the surface shall be roughened with stiff brushes of rakes before final set.

3.6.1.2 Floated

Exterior slabs where not otherwise specified. After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, do not work the concrete further, until ready for floating. Whether floating with a wood, magnesium, or composite hand float, with a bladed power trowel equipped with float shoes, or with a powered disc, float shall begin when the surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation.

3.6.1.3 Broomed

All horizontal surfaces to recieve a broom finish. Perform a floated finish, then draw a broom or burlap belt across the surface to produce a coarse scored texture. Permit surface to harden sufficiently to retain the scoring or ridges. Broom transverse to traffic.

3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION

a. ACI 301 and ACI 308.1 unless otherwise specified. Prevent concrete from drying by misting surface of concrete. Begin curing immediately following final set. Avoid damage to concrete from vibration created by blasting, pile driving, movement of equipment in the vicinity, disturbance of formwork or protruding reinforcement, by rain or running water, adverse weather conditions, and any other activity resulting in ground vibrations. Protect concrete from injurious action by sun, rain, flowing water, frost, mechanical injury, tire marks, and oil stains. If forms are removed prior to the expiration of the curing period, provide another curing procedure specified herein for the remaining portion of the curing period. Do not allow concrete to dry out from time of placement until the expiration of the specified curing period. If forms are removed prior to the expiration of the curing period, provide another curing procedure specified herein for the remaining portion of the curing period. Provide moist curing for those areas receiving liquid chemical sealer-hardener or epoxy coating.

b. Wet cure marine concrete using potable water for a minimum of 7 days. Do not allow construction loads to exceed the superimposed load which the structural member, with necessary supplemental support, is capable of carrying safely and without damage.

c. Upon completion of moist cure apply chemical curing compound for an



additional 14 days.

3.7.1 Moist Curing

Remove water without erosion or damage to the structure.

3.7.1.1 Ponding or Immersion

Continually immerse the concrete throughout the curing period. Water shall not be 20 degrees F less than the temperature of the concrete. For temperatures between 40 and 50 degrees F, increase the curing period by 50 percent.

3.7.1.2 Fog Spraying or Sprinkling

Apply water uniformly and continuously throughout the curing period. For temperatures between 40 and 50 degrees F, increase the curing period by 50 percent.

3.7.1.3 Pervious Sheeting

Completely cover surface and edges of the concrete with two thicknesses of wet sheeting. Overlap sheeting 6 inches over adjacent sheeting. Sheeting shall be at least as long as the width of the surface to be cured. During application, do not drag the sheeting over the finished concrete nor over sheeting already placed. Wet sheeting thoroughly and keep continuously wet throughout the curing period.

3.7.1.4 Impervious Sheeting

Wet the entire exposed surface of the concrete thoroughly with a fine spray of water and cover with impervious sheeting throughout the curing period. Lay sheeting directly on the concrete surface and overlap edges 12 inches minimum. Provide sheeting not less than 18 inches wider than the concrete surface to be cured. Secure edges and transverse laps to form closed joints. Repair torn or damaged sheeting or provide new sheeting. Cover or wrap columns, walls, and other vertical structural elements from the top down with impervious sheeting; overlap and continuously tape sheeting joints; and introduce sufficient water to soak the entire surface prior to completely enclosing.

3.7.2 Curing Periods

Moist cure concrete using potable water for a minimum of 7 days. Continue additional curing for a total period of 21 days. Begin curing immediately after placement. Protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot temperatures, and mechanical injury; and maintain minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of the concrete. The materials and methods of curing shall be subject to approval by the Owner.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.8.1 Sampling

a. ASTM C172/C172M. Collect samples of fresh concrete to perform tests specified. ASTM C31/C31M for making test specimens.

b. Sample concrete on a random basis except where a batch appears to be



deficient and the test can be used to verify the observed deviation. Identify samples so taken in a manner that they can be segmented from other tests. Obtain at least one sample for each 100 cubic yards, but not less than four (4) samples, of each design mixture of concrete placed in any one day.

3.8.2 Testing

3.8.2.1 Slump Tests

ASTM C143/C143M. Take concrete samples during concrete placement. The maximum slump may be increased as specified with the addition of an approved high range water reducing (HRWR) admixture provided that the water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Perform tests at commencement of concrete placement, when test cylinders are made, and for each batch (minimum) or every 10 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete.

3.8.2.2 Temperature Tests

a. Test the concrete delivered. Perform tests in hot or cold weather conditions below 50 degrees F and above 80 degrees F for each batch (minimum) or every 10 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete, until the specified temperature is obtained, and whenever test cylinders and slump tests are made.

3.8.2.3 Compressive Strength Tests

ACI 214R tests for strength - conduct strength tests of concrete during construction in accordance with the following procedures:

a. Mold and cure six 6 by 12 inch cylinders from each sample taken in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M. Prevent evaporation and loss of water from the specimen.

b. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M. Test one cylinder at 3 days, two cylinders at 7 days, two cylinders at 28 days, and hold one cylinder in reserve. The compressive strength test results for acceptance shall be the average of the compressive strengths from the two specimens tested at 28 days. If one specimen in a test shows evidence of improper sampling, molding or testing, discard the specimen and consider the strength of the remaining cylinder to be the test result. If both specimens in a test show any defects, the Owner's Representative may allow the entire test to be discarded.

c. If the average of any three consecutive strength test results is less than the specified strength (f'c) or the minimum test strength (fcr) for durability, whichever is higher, by more than 500 psi, take a minimum of three core samples in accordance with ASTM C42/C42M, from the in-place work represented by the low test results. Locations represented by erratic core strengths shall be retested. Remove concrete not meeting strength criteria and provide new acceptable concrete. Repair core holes with nonshrink grout. Match color and finish of adjacent concrete.

d. Strength test reports shall include location in the work where the batch represented by a test was deposited, batch ticket number, time batched and sampled, slump, air content (where specified), mixture and ambient temperature, unit weight, and water added on the job. Reports of strength tests shall include detailed information of storage and



curing of specimens prior to testing.

e. Final reports shall be provided within 7 days of test completion.

3.8.2.4 Air Content

ASTM C173/C173M or ASTM C231/C231M for normal weight concrete. Make air content tests on samples from the first three batches in the placement and until three consecutive batches have air contents within the range of the specified air content, at which time test every fifth batch. Maintain this test frequency until a batch is not within the specified range at which time resume testing of each batch until three consecutive batches have air contents within the specified range. Perform additional tests as necessary for control. Take air content tests from planned composite samples or from samples taken in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M at the point of concrete placement.

3.8.3 Acceptance of Concrete Strength

3.8.3.1 Standard Molded and Cured Strength Specimens

When the averages of all sets of three consecutive compressive strength test results equal or exceed the design compressive strength (f'c) or the required field test strength (fcr) whichever is higher, and no individual strength test falls below the specified compressive strength (f'c) or the required field durability strength (fcr) by more than 500 psi, whichever is higher. These criteria also apply when accelerated strength testing is specified unless another basis for acceptance is specified.

3.8.3.2 Core Tests

When the average compressive strengths of the representative cores are equal to at least 85 percent of the design strength (f'c) or the required average test strength (fcr), whichever is higher, and if no single core is less than 75 percent of the specified strength (f'c) or the required average field test strength (fcr), whichever is higher, strength of concrete is satisfactory.

3.8.4 Crack Repair

Crack inspections must be completed 120 days after concrete placement. Crack inspections completed earlier will not be accepted. Repair all cracks 0.006 inch and wider with urethane grout injection. The proposed method and materials to repair the cracks shall be submitted for approval.



DIVISION 5

METALS


SECTION 05 05 23.16

STRUCTURAL WELDING08/18

PART 1 GENERAL

This specification section covers all welding required as part of this contract.

1.1 REFERENCES



AWS A2.4 (2012) Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination

AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2015; Errata 1 2015; Errata 2 2016) Structural Welding Code - Steel

AWS QC1 (2016) Specification for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors

AWS Z49.1 (2012) Safety in Welding and Cutting and Allied Processes

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Welding Procedure Qualifications

Welder, Welding Operator, and Tacker Qualification

Previous Qualifications

Pre-Qualified Procedures

Welding Electrodes and Rods

SD-06 Test Reports

Weld Inspection Log

SD-07 Certificates

Certified Welding Inspector



1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Material with welds will not be accepted unless the welding is specified or indicated on the drawings or otherwise approved. Perform welding asspecified in this section, except where additional requirements are shown on the drawings or are specified in other sections. Do not commence weldinguntil welding procedures, inspectors, nondestructive testing personnel,welders, welding operators, and tackers have been qualified and thesubmittals approved by the Owner. Perform all testing at or near the worksite. Each Contractor performing welding must maintain records of the testresults obtained in welding procedure, welder, welding operator, and tackerperformance qualifications.


Except for pre-qualified (in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M) and previously qualified procedures, each Contractor performing welding must record in detail and qualify the welding procedure specification for any welding procedure followed in the fabrication of weldments. Conform welding procedure qualifications to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and to the specifications in this section. Submit for approval copies of the welding procedure specification and the procedure qualification records for each type of welding being performed. Submission of the welder, welding operator, or tacker qualification test records is also required. Approval of any procedure, however, does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for producing a finished structure meeting all the specified requirements. Submit this information on the forms in Annex M of AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Individually identify and clearly reference on the detail drawings and erection drawings all welding procedure specifications, or suitably key them to the contract drawings. In case of conflict between this specification and AWS D1.1/D1.1M, this specification governs.

1.4.1 Previous Qualifications

Welding procedures previously qualified by test in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, may be accepted for this contract without re-qualification, upon receipt of the test results, if the following conditions are met:

a. Testing was performed by an approved testing laboratory, technical consultant, or the Contractor's approved quality control organization.

b. The qualified welding procedure conforms to the requirements of this specification and is applicable to welding conditions encountered under this contract.

c. The welder, welding operator, and tacker qualification tests conform to the requirements of this specification and are applicable to welding conditions encountered under this contract.

1.4.2 Pre-qualified Procedures

Welding procedures which are considered pre-qualified as specified in AWS D1.1/D1.1M will be accepted without further qualification. Submit for approval a listing or an annotated drawing to indicate the joints not pre-qualified. Procedure qualification is mandatory for these joints.

1.4.3 Welder, Welding Operator, and Tacker Qualification

Each welder, welding operator, and tacker assigned to work on this contract



must be qualified in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M and as specified in this section. Welders, welding operators, and tackers who make acceptable procedure qualification test welds will be considered qualified for the welding procedure used.

1.4.3.1 Previous Personnel Qualifications

At the discretion of the Owner, welders, welding operators, and tackers qualified by test within the previous 6 months may be accepted for this contract without re-qualification if all the following conditions are met:

a. Copies of the welding procedure specifications, the procedure qualification test records, and the welder, welding operator, and tacker qualification test records are submitted and approved in accordance with the specified requirements for detail drawings.

b. Testing was performed by an approved testing laboratory, technical consultant, or the Contractor's approved quality control organization.

c. The welder, welding operator, and tacker qualification tests conform to the requirements of this specification and are applicable to welding conditions encountered under this contract.

1.4.3.2 Certificates

Before assigning any welder, welding operator, or tacker to work under this contract, submit the names and certification that each individual is qualified as specified. State in the certification the type of welding and positions for which the welder, welding operator, or tacker is qualified, the code and procedure under which the individual is qualified, the date qualified, and the name of the firm and person certifying the qualification tests. Keep the certification current, on file, and furnish 3 copies.

1.4.3.3 Renewal of Qualification

Re-qualification of a welder or welding operator is required under any of the following conditions:

a. It has been more than 6 months since the welder or welding operator has used the specific welding process for which he is qualified.

b. There is specific reason to question the welder or welding operator's ability to make welds that meet the requirements of these specifications.

c. The welder or welding operator was qualified by an employer other than those firms performing work under this contract, and a qualification test has not been taken within the past 12 months. Submit as evidence of conformance all records showing periods of employment, name of employer where welder, or welding operator, was last employed, and the process for which qualified.

d. A tacker who passes the qualification test is considered eligible to perform tack welding indefinitely in the positions and with the processes for which he/she is qualified, unless there is some specific reason to question the tacker's ability or there has been a gap greater than 6 months since he/she last used the process. In such a case, the tacker is required to pass the prescribed tack welding test.



1.4.4 Inspector Qualification

Submit certificates indicating that certified welding inspectors meet the requirements of AWS QC1.

1.4.5 Symbols and Safety

Use symbols in accordance with AWS A2.4, unless otherwise indicated. Follow safe welding practices and safety precautions during welding in conformance with AWS Z49.1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WELDING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

Provide all welding equipment, welding electrodes and rods, welding wire, and fluxes capable of producing satisfactory welds when used by a qualified welder or welding operator. Provide welding equipment and materials that comply with the applicable requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Submit product data on welding electrodes and rods.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 WELDING OPERATIONS

3.1.1 Requirements

Conform workmanship and techniques for welded construction to the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.2 QUALITY CONTROL

Perform testing using an approved inspection or testing laboratory or technical consultant; or if approved, the Contractor's inspection and testing personnel may be used instead of the commercial inspection or testing laboratory or technical consultant. A Certified Welding Inspector must perform visual inspection on 100 percent of all welds. Document this inspection in the Visual Weld Inspection Log. Conform procedures and techniques for inspection with applicable requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.3 CORRECTIONS AND REPAIRS

If inspection or testing indicates defects in the weld joints, repair defective welds using a qualified welder or welding operator as applicable. Conduct corrections in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the specifications. Repair all defects in accordance with the approved procedures. Repair defects discovered between passes before additional weld material is deposited. Wherever a defect is removed and repair by welding is not required, blend the affected area into the surrounding surface to eliminate sharp notches, crevices, or corners. After a defect is thought to have been removed, and before re-welding, examine the area by suitable methods to ensure that the defect has been eliminated. Repaired welds must meet the inspection requirements for the original welds.




SECTION 05 12 00

STRUCTURAL STEEL08/18

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

AISC 303 (2016) Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges

AISC 325 (2017) Steel Construction Manual

AISC 326 (2009) Detailing for Steel Construction

AISC 360 (2016) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings


AWS A2.4 (2012) Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination


ASTM A36/A36M (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A53/A53M (2018) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A123/A123M (2017) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A153/A153M (2016) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A307 (2014; E 2017) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength

ASTM A563 (2015) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

ASTM A572/A572M (2018) Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel



ASTM A653/A653M (2019) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A780/A780M (2009; R 2015) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM A992/A992M (2011; R 2015) Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes

ASTM C827/C827M (2016) Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures

ASTM C1107/C1107M (2017) Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

ASTM F436/F436M (2016) Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers Inch and Metric Dimensions

ASTM F844 (2007a; R 2013) Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use

ASTM F1554 (2018) Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength

ASTM F2329/F2329M (2015) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners

ASTM F3125/F3125M (2015a) Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions


29 CFR Part 1926, Subpart R Steel Erection

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Fabrication Drawings Including Details of Connections

SD-03 Product Data

Non-Shrink Grout

SD-06 Test Reports



Bolts, Nuts, and Washers

Bolt Testing Reports

SD-07 Certificates

Steel

Bolts, Nuts, and Washers

Galvanizing


1.3.1 Fabrication Drawing Requirements

Submit fabrication drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Prepare in accordance with AISC 303, AISC 326 and AISC 325. Fabrication drawings must not be reproductions of contract drawings. Include complete information for the fabrication and erection of the structure's components, including the location, type, and size of bolts, welds, member sizes and lengths, connection details, blocks, copes, and cuts. Use AWS A2.4 standard welding symbols. Clearly highlight any deviations from the details shown on the contract drawings highlighted on the fabrication drawings. Explain the reasons for any deviations from the contract drawings.

1.3.2 Certifications

1.3.2.1 Welding Procedures and Qualifications

Conform to all requirements specified in 05 05 23.16 STRUCTURAL WELDING.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Provide the structural steel system complete and ready for use. Provide structural steel systems including design, materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, inspection, quality control, and testing in accordance with AISC 303 and AISC 360 except as modified in this contract.

2.2 STEEL

2.2.1 Structural Steel

ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50, ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A992/A992M.

2.2.2 Steel Pipe

ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B. Handrails must be Schedule 80 pipe and guide pile pin connections must be X-strong (XS).

2.3 BOLTS, NUTS, AND WASHERS

Submit the certified manufacturer's mill reports which clearly show the applicable ASTM mechanical and chemical requirements together with the actual test results for the supplied fasteners.



2.3.1 Common Grade Bolts

2.3.1.1 Bolts

ASTM A307, Grade A, plain finish hot dipped galvanized coating. The bolt heads and the nuts of the supplied fasteners must be marked with the manufacturer's identification mark, the strength grade and type specified by ASTM specifications.

2.3.1.2 Nuts

ASTM A563, Grade A, heavy hex style.

2.3.1.3 Washers

ASTM F844.

2.3.2 High-Strength Bolts

High strength bolts and nuts must be shipped together in the same shipping container. Fasteners indicated to be galvanized shall be tested by the supplier to show that the galvanized nut with the supplied lubricant provided may be rotated from the snug tight condition well in excess of the rotation required for pretentioned installation without stripping. The supplier shall supply nuts that have been lubricated and tested with the supplied bolts.

2.3.2.1 Bolts

ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325M A325, Type 1 Heavy Hex Head Style, plain finish hot dipped galvanized coating.

2.3.2.2 Nuts

ASTM A563, Grade and Style as specified in the applicable ASTM bolt standard.

2.3.2.3 Washers

ASTM F436/F436M, plain carbon steel.

2.3.3 Foundation Anchorage

2.3.3.1 Anchor Rods

ASTM F1554 Gr 36 , Class 1A.

2.3.3.2 Anchor Nuts

ASTM A563, Grade A, hex style.

2.3.3.3 Anchor Washers

ASTM F436/F436M.

2.4 HANDRAILS

Provide steel handrails of 2.5 inches nominal size, as specified in



drawings. All railings must be hop dip galvanized. Provide kickplates as indicated.

Fabrication: Joist posts, rail, and corners by the following method:

a. Mitered and welded joints made by fitting post to top of railand intermediate rail to post, groove welding joints, and grindingsmooth. Butt railing splices and reinforce them by a tight fittinginterior sleeve not less than 6 inches long.

b. Railings must be bent at corners, as specified on drawings.Bends must be made in suitable jigs so the pipe is not crushed.

2.5 STRUCTURAL STEEL ACCESSORIES

2.5.1 Non-Shrink Grout

ASTM C1107/C1107M, with no ASTM C827/C827M shrinkage. Submit product data for non-shrink grout.

2.6 GALVANIZING

ASTM F2329/F2329M for threaded parts, as applicable, unless specified otherwise galvanize after fabrication where practicable.

Hot dip galvanize all ladders, handrails, platforms, anchorage andaccessories after fabrication where practicable. All galvanizing must be in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M, ASTM A153/A153M, or ASTM A653/A653M as applicable.

Galvanize all ladders, handrails, platforms, anchor bolts, washers, and parts or devices necessary for proper installation, unless indicated otherwise. Tie-back wale, and associated hardware must be epoxy coated.

2.7 FABRICATION

Fabrication must be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AISC 325. Fabrication and assembly must be done in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Punch, subpunch and ream, or drill bolt holes perpendicular to the surface of the member.

Shop splices of members between field splices will be permitted only where indicated on the Contract Drawings. Splices not indicated require the approval of the Owner.

2.7.1 Markings

Prior to erection, identify members by a painted erection mark. Connecting parts assembled in the shop for reaming holes in field connections must be match marked with scratch and notch marks. Do not locate erection markings on areas to be welded. Do not locate match markings in areas that will decrease member strength or cause stress concentrations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

a. Erection of structural steel must be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AISC 325, AISC 303 and 29 CFR Part 1926, Subpart R.



After final positioning of steel members, provide full bearing under base plates and bearing plates using nonshrink grout. Place nonshrink grout in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3.1.1 STORAGE

Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store the material out of contact with the ground in such manner and location as to minimize deterioration.

3.2 RAILING LAYOUT

Prior to proceeding with the railing fabrication, railing spacing must beadjusted as necessary to suit actual and planned conditions including curbcuts, ladder, and scuppers locations.

3.2.1 Preparation

Adjust railing and handrails prior to securing in place to ensure propermatching at butting joints and correct alignment throughout their length.Space posts not more than 8 feet on center. Plumb posts in each direction.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

Except as modified in this section, design connections indicated in accordance with AISC 360. Build connections into existing work. Do not tighten anchor bolts set in concrete with impact torque wrenches. Holes must not be cut or enlarged by burning. Bolts, nuts, and washers must be clean of dirt and rust, and lubricated immediately prior to installation.

3.3.1 Common Grade Bolts

Tighten ASTM A307 bolts to a "snug tight" fit. "Snug tight" is the tightness that exists when plies in a joint are in firm contact. If firm contact of joint plies cannot be obtained with a few impacts of an impact wrench, or the full effort of a man using a spud wrench, contact the Owner for further instructions.


Provide direct tension indicator washers in all ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325 and Grade A490 bolted connections. Bolts must be installed in connection holes and initially brought to a snug tight fit. After the initial tightening procedure, fully tension bolts, progressing from the most rigid part of a connection to the free edges.

Fastener components shall be protected from dirt and moisture in closed containers at the site of the installation. Fastener components that are not incorporated into the work shall be returned to protected storage at the end of the work shift.

3.3.3 Tension Control Bolts

Bolts must be installed in connection holes and initially brought to a snug tight fit. After the initial tightening procedure, fully tension bolts, progressing from the most rigid part of a connection to the free edges.



3.4 GAS CUTTING

Use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors is not permitted on any member.

3.5 WELDING

Welding must be in accordance with 05 05 23.16 STRUCTURAL WELDING.

3.5.1 Removal of Temporary Welds, Run-Off Plates, and Backing Strips

Remove only from finished areas. Elsewhere removal is not required, but must be field coated in accordance with 09 97 13.26 COATING OF STEEL WATERFRONT STRUCTURES.

3.6 GALVANIZING REPAIR

Repair damage to galvanized coatings using ASTM A780/A780M zinc rich paint for galvanizing damaged by handling, transporting, cutting, welding, or bolting. Do not heat surfaces to which repair paint has been applied.


Perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. Notify the Owner in writing of defective welds, bolts, nuts, and washers within 7 working days of the date of the inspection.


3.7.1.1 Testing Bolt, Nut, and Washer Assemblies

Test a minimum of 3 bolt, nut, and washer assemblies from each mill certificate batch in a tension measuring device at the job site prior to the beginning of bolting start-up. Demonstrate that the bolts and nuts, when used together, can develop tension not less than the provisions specified in AISC 360, depending on bolt size and grade. The bolt tension must be developed by tightening the nut. A representative of the manufacturer or supplier must be present to ensure that the fasteners are properly used, and to demonstrate that the fastener assemblies supplied satisfy the specified requirements. Submit bolt testing reports.

3.7.1.2 Inspection

Inspection procedures must be in accordance with AISC 360. Confirm and report to the Owner that the materials meet the project specification and that they are properly stored. Confirm that the faying surfaces have been properly prepared before the connections are assembled. Observe the specified job site testing and calibration, and confirm that the procedure to be used provides the required tension. Monitor the work to ensure the testing procedures are routinely followed on joints that are specified to be fully tensioned.




SECTION 05 30 00.01

MOORING HARDWARE05/15

PART 1 GENERAL

Work under this section covers supply, testing and installation of the mooring cleats as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. Installation includes bolting of mooring hardware, grouting of base, filling hardware with grout and filling of bolt holes.

1.1 REFERENCES





ASTM A27/A27M (2017) Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application


ASTM A449 (2014) Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use

ASTM A563 (2015) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

ASTM C1107/C1107M (2017) Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

ASTM C920 (2018) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM D3363 (2005; E 2011; R 2011; E 2012) Film Hardness by Pencil Test

ASTM D4541 (2017) Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers

ASTM F1554 (2018) Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength



ASTM F436 (2011) Hardened Steel Washers

SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

SSPC SP 1 (2015) Solvent Cleaning

SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2 (2007) Near-White Blast Cleaning

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Owner approval is required for all submittals. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


Installation Procedures Plan

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Cleats

SD-03 Product Data

Cleats

Anchorage Hardware

Plates

Nuts and Washers

Grout

Sealants

Coating System Data Sheets

SD-05 Design Data

Design Calculations

SD-06 Test Reports

Anchorage Hardware

Test Reports

Laboratory Testing Results

SD-07 Certificates

Cleats

Anchorage Hardware

Plates

Nuts and Washers



Grout

Sealants

Anchor Testing Personnel

Testing Laboratory

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Mooring hardware shall be delivered and stored in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Mooring hardware shall not be dropped, dragged or handled in any manner that will result in damage.

1.4 DESIGN CALCULATIONS

Submit detailed design calculations demonstrating proposed mooring hardware meets the loading requirements. Calculations must be stamped by a registered Professional Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MOORING HARDWARE

2.1.1 Cleats

Cleats shall be new cast steel 16 inch as shown on the Contract Drawings. Cleat material shall be cast steel conforming to ASTM A27/A27M, Grade 65-35. Cleats shall have a minimum working capacity of 5 tons. The factor of safety against yielding shall be 2.0 and the factor of safety against breaking shall be 3.0.

2.2 ANCHORAGE HARDWARE

The size and quantity of anchorage bolts shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations and conforming to ASTM A449 or ASTM F1554 Grade 105. Anchor hardware shall be supplied by the manufacturer and include plates and nuts and washers. Nuts shall conform to ASTM A563. Washers shall conform to ASTM F436. Plates shall conform to ASTM A36/A36M. All anchorage hardware must be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. All anchorage hardware shall be in accordance with Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL and designed in accordance with the latest edition of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction.

Test a minimum of two anchorage hardware assemblies to confirm conformance with the required material properties and submit the results of this testing.

2.3 GROUT

Grout for annulus of the fittings and grout pocket shall be non-shrink, non-metallic high performance cementitious grout having a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 4000 psi and minimum aggregate size of 3/8 inch. Grout shall conform to ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade C.



2.4 SEALANTS

ASTM C920, Type S, one component, Grade P pourable or self-leveling type sealant.

2.5 FINISH

Before applying coating system, mooring hardware shall be cleaned of any grease or other foreign matter with suitable degreaser in accordance with SSPC SP 1. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2. Submit coating system data sheets.

Mooring hardware shall be finished with a three coat paint system. Fitting shall be primed at the factory prior to shipping to prevent rust and damage during shipping. Intermediate coat and top coat shall be applied at the jobsite to minimum thicknesses of 3.0 mils each.

2.5.1 Primer

Consist of an inorganic zinc rich primer with a minimum adhesion of 1500 psi in accordance with ASTM D4541.

2.5.2 Intermediate Coat

Minimum adhesion of 1500 psi in accordance with ASTM D4541.

2.5.3 Top Coat

Top coat shall be "Safety Yellow". Top Coat shall have a minimum of 2500 psi adhesion in accordance with ASTM D4541, hardness in accordance with ASTM D3363 and free of any defects including, but not limited to, blistering and cracking.

2.6 TESTING

Anchorage hardware testing must be completed by an independent testing laboratory. Submit experience and qualifications for the anchor testing personnel and testing laboratory prior to testing.

A minimum of two anchors must be tested to ensure the anchors conform to the requirements stated herein. Submit all laboratory testing results.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 MOORING HARDWARE INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Fittings

Submit Installation Procedures Plan in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Place fittings level and install anchorage hardware. Nuts shall be hand tightened before grouting of base. After grout has cured for seven days, nuts shall be torqued to 5,000 in-lbs and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Double nut bottom fasteners, where required, to prevent loosening. Fill annulus of mooring hardware with grout and seal bolt pockets with with sealant. Countersunk bolts shall be filled with non-shrink grout to prevent standing water. To prevent damage to vessel mooring lines, no sharp edges around the bolting area shall exist after installation.



Ensure all temperature requirements specified by product manufacturer's are met throughout construction. Provide cold weather controls as necessary to ensure proper curing of all products.

3.1.2 Anchorage Hardware

Bolts shall be held in place with templates that match mooring hardware patterns. Bolt pattern template to be supplied by the manufacturer. Core holes through existing concrete as shown on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Shift hardware to avoid interferences with reinforcing steel and remnant anchor bolts.


Perform field test, and provide labor, equipment and incidentals required for field testing anchorage hardware. Notify the Owner in writing of defective bolts, nuts and washers within seven working days of the date of the testing.

3.2.1 Anchorage Hardware In-Situ Testing

Test a minimum of two anchorage hardware assemblies to confirm conformance with the required material properties and submit the test reports within 24 hours of test completion.

Anchors that fail testing shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.



DIVISION 6

WOODS, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES


SECTION 06 13 33

TIMBERWORK11/16

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

AWPA M4 (2015) Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products

AWPA M6 (2013) Brands Used on Preservative Treated Materials

AWPA P5 (2015) Standard for Waterborne Preservatives

AWPA P34 (2014) Standard for Copper Naphthenate, Waterbone (CuN-W)

AWPA T1 (2017) Use Category System: Processing and Treatment Standard

AWPA U1 (2017) Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood





ASTM D5643/D5643M (2012) Standard Specification for Coal Tar Roof Cement, Asbestos Free

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

MIL-P-21035 (1991; Rev B; Notice 2 2003) Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair (Metric)



WESTERN WOOD PRESERVERS INSTITUTE (WWPI)

WWPI Mgt Practices (1996; R 2011) Best Management Practices for the Use of Treated Wood in Aquatic and Wetland Environments

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Timberwork

SD-06 Test Reports

Preservative Treatment

Delivery Inspection List

SD-07 Certificates

SDS and CIS

Best Management Practices (BMPs)


Handle and store piles in accordance with AWPA M4. Follow precautions identified in SDS and CIS provided by the supplier of treated wood products.

Open-stack untreated timber and lumber material on skids at least 12 inches above ground, in a manner that will prevent warping and allow shedding of water. Close-stack treated timber and lumber material in a manner that will prevent long timbers or preframed material from sagging or becoming crooked. Keep ground under and within 5 feet of such piles free of weeds, rubbish, and combustible materials. Protect materials from weather. Handle treated timber with ropes or chain slings without dropping, breaking outer fibers, bruising, or penetrating surface with tools. Do not use cant dogs, peaveys, hooks, or pike poles. Protect timber and hardware from damage.


1.4.1 Preservative Treatment - Pier Timberworks

The Contractor must be responsible for the quality of treated wood products. The Contractor must provide the Owner with the inspection report of an independent inspection agency certifying that the offered products comply with applicable AWPA standards. Identify treatment on each piece by the quality mark of an agency accredited by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standard Committee. Inspect all preservative-treated wood visually to ensure there are no excessive residual materials or preservative deposits. Material must be clean and dry or it will be rejected because of environmental concerns.

1.4.2 SDS and CIS

Provide Safety Data Sheets (SDS) and Consumer Information Sheets (CIS)



associated with timber pile preservative treatment. Contractor must comply with all safety precautions indicated on SDS and CIS.

1.4.3 Delivery Inspection List

Field inspect and submit a verification list of each treated timber member and each strapped bundle of treated lumber indicating the wording and lettering of the quality control markings, the species and the condition of the wood. Do not incorporate materials damaged in transport from plant to site. Inspect all preservative-treated wood, visually to ensure there are no excessive residual materials or preservative deposits. Material must be clean and dry or it will be rejected due to environmental concerns.

1.4.4 Best Management Practices (BMPs)

The producer of the treated wood products must provide certification that WWPI Mgt Practices for the use of Treated Wood in Aquatic and Wetland Environments were utilized including a written description and appropriate documentation of the BMPs utilized.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TIMBERWORK

Submit drawings of treated timber showing dimensions of cut, framed, or bored timbers.

2.2 MATERIALS

2.2.1 Lumber and Timbers

2.2.1.1 Solid Sawn

Provide solid sawn lumber and timbers of stress-rated No. 2 Southern Pine or Douglas Fir-Larch and identified by the grade mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency using the specific grading requirements of an association recognized as covering the species used. The association or independent inspection agency must be certified by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade the species used.

2.2.2 Preservative Treatment

Fabricate lumber and timbers before preservative treatment. Each piece of treated lumber or timber must be branded, by the producer, in accordance with AWPA M6. The type of preservative, retention, and penetration must be based on Use Category and species and in accordance with AWPA U1 and AWPA T1. The Contractor must be responsible for the quality of treated wood products.

The timber preservative treatment must be Waterborne preservative in accordance with AWPA P5 (ACZA - Ammoniacal Copper Zinc Arsenate, CCA - Chromated Copper Arsenate) to a minimum retention of 2.5 pounds per cubic foot.

2.2.3 Field Treatment

Piles must be field treated in accordance with AWPA M4. All cuts, holes and injuries such as holes from removal of spikes or nails which may penetrate the treated zone must be field treated with copper naphthenate



conforming to AWPA P34.

2.2.4 Hardware

Pile hardware must consist of bolts with necessary nuts and washers, timber connectors, drift pins, dowels, nails, screws, spikes, and other fastenings. Bolts and nuts must conform to ASTM A307. Provide cast-iron ogee, malleable iron washers, or plate or cut washers where indicated. Provide bolts with washers under nut and head. Provide timber connectors and other metal fastenings of type and size indicated. Hot-dip galvanize all hardware specified or indicated in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M, as applicable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Cut, bevel, and face timbers prior to plant preservative treatment. In addition to the contract clause entitled "Accident Prevention" provide protective equipment for personnel fabricating, field treating, or handling materials treated with creosote or water-borne salts. Refer to paragraph SDS AND CIS.

3.1.1 Framing

Cut and frame lumber and timber so that joints will fit over contact surface. Secure timbers and piles in alignment. Open joints are unacceptable. Shimming is not allowed. Drill holes for drift pins and dowels with a bit 1/16 inch less in diameter than the pin or dowel. Drill holes for truss rods or bolts with a bit 1/16 inch larger in diameter than rod or bolt. Drill holes for lag screws in two parts. Make lead hole for shank the same diameter as shank. Make lead hole for the threaded portion approximately two-thirds of the shank diameter. Drill holes in small timbers for boat or wire spikes with a bit of the same diameter or smallest dimension of the spike to prevent splitting. Counterbore for countersinking along all fender faces.

3.1.2 Fender Systems

Face fender piles to receive chocks. Use only full-length timbers for chocks and tightly fit against fender piles. Face fender piles to provide a flat bearing against wales. Splice wales in location in a manner as indicated. Additional splicing of wales will not be permitted. Bevel tops of fender piles outboard as indicated.

3.1.3 Fastening

Vertical bolts must have nuts on the lower end. Where bolts are used to fasten timber to timber, timber to concrete, or timber to steel, bolt members together when they are installed and retighten immediately prior to final acceptance of contract. Provide bolts having sufficient additional threading to provide at least 3/8 inch per foot thickness of timber for future retightening. Provide timber connectors of types indicated.

3.2 FIELD TREATMENT

3.2.1 Pier timberwork

Field treat all cuts, holes, bevels, notches, refacing, abrasions, and



injuries such as abrasions or holes from removal of spikes or nails made in the field in treated piles or timbers in accordance with AWPA M4, SDS and CIS. Trim cuts and abrasions before field treatment. Depressions or openings around bolt holes, joints, or gaps including recesses formed by counterboring must be field treated with copper naphthenate conforming to AWPA P34; and after bolt or screw is in place, fill with coal-tar roofing cement conforming to ASTM D5643/D5643M.

3.2.2 Galvanized Surfaces

Repair and recoat zinc coating which has been field or shop cut, burned by welding, abraded, or otherwise damaged to such an extent as to expose the base metal. Thoroughly clean the damaged area by wire brushing and remove traces of welding flux and loose or cracked zinc coating prior to painting. Paint cleaned area with two coats of zinc oxide-zinc dust paint conforming to MIL-P-21035. Compound paint with a suitable vehicle in a ratio of one part zinc oxide to four parts zinc dust by weight.



DIVISION 9

FINISHES


SECTION 09 97 13.26

COATING OF STEEL WATERFRONT STRUCTURES04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM D7091 (2013) Standard Practice for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Nonmagnetic Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals and Nonmagnetic, Nondestructive Coatings Applied to Non-Ferrous Metals

ASTM E376 (2019) Standard Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic-Field or Eddy Current (Electromagnetic) Testing Methods

SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

SSPC Paint 16 (2006; R 2015; E 2015) Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide Black (or Dark Red) Paint

SSPC SP 1 (2015) Solvent Cleaning

SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2 (2007) Near-White Blast Cleaning

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Coal tar epoxy-polyamide

Manufacturer's recommendations and literature for field repair procedures of specified coatings.

SD-07 Certificates

Coal tar epoxy-polyamide

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Start work only when the fabrication shop's ambient and curing temperatures are within limits of coating manufacturer's recommendations and at least 5 degrees F above dew point temperature.



1.4 SAFETY AND HEALTH PRECAUTIONS

Materials listed in this section contain coal tar pitch volatiles, which are toxic. Follow safety procedures as recommended by manufacturer. Work in a well ventilated area. Provide, and require workers to use, impervious clothing, gloves, face shields (8 inch minimum), and other appropriate protective clothing necessary to prevent eye and skin contact with coating materials. Keep coatings away from heat, sparks and flame.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COATING SYSTEMS

2.1.1 Coating

Provide catalyst component for coating specific for resin components. Use thinners which are compatible with the coating.

2.1.1.1 Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide

SSPC Paint 16 Black

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CLEANING AND PREPARATION OF SURFACES

3.1.1 Solvent Cleaning

SSPC SP 1. Remove visible oil, grease, and drawing and cutting compounds by solvent cleaning.

3.1.2 Blast Cleaning

SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2. After solvent cleaning, complete surface preparation by near-white blast cleaning. Remove residual dust from blasted surface by blowing with dry, oil-free air, vacuuming, or sweeping. Provide surface profile in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations, but no less than 2-1/2-mil.

3.2 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING OF COATING SYSTEM

3.2.1 Proportioning of Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide System

Coal tar epoxy-polyamide consists of a two-component system. Component A contains a refined coal tar pitch, polyamide resin, and a polyamine promoter to accelerate curing rate. Component B is an epoxy resin. Mix both components in a ratio of 4 parts of Component A to 1 part of Component B by volume. Do not thin coatings when doing so will result in total volatile organic compounds exceeding limits enacted by local air pollution control districts. When thinning is allowed and is necessary for proper application, use xylene or the coating manufacturer's recommended thinner, to a maximum of 1/2 gallon to a 5-gallon batch.

3.2.2 Mixing of Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide System

Power stir components to a smooth, uniform consistency. Stir coating periodically during induction period. Follow coating manufacturer's requirements for induction time and pot life of mixed batches.



3.3 COATING APPLICATION

3.3.1 General

Apply primer coating to dry surfaces not more than 4 hours after near-white blast cleaning. Apply coats of each system so that finished surfaces are free from runs, sags, brush marks and variations in color.

3.3.1.1 Application Method for Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide System

Unless otherwise specified by manufacturer's recommendations, do not allow drying time between coats to exceed 72 hours. Under conditions of direct sunlight or elevated ambient temperatures of 90 degrees F or greater, limit intercoat drying period to a maximum of 24 hours.

3.3.2 Repair of Defects

Repair detected coating holidays, thin areas, and exposed areas damaged prior to or during installation by surface treatment and application of additional coating in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and literature. Allow a period of at least 72 hours to pass following final coat before placing in immersion service.

3.3.3 Two-Coat Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide System

Apply each coat at a dry film thickness of not less than 8 mils.

3.3.4 Dry Film Thickness

Provide total system minimum dry film thickness of 16 mils. Measure using a magnetic gage.

3.4 SURFACES TO BE COATED

Steel sheet piles, steel wales, and associated assemblies. Coat the exterior surface along length of the sheet piles from top of pile to 10 feet below mudline. Coat full length of wales.

3.5 FIELD TESTS

Field tests shall be witnessed by the Owner. Advise the Owner five (5) days prior to performing each field test.

3.5.1 Holiday Testing

Prior to installation, test for holidays in total coating system. Use a low-voltage holiday detector of less than 90 volts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. After repair of holidays by surface treatment and application of additional coating or by manufacturer's recommendation, retest with a low-voltage holiday detector.

3.5.2 Dry Film Thickness

After repair of holidays, measure dry film thickness using a magnetic dry film thickness gage in accordance with ASTM D7091 and ASTM E376. Re-measure after an additional coat is applied, and add it to meet minimum thickness requirements.



DIVISION 26

ELECTRICAL


SECTION 26 00 00.00 20

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.


ASTM D709 (2017) Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials


IEEE 100 (2000; Archived) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms


NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

NEMA 250 (2018) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)



1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

This section applies to certain sections of Division 02, EXISTING CONDITIONS. This section applies to sections of Division 26 ELECTRICAL of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections. This section has been incorporated into, and thus, does not apply to, and is not referenced in the following sections.

Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMSection 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

1.3 DEFINITIONS

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE 100.

b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 1


sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of submittal types.

c. The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical sections that describe products, systems, installation procedures, equipment, and test methods.

1.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 120/208 volts secondary, three phase, four wire. Final connections to the power distribution system shall be made at the Eversource transformer.

1.5 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION

Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must conform to the following additional requirements as applicable.

1.5.1 Shop Drawings (SD-02)

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, existing piping, existing ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.

1.5.2 Product Data (SD-03)

Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves.


1.6.1 Regulatory Requirements

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Portsmouth Building and Electrical Inspectors. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.

1.6.2 Standard Products

Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 2


manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section.

1.6.2.1 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.

1.6.2.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date

Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.7 WARRANTY

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.8 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions shall include the following:

a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment.

b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures.

c. Safety precautions.

d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.

e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item of equipment.

Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed by Owner. For operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.

1.9 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

1.10 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES

ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 3


sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.

1.11 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and requirements specified herein.

1.12 INSTRUCTION TO OWNER'S PERSONNEL

Where specified in the technical sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the Owner in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified systems and equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as required. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Owner for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instructions to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH

Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements specified in the technical sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING

Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets.


SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 4


SECTION 26 20 00

INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM08/19

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI C12.1 ((2014; Errata 2016) Electric Meters - Code for Electricity Metering


ASTM B1 (2013) Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

ASTM B8 (2011; R 2017) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

ASTM D709 (2017) Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials


IEEE 81 (2012) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System




ANSI C80.1 (2005) American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

ANSI C80.3 (2015) American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)


NEMA FU 1 (2012) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses

NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2015) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements



NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2016) Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures

NEMA KS 1 (2013) Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V Maximum)

NEMA RN 1 (2005; R 2013) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA TC 2 (2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit

NEMA TC 3 (2016) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

NEMA WD 1 (1999; R 2015) Standard for General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices

NEMA WD 6 (2016) Wiring Devices Dimensions Specifications



NFPA 70E (2018; TIA 18-1; TIA 81-2) Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)

TIA-607 (2015c; Addendum 1 2017) Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises


29 CFR 1910.147 The Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag Out)

29 CFR 1910.303 Electrical, General

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL 1 (2005; Reprint Aug 2017) UL Standard for Safety Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 6 (2007; Reprint Sep 2019) UL Standard for Safety Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel

UL 44 (2018) UL Standard for Safety Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables



UL 50 (2015) UL Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations

UL 67 (2018; Reprint Mar 2019) UL Standard for Safety Panelboards

UL 83 (2017) UL Standard for Safety Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 198M (2018) UL Standard for Mine-Duty Fuses

UL 360 (2013; Reprint Nov 2018) UL Standard for Safety Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 486A-486B (2018) UL Standard for Safety Wire Connectors

UL 486C (2018) UL Standard for Safety Splicing Wire Connectors

UL 489 (2016) UL Standard for Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 498 (2017; Reprint Dec 2018) UL Standard for Safety Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 510 (2017) UL Standard for Safety Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 514A (2013; Reprint Aug 2017) UL Standard for Safety Metallic Outlet Boxes

UL 514B (2012; Reprint Nov 2014) Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings

UL 514C (2014; Reprint Nov 2018) UL Standard for Safety Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers

UL 651 (2011; Reprint Nov 2018) UL Standard for Safety Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings

UL 674 (2011; Reprint Nov 2018) UL Standard for Safety Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 797 (2007; Reprint Mar 2017) UL Standard for Safety Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel

UL 869A (2006) Reference Standard for Service Equipment

UL 943 (2016; Reprint Feb 2018) UL Standard for Safety Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters



UL 1203 (2013; Reprint Apr 2018) UL Standard for Safety Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 1283 (2017) UL Standard for Safety Electromagnetic Interference Filters

UL 1449 (2014; Reprint Jul 2017) UL Standard for Safety Surge Protective Devices

UL 1569 (2018) UL Standard for Safety Metal-Clad Cables

UL 1660 (2019) Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

UL 4248-1 (2017) UL Standard for Safety Fuseholders - Part 1: General Requirements

UL 4248-12 (2018) UL Standard for Safety Fuseholders - Part 12: Class R

1.2 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in IEEE 100.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Owner's approval is required for:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Panelboards

Marking Strips Drawings

SD-03 Product Data

Receptacles

Circuit Breakers

Switches

Enclosed Circuit Breakers

Metering

Surge Protective Devices

SD-06 Test Reports

600-volt Wiring Test

Grounding System Test



Ground-fault Receptacle Test

Phase Rotation Test

SD-07 Certificates

Fuses


Electrical Systems, Data Package 5

Metering, Data Package 5


1.4.1 Fuses

Submit coordination data as specified in paragraph, FUSES of this section.


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" or "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Provide equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship in accordance with NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship and:

a. Have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening including applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.

b. Have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.

c. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.


Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.


Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable.



1.5 MAINTENANCE

1.5.1 Electrical Systems

Submit operation and maintenance data as specified herein. Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that provide basic data relating to the operation and maintenance of the electrical distribution system for the building. Include the following:

a. Single line diagram of the "as-built" building electrical system.

b. Schematic diagram of electrical control system.

c. Manufacturers' operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical equipment.

1.6 WARRANTY

Provide equipment items supported by service organizations that are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

As a minimum, meet requirements of UL, where UL standards are established for those items, and requirements of NFPA 70 for all materials, equipment, and devices.

2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

Conform to the following:

2.2.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit

2.2.1.1 Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit

ANSI C80.1, UL 6.

2.2.2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

PVC Type EPC-40 in accordance with NEMA TC 2, UL 651.

2.2.3 Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)

UL 797, ANSI C80.3.

2.2.4 Plastic-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit

NEMA RN 1, Type 40( 40 mils thick).

2.2.5 Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1.



2.2.5.1 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel

UL 360.

2.2.6 Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 514B. Ferrous fittings: cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance with UL 514B.

2.2.6.1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit

Threaded-type. Split couplings unacceptable.

2.2.6.2 Fittings for EMT

Steel set screw type for interior, dry locations. Steel compression type in damp or wet locations and exterior locations.

2.2.7 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

NEMA TC 3 for PVC and UL 514B.

2.2.8 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

UL 1660.

2.3 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS

UL 514A, cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal. UL 514C, if nonmetallic.

2.4 CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES

UL 50; volume greater than 100 cubic inches, NEMA Type 1 enclosure; sheet steel, hot-dip, zinc-coated. Where exposed to wet, damp, or corrosive environments, NEMA Type 4X stainless steel.

2.5 WIRES AND CABLES

Provide wires and cables in accordance applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Do not use wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site.

2.5.1 Conductors

Provide the following:

a. Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper, unless indicated otherwise.

b. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter: stranded.

c. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter: solid.

d. Conductors for remote control, alarm, and signal circuits, classes 1, 2, and 3: stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise.

e. Conductors indicated to be No. 6 AWG or smaller diameter: copper.



Conductors indicated to be No. 4 AWG and larger diameter: either copper or aluminum, unless type of conductor material is specifically indicated, or specified, or required by equipment manufacturer.

2.5.1.1 Equipment Manufacturer Requirements When manufacturer's equipment requires copper conductors at the terminations or requires copper conductors to be provided between components of equipment, provide copper conductors or splices, splice boxes, and other work required to satisfy manufacturer's requirements.

2.5.1.2 Aluminum Conductors

Provide aluminum conductors of AA-8000 series electrical grade aluminum alloy conductors for service conductors from pad transformer to meter socket only. Type EC/1350 aluminum is not acceptable.

2.5.1.3 Minimum Conductor Sizes

Provide minimum conductor size in accordance with the following:

a. Branch circuits: No. 12 AWG.

b. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits: No. 14 AWG.

c. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits: No. 16 AWG.

d. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits: No. 22 AWG.

2.5.2 Color Coding

Provide color coding for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit conductors.

2.5.2.1 Ground and Neutral Conductors

Provide color coding of ground and neutral conductors as follows:

a. Grounding conductors: Green.

b. Neutral conductors: White.

2.5.2.2 Ungrounded Conductors

Provide color coding of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems as follows:

a. 208/120 volt, three-phase

(1) Phase A - black

(2) Phase B - red

(3) Phase C - blue

b. 120/208 volt, single phase: Matching two of the phase colors indicated for 208/120 volt three phase.



2.5.3 Insulation

Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, provide power and lighting wires rated for 600-volts, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83 or Type XHHW or RHW conforming to UL 44, remote-control and signal circuits: Type TW or TF, conforming to UL 83. Where lighting fixtures require 90-degree Centigrade (C) conductors, provide only conductors with 90-degree C insulation or better.

2.5.4 Bonding Conductors

ASTM B1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter; ASTM B8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger diameter.

2.5.4.1 Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB)

Provide a copper conductor TBB in accordance with TIA-607 with No. 6 AWG minimum size, and sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of conductor length up to a maximum size of 3/0 AWG.

2.5.4.2 Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications

Provide a copper conductor Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications between the telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the electrical service ground in accordance with TIA-607. Size the bonding conductor for telecommunications the same as the TBB.

2.5.5 Metal-Clad Cable

UL 1569; NFPA 70, Type MC cable.

2.6 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS

UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes. Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires: insulated, pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.

2.7 DEVICE PLATES


a. UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed.

b. For metal outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls: zinc-coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges.

c. Plates on finished walls: satin finish stainless steel or brushed-finish aluminum, minimum 0.03 inch thick.

d. Screws: machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate.

e. Sectional type device plates are not be permitted.

f. Plates installed in wet locations: gasketed and UL listed for "wet locations." Stainless steel, deep cover, weatherproof-in-use for



exterior receptacles.

2.8 SWITCHES

2.8.1 Disconnect Switches

NEMA KS 1. Provide heavy duty-type switches. Utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses for fused switches, unless indicated otherwise. Provide horsepower rated for switches serving as the motor-disconnect means. Provide switches in NEMA 1 where installed in indoor, dry locations and NEMA 4X Type 304 stainless steel enclosure as indicated per NEMA ICS 6 for exterior locations.

2.9 FUSES

NEMA FU 1. Provide complete set of fuses for each fusible switch. Coordinate time-current characteristics curves of fuses serving motors or connected in series with circuit breakers for proper operation. Submit coordination data for approval. Provide fuses with a voltage rating not less than circuit voltage.

2.9.1 Fuseholders

Provide in accordance with UL 4248-1.

2.9.2 Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class R)

UL 198M, Class RK-5 time-delay type. Provide only Class R associated fuseholders in accordance with UL 4248-12.

2.9.3 Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class T)

UL 198M, Class T for zero to 1,200 amperes, 300 volts; and zero to 800 amperes, 600 volts.

2.10 RECEPTACLES


a. UL 498, general purpose specification grade, weather resistant grounding-type. Residential grade receptacles are not acceptable.

b. Ratings and configurations: as indicated.

c. Bodies: brown as per NEMA WD 1.

d. Face and body: thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap.

e. Dimensional requirements: per NEMA WD 6.

f. Screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or of the solderless pressure type having suitable conductor-release arrangement.

g. Grounding pole connected to mounting strap.

h. The receptacle: containing triple-wipe power contacts and double or triple-wipe ground contacts.



2.10.1 Weatherproof Receptacles

Provide receptacles, UL listed for use in "wet locations". Include stainless steel box with gasketed, hinged, lockable and weatherproof while-in-use, deep stainless steel cover plate.

2.10.2 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles

UL 943, duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box. Provide device capable of detecting current leak when the current to ground is 6 milliamperes or higher, and tripping per requirements of UL 943 for Class A ground-fault circuit interrupter devices. Provide screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired (pigtail) leads.

2.11 PANELBOARDS

Provide panelboards in accordance with the following:

a. UL 67 and UL 50 having a short-circuit current rating as indicated.

b. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means: additionally conform to UL 869A.

c. Panelboards: circuit breaker-equipped.

d. Designed such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL.

e. "Specific breaker placement" is required in panelboards to match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings.

f. Use of "Subfeed Breakers" is not acceptable.

g. Main breaker: "separately" mounted "above" branch breakers.

h. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation of breakers.

i. Directories: indicate load served by each circuit in panelboard.

j. Directories: indicate source of service to panelboard (e.g., Panel PA served from Panel MDP).

k. Provide new directories for existing panels modified by this project as indicated.

l. Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering.

m. Panelboards: listed and labeled for their intended use.

n. Panelboard nameplates: provided in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.

2.11.1 Enclosure

Provide panelboard enclosure in accordance with the following:



a. UL 50.

b. Cabinets mounted indoors: hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.

c. Cabinets: painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING.

d. Outdoor cabinets: NEMA 4x stainless steel with weatherproof stainless steel conduit hubs.

e. Front edges of cabinets: form-flanged or fitted with structural shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the panelboard front.

f. All cabinets: fabricated such that no part of any surface on the finished cabinet deviates from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch.

g. Holes: provided in the back of indoor surface-mounted cabinets, with outside spacers and inside stiffeners, for mounting the cabinets with a 1/2 inch clear space between the back of the cabinet and the wall surface.

h. Flush doors: mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to view when the door is closed.

i. Each door: fitted with a combined catch and lock latch.

j. Keys: two provided with each lock, with all locks keyed alike.

k. Finished-head cap screws: provided for mounting the panelboard fronts on the cabinets.

2.11.2 Panelboard Buses

Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Design main buses and back pans so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet. Provide copper buses.

2.11.3 Circuit Breakers

UL 489, thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker will be mounted. Breaker terminals: UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided. Series rated circuit breakers and plug-in circuit breakers are unacceptable.

2.11.3.1 Multipole Breakers

Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Design breaker such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively.

2.11.3.2 Circuit Breaker With Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter

UL 943 and NFPA 70. Provide with auto-monitoring (self-test) and lockout features, "push-to-test" button, visible indication of tripped condition,



and ability to detect and trip when current imbalance is 6 milliamperes or higher per requirements of UL 943 for Class A ground-fault circuit interrupter devices.

2.12 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

UL 489. Individual molded case circuit breakers with voltage and continuous current ratings, number of poles, overload trip setting, and short circuit current interrupting rating as indicated. Enclosure type as indicated. Provide solid neutral. Provide manufacturer's neutral and ground buses. Provide copper buses.

2.13 LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS

Provide circuit breakers, disconnecting means, and other devices that are electrical energy-isolating capable of being locked out for machines and other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147, NFPA 70E and 29 CFR 1910.303.

2.14 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

Electrical materials, equipment, and devices for installation in hazardous locations, as defined by NFPA 70: specifically approved by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or Factory Mutual for particular "Class," "Division," and "Group" of hazardous locations involved. Boundaries and classifications of hazardous locations: per NFPA 70, Article 514, Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and as indicated. Equipment in hazardous locations: comply with UL 1203 for electrical equipment and industrial controls and UL 674 for motors.

2.15 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE

Provide on each item of equipment a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

2.16 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES

Provide field fabricated nameplates in accordance with the following:

a. ASTM D709.

b. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings.

c. Each nameplate inscription: identify the function and, when applicable, the position.

d. Nameplates: melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core.

e. Surface: matte finish. Corners: square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core.

f. Minimum size of nameplates: one by 2.5 inches.

g. Lettering size and style: a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.



2.17 METERING

Utility meter sockets and meter devices provided by Eversource.

2.18 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

Provide parallel type surge protective devices (SPD) which comply with UL 1449 at the service entrance, panelboards and where indicated. Provide surge protectors in a NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6. SPD must have the same or higher short-circuit current rating as the protected equipment and shall not be installed at a point of system where the available fault current is in excess of that rating. Use Type 1 or Type 2 SPD and connect on the load side of a dedicated circuit breaker. Submit performance and characteristic curves.

Provide the following modes of protection:

FOR SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMS-Phase to phase ( L-L )Each phase to neutral ( L-N )Neutral to ground ( N-G )Phase to ground ( L-G )

SPDs at the service entrance: provide with a minimum surge current rating of 80,000 amperes for L-L mode minimum and 40,000 amperes for other modes (L-N, L-G, and N-G) and downstream SPDs rated 40,000 amperes for L-L mode minimum and 20,000 amperes for other modes (L-N, L-G, and N-G).

Maximum L-N, and N-G Voltage Protection Rating:

600V for 208Y/120V, three phase system

Maximum L-G Protection Rating:

700V for 208Y/120V, three phase system

Maximum L-L Voltage Protection Rating:

1,200V for 208Y/120V, three phase system

The minimum MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) rating for L-N and L-G modes of operation: 120 percent of nominal voltage for 240 volts and below.

Provide EMI/RFI filtering per UL 1283 for each mode with the capability to attenuate high frequency noise. Minimum attenuation: 20db.


Provide factory-applied finish on electrical equipment in accordance with the following:

a. NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as specified herein.

b. Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures: thoroughly cleaned followed by a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting.



c. Exterior surfaces: free from holes, seams, dents, weld marks, loose scale or other imperfections.

d. Interior surfaces: receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice.

e. Exterior surfaces: primed, filled where necessary, and given not less than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish.

f. Equipment located indoors: ANSI Light Gray, and equipment located outdoors: ANSI Light Gray.

g. Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations: conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein.

3.1.1 Underground Service

Underground service conductors and associated conduit: continuous from service entrance metering equipment to outdoor utility company transformer.

3.1.2 Hazardous Locations

Perform work in hazardous locations, as defined by NFPA 70, in strict accordance with NFPA 70 for particular "Class," "Division," and "Group" of hazardous locations involved. Provide conduit and cable seals where required by NFPA 70 and where indicated. Provide conduit with tapered threads.

3.1.3 Service Entrance Identification

Service entrance disconnect devices, switches, and enclosures: labeled and identified as such.

3.1.3.1 Labels

Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure, as permitted by NFPA 70, label each enclosure, new and existing, as one of several enclosures containing service entrance disconnect devices. Label, at minimum: indicate number of service disconnect devices housed by enclosure and indicate total number of enclosures that contain service disconnect devices. Provide laminated plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Use lettering of at least 0.25 inch in height, and engrave on black-on-white matte finish. Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure: provided only as permitted by NFPA 70. Provide label indicating arc fault current value and date. Provide arc-flash warning label.



3.1.4 Wiring Methods

Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or EMT. Grounding conductor: separate from electrical system neutral conductor. Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways. Minimum conduit size: 1/2 inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits.

3.1.4.1 Pull Wire

Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire: nylon having minimum 200-pound force tensile strength. Provide with sequentially marked numbers indicating pull tape length. Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Provide label at each end indicating other end of conduit run, intended use, and date.

3.1.4.2 Metal-Clad Cable

Provide only where specifically indicated. Install in accordance with NFPA 70, Type MC cable.

3.1.5 Conduit Installation

Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members.

3.1.5.1 Restrictions Applicable to EMT

a. Do not install underground.

b. Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious materials.

c. Do not use in areas subject to physical damage including but not limited to equipment rooms, product storage rooms, loading docks and loading areas where moving produce or replacing equipment could physically damage the EMT.

d. Do not use in hazardous areas.

e. Do not use outdoors.

3.1.5.2 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit

a. PVC Schedule 40.

(1) Do not use where subject to physical damage, including but not limited to, mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, exterior locations within ten feet of grade, and where restrictions are applying to both PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80.

(2) Do not use above grade, except where allowed in this section for rising on utility poles or indicated otherwise.

-



3.1.5.3 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit

Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS.

3.1.5.4 Underground Conduit

PVC, Type EPC-40. Convert nonmetallic conduit to rigid metal sweeps, before rising above grade.

3.1.5.5 Conduit for Circuits Rated Greater Than 600 Volts

Comply with Eversource requirements. Rigid metal conduit above grade, rigid metal conduit sweeps, PVC-40 below grade.

3.1.5.6 Conduit Support

Support conduit by pipe straps, threaded rod conduit hangers, or ceiling trapeze. Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by expansion bolts on concrete or brick; and by machine screws, or beam clamps on steel work. Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not exceed one-fourth proof test load for load applied to fasteners. Do not cut main reinforcing bars. Fill unused holes. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling construction, run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling support system. Conduit and box systems: supported independently of both (a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and (b) ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed. Do not share supporting means between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts. Coordinate installation with above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to systems. Spring-steel fasteners not permitted. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide suitable watertight expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches inside diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

3.1.5.7 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs

Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes, fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of obstructions.

3.1.5.8 Locknuts and Bushings

Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least minimum single locknut and bushing. Provide locknuts with sharp edges for digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install threaded, non-metallic bushings on ends of conduits, and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70.

3.1.5.9 Flexible Connections

Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for equipment



subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for motors. Install flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size: 1/2 inch diameter. Provide liquid tight flexible conduit in wet and damp locations for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, movement or motors. Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

3.1.6 Boxes, Outlets, and Supports

Provide boxes in raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes for metallic raceways: stainless steel or cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, when surface mounted on interior cooler or freezer areas, walls exposed up to 7 feet above floors and walkways, or when installed in hazardous areas and when specifically indicated. Boxes in other locations: sheet steel. Provide each box with volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures: minimum 4 inches square, or octagonal. Provide gaskets for cast-metal and stainless steel boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces. Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood, with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with machine screws on steel. Support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure. When penetrating reinforced concrete members, avoid cutting reinforcing steel.

3.1.6.1 Boxes

Boxes for use with raceway systems: minimum 1 1/2 inches deep. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets: minimum 4 inches square. Telecommunications outlets: a minimum of 4 11/16 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep.

3.1.6.2 Pull Boxes

Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge galvanized sheet steel, except where cast-metal boxes or stainless steel boxes are indicated or are required in locations specified herein. Provide boxes with screw-fastened covers. Where several feeders pass through common pull box, label exterior of conduits entering and leaving boxes, tag feeders to clearly indicate electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.

3.1.7 Mounting Heights

Mount panelboards, enclosed circuit breakers, and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest position is maximum 78 inches above floor. Mount receptacles 18 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Measure mounting heights of wiring devices and outlets in non-hazardous areas to center of device or outlet. Devices in hazardous locations; minimum 20 inches above floor or grade. Measure mounting heights of receptacle outlet boxes in hazardous areas to the bottom of the outlet box.

3.1.8 Conductor Identification

Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice, or termination is made. For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter, provide color coding by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation. For



conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, provide color coding by plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates; or heat shrink-type sleeves.

3.1.8.1 Marking Strips

Provide marking strips for identification of power distribution, control, data, and communications cables in accordance with the following:

a. Provide white or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened by screws to each terminal block, for wire designations.

b. Use permanent ink for the wire numbers

c. Provide reversible marking strips to permit marking both sides, or provide two marking strips with each block.

d. Size marking strips to accommodate the two sets of wire numbers.

e. Assign a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 to each device to which a connection is made. Mark each device terminal to which a connection is made with a distinct terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the Contractor's schematic and connection diagrams.

f. The wire (terminal point) designations used on the Contractor's wiring diagrams and printed on terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractor's standard practice; however, provide additional wire and cable designations for identification of remote (external) circuits for the Owner's wire designations.

g. Prints of the marking strips drawings submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings, along with any rearrangement of points required.

3.1.9 Splices

Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor insulation.

3.1.10 Terminating Aluminum Conductors

3.1.10.1 Termination to Copper Bus

Terminate aluminum conductors to copper bus either by: (a) inline splicing a copper pigtail, of ampacity at least that of aluminum conductor, or (b) utilizing circumferential, compression-type, aluminum-bodied terminal lug UL listed for AL/CU, and steel Belleville cadmium-plated hardened steel spring washers, flat washers, bolts, and nuts. Select Belleville washers or discs to match wiring lug torque requirements. Carefully install Belleville spring washers with crown up toward nut or bolt head, with concave side of Belleville bearing on heavy-duty, wide series flat washer of larger diameter than Belleville. Tighten nuts sufficiently to flatten Belleville, and leave in position. Lubricate hardware with joint compound prior to making connection. Wire brush and apply joint compound to



conductor prior to inserting in lug.

3.1.10.2 Termination to Aluminum Bus at Metering Equipment

Terminate aluminum conductors to aluminum bus by using aluminum nuts, bolts, washers, and compression lugs. Wire brush and apply joint compound to conductor prior to inserting in lug. Lubricate hardware with joint compound prior to making connection. When bus contact surface is unplated, scratch-brush and coat with joint compound, without grit.

3.1.11 Covers and Device Plates

Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Use of sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates installed in wet locations.

3.1.12 Grounding and Bonding

Provide in accordance with NFPA 70. Ground exposed, non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways, telecommunications system grounds, and neutral conductor of wiring systems. Make ground connection at main service equipment, and extend grounding conductor to point of entrance of metallic water service. Make connection to water pipe by suitable ground clamp. If flanged pipes are encountered, make connection with lug bolted to street side of flanged connection. Supplement metallic water service grounding system with additional made electrode in compliance with NFPA 70. Make ground connection to driven ground rods on exterior of building. Bond additional driven rods together with a minimum of 2 AWG soft bare copper wire buried to a depth of at least 24 inches. Interconnect grounding media in or on the structure to provide a common ground potential. This includes electrical service, telecommunications system grounds, as well as underground metallic piping systems. Make interconnection to the gas line on the customer's side of the meter. In addition to the requirements specified herein, provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with TIA-607. Where ground fault protection is employed, ensure that connection of ground and neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fault protection.

3.1.12.1 Ground Rods

Provide ground rods and measure the resistance to ground using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE 81. Do not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions for the maximum resistance of a driven ground. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod, provide additional rods. Spacing for additional rods must be a minimum of 10 feet. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, notify the Owner who will decide on the number of ground rods to add.

3.1.12.2 Grounding Connections

Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible by exothermic weld or irreversible high compression connector.

a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or



which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.

b. Make irreversible high compression connections using a hydraulic or electric compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Provide tools and dies as recommended by the manufacturer. Use an embossing die code or other standard method to provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.

3.1.12.3 Ground Bus

Provide a copper ground bus in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated. Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of transformer neutrals and other electrical equipment: effectively grounded by bonding to the ground bus. Bond the ground bus to both the entrance ground, and to a ground rod or rods as specified above having the upper ends terminating approximately 4 inches above the floor. Make connections and splices of the brazed, welded, bolted, or pressure-connector type, except use pressure connectors or bolted connections for connections to removable equipment.

3.1.12.4 Resistance

Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system: do not exceed 5 ohms under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 ohms, contact Owner's Representative for further instructions.

3.1.12.5 Telecommunications System

Provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with the following:

a. Telecommunications Grounding Busbars: Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications entrance facility.

b. Telecommunications Bonding Conductors: Provide main telecommunications service equipment ground consisting of separate bonding conductor for telecommunications, between the TMGB and readily accessible grounding connection of the electrical service. Grounding and bonding conductors should not be installed in ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary to install grounding and bonding conductors in ferrous metallic conduit, bond the conductors to each end of the conduit using a grounding bushing or a No. 6 AWG conductor, minimum.

3.1.13 Equipment Connections

Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of the specification.

3.1.14 Repair of Existing Work

Perform repair of existing work, demolition, and modification of existing electrical distribution systems as follows:

3.1.14.1 Workmanship

Lay out work in advance. Exercise care where cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other surfaces is necessary for proper installation, support, or anchorage of conduit,



raceways, or other electrical work. Repair damage to buildings, piping, and equipment using skilled craftsmen of trades involved.

3.1.14.2 Existing Concealed Wiring to be Removed

Disconnect existing concealed wiring to be removed from its source. Remove conductors; cut conduit flush with floor, underside of floor, and at through walls. Seal openings.

3.1.14.3 Removal of Existing Electrical Distribution System

Removal of existing electrical distribution system equipment includes equipment's associated wiring, including conductors, cables, exposed conduit, surface metal raceways, boxes, and fittings, back to equipment's power source as indicated.

3.1.14.4 Continuation of Service

Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain. Maintain existing circuits of equipment energized. Restore circuits wiring and power which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition back to original condition.

3.1.15 Watthour Meters

ANSI C12.1.

3.1.16 Surge Protective Devices

Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source, keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible. Maximum allowed lead length is 3 feet avoiding 90 degree bends.

3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING

Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets.

3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side. Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E.


Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results. Give Owner's Representative 5 working days notice prior to each test.

3.4.1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation

Operate each device subject to manual operation at least five times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.

3.4.2 600-Volt Wiring Test

Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring



No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of 1,000 volts DC for 600 volt rated wiring and 500 volts DC for 300 volt rated wiring per NETA ATS to provide direct reading of resistance. Existing wiring to be reused shall also be tested where indicated.

3.4.3 Ground-Fault Receptacle Test

Test ground-fault receptacles with a "load" (such as a plug in light) to verify that the "line" and "load" leads are not reversed. Press the TEST button and then the RESET button to verify by LED status that the device is a self-test model as specified in UL 943.

3.4.4 Grounding System Test

Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground is not excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test to the Owner, and indicate location of rods as well as resistance and soil conditions at time measurements were made.

3.4.5 Watthour Meter

a. Visual and mechanical inspection

(1) Examine for broken parts, shipping damage, and tightness of connections.

(2) Verify that meter type, scales, and connections are in accordance with approved shop drawings.

(3) Coordinate with Eversource Representative.

b. Electrical tests

(1) Determine accuracy of meter.

(2) Calibrate watthour meters to one-half percent.

(3) Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter, where applicable.

3.4.6 Phase Rotation Test

Perform phase rotation test of existing electrical system prior to disconnecting existing power. Document results. Submit report. Provide engraved label indicating phase rotation, indicate testing company and date.

Perform phase rotation test to ensure proper rotation of service power prior to energizing equipment and operation of new or reinstalled equipment using a phase rotation meter. Follow the meter manual directions performing the test. Document results. Submit report.




SECTION 26 27 14.00 20

ELECTRICITY METERING02/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI C12.1 ((2014; Errata 2016) Electric Meters - Code for Electricity Metering



IEEE C37.90.1 (2013) Standard for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus

IEEE C57.13 (2016) Requirements for Instrument Transformers

IEEE Stds Dictionary (2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary: Glossary of Terms & Definitions

INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)

NETA ATS (2017; Errata 2017) Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems


ANSI C12.18 (2006; R 2016) Protocol Specification for ANSI Type 2 Optical Port

ANSI C12.20 (2015; E 2018) Electricity Meters - 0.1, 0.2, and 0.5 Accuracy Classes

NEMA C12.19 (2012) Utility Industry End Device Data Tables


NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2; TIA 17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6; TIA 17-7; TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10; TIA 17-11; TIA 17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA 17-14; TIA 17-15; TIA 17-16; TIA 17-17 )

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 1


National Electrical Code

1.2 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Stds Dictionary.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Installation Drawings

SD-03 Product Data

Electricity meters

Current transformer

Potential transformer

External communications devices

Configuration Software

The most recent version of the configuration software for each type (manufacturer and model) shall be submitted as a Technical Data Package and shall be licensed to the project site. Software shall be submitted on CD-ROM and two hard copies of the software user manual shall be submitted for each piece of software provided.

SD-06 Test Reports

Acceptance checks and tests

System functional verification


Electricity Meters and Accessories, Data Package 5

Submit operation and maintenance data as specified herein.


System functional verification


1.4.1 Installation Drawings

Drawings shall be provided in hard-copy and shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Wiring diagrams with terminals identified of kilowatt meter, current transformers, potential transformers, protocol modules,

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 2


communications interfaces, and Ethernet connections. For each typical meter installation, provide a diagram.

b. One-line diagram, including meters, switch(es), current transformers, potential transformers, protocol modules, communications interfaces, Ethernet connections, telephone outlets, and fuses. For each typical meter installation, provide a diagram.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 1 year prior to bid opening. The 1-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product, or an earlier release of the product, shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers catalogs, or brochures during the prior 1-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.

1.4.3 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Data

Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.5 MAINTENANCE

1.5.1 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data

In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the following on the actual electricity meters and accessories provided:

a. A condensed description of how the system operates

b. Block diagram indicating major assemblies

c. Troubleshooting information

d. Preventive maintenance

e. Prices for spare parts and supply list

1.6 WARRANTY

The equipment items and software shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment and software on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. Provide minimum warranty of three years from substantial completion.

1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.7.1 System Requirements

Electricity metering, consisting of meters and associated equipment, will be used to record the electricity consumption and other values as described

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 3


in the requirements that follow and as shown on the drawings.

1.7.2 Selection Criteria

Metering components and software are part of a system that includes the physical meter, data recorder function and communications method. Every building site identified shall include sufficient metering components to measure the electrical parameters identified and to store and communicate the values as required.

Contractor shall verify that the metering system installed is compatible with the existing meter reading protocol system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRICITY METERS AND ACCESSORIES

2.1.1 Physical and Common Requirements

a. Replace existing utility meter bases. For socket arrangements, coordinate with Eversource.

b. Meter socket shall have NEMA 3R enclosure for surface mounting with bottom penetrations.

c. Surge withstand capability shall conform to IEEE C37.90.1.

2.1.2 Potential Transformer Requirements

a. Meter shall be capable of connection to the service voltage phases and magnitude being monitored. If the meter is not rated for the service voltage, provide suitable potential transformers to send an acceptable voltage to the meter.

b. Potential transformers shall be rated indoor or outdoor, as required for the specific application. Voltage rating shall provide 120 volts, wye-connected, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz, insulation class, 600 volts. Potential transformers BIL shall be 10 kV and shall have an accuracy class of 0.3 at burdens w, x, and y. Thermal rating shall be 500 VA.

c. Potential transformers installed inside junction boxes and panels shall be rated for interior use. Voltage rating shall provide 120 volts, wye-connected, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz, insulation class, 600 volts. Potential transformers BIL shall be a minimum of 10 kV, and have an insulation class and BIL rating that equals or exceeds the ratings of the associated equipment. Potential transformers shall have an accuracy class of 0.3 at burdens w, x, and y. Thermal rating shall be 500 VA. Potential transformers shall be accessed from the front and mounted in a metering section.

2.1.3 Current Transformer Requirements

a. Current transformer shall be installed with a rating as required.

b. Current transformers shall have an Accuracy Class of 0.3 (with a maximum error of plus/minus 0.3 percent at 5.0 amperes) when operating within the specified rating factor.

c. Current transformers shall be solid-core, bracket-mounted for new

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 4


installations using ring-tongue lugs for electrical connections. Current transformers shall be accessible and the associated wiring shall be installed in an organized and neat workmanship arrangement.

d. Current transformers shall have:

(1) Insulation Class: All 600 volt and below current transformers shall be rated 10 KV BIL.

(2) Frequency: Nominal 60 Hz.

(3) Burden: Burden class shall be selected for the load.

(4) Phase Angle Range: 0 to 60 degrees.

e. Meter shall accept current input from standard instrument transformers (5A secondary current transformers).

f. Current inputs shall have a continuous rating in accordance with IEEE C57.13.

2.1.4 Owner's Meter Requirements

Notwithstanding any other provision of this contract, Owner's meters shall be E-Mon D-mon to match existing Owner's equipment; no other product will be acceptable.

Electricity meters shall include the following features:

a. Meter shall comply with ANSI C12.1, NEMA C12.19, and ANSI C12.20.

b. Meter shall be a Class 20, transformer rated design.

c. Meter shall be rated for use at temperature from minus 10 degrees Fahrenheit to plus 90 degrees.

d. The meters shall have an electronic demand recording register and shall be secondary reading as indicated. The register shall be used to indicate maximum kilowatt demand as well as cumulative or continuously cumulative demand. Demand shall be measured on a block-interval basis and shall be capable of a 5 to 60 minute interval and initially set to a 15-minute interval. It shall have provisions to be programmed to calculate demand on a rolling interval basis. Meter readings shall be true RMS.

e. The meter electronic register shall be of modular design with non-volatile data storage. Downloading meter stored data shall be capable via an optical port. Recording capability of data storage with a minimum capability of 89 days of 15 minute, 2 channel interval data. The meter shall be capable of providing at least 2 KYZ pulse outputs (dry contacts). Default initial configuration (unless identified otherwise by Owner) shall be:

(1) First channel - kWh(2) Second channel - kVARh(3) KYZ output #1 - kWh(4) KYZ output #2 - kVARh

f. Meters shall have identical features available in accordance with this

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 5


specification.

g. Enable switches for Time of Use (TOU), pulse and load profile measurement module at the factory.

h. Meter shall have an optical port on front of meter capable of speeds from 9600 to a minimum of 19.2k baud, and shall be initially set at 9600 baud. Optical device shall be compatible with ANSI C12.18.

i. Meters shall be 120-480 volts auto ranging.

j. Provide blank tag fixed to the meter faceplate for the addition of the meter multiplier, which will be the product of the current transformer and potential transformer ratio and will be filled in by base personnel on the job site. The meter's nameplate shall include:

(1) Meter ID number.(2) Rated voltage.(3) Current class.(4) Metering form.(5) Test amperes.(6) Frequency.(7) Catalog number.(8) Manufacturing date.

k. The normal billing data scroll shall be fully programmable. Data scroll display shall include the following.

(1) Number of demand resets.(2) End-of-interval indication.(3) Maximum demand.(4) New maximum demand indication.(5) Cumulative or continuously cumulative.(6) Time remaining in interval.(7) Kilowatt hours.

l. The register shall incorporate a built-in test mode that allows it to be tested without the loss of any data or parameters. The following quantities shall be available for display in the test mode:

(1) Present interval's accumulating demand.(2) Maximum demand.(3) Number of impulses being received by the register.

m. Pulse module simple I/O board with programmable ratio selection.

n. Meters shall be programmed after installation via an optical port. Optical display shall show TOU data, peak kWh, semi-peak kWh, off peak kWh, and phase angles.

o. Self-monitoring to provide for:

(1) Unprogrammed register.(2) RAM checksum error.(3) ROM checksum error.(4) Hardware failure.(5) Memory failure.(6) EPROM error.(7) Battery status (fault, condition, or time in service).

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 6


p. Liquid crystal alphanumeric displays, 9 digits, blinking squares confirm register operation. 6 Large digits for data and smaller digits for display identifier.

q. Display operations, programmable sequence with display identifiers. Display identifiers shall be selectable for each item. Continually sequence with time selectable for each item.

r. The meters shall support three modes of registers: Normal Mode, Alternate Mode, and Test Mode. The meter also shall support a "Toolbox" or "Service Information" (accessible in the field) through an optocom port to a separate computer using the supplied software to allow access to instantaneous service information such as voltage, current, power factor, load demand, and the phase angle for individual phases.

2.1.5 Disconnect Method

a. Disconnecting wiring blocks shall be provided between the current transformer and the meter. A shorting mechanism shall be built into the wiring block to allow the current transformer wiring to be changed without removing power to the transformer. The wiring blocks shall be located where they are accessible without the necessity of disconnecting power to the transformer.

b. Voltage monitoring circuits shall be equipped with disconnect switches to isolate the meter base or socket from the voltage source. Provide fuse protection in accordance with paragraph entitled "Voltage Requirements"

2.2 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES

Owner's meter shall have two-way communication with the existing data acquisition system (DAS).

Provide interfacing software if a meter is used that is different than the existing meters at the building to ensure compatibility within the metering system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), and to the requirements specified herein. Provide new equipment and materials unless indicated or specified otherwise.

3.1.1 Existing Condition Survey

The Contractor shall perform a field survey, including inspection of existing equipment, resulting clearances, and new equipment locations intended to be incorporated into the system and furnish an existing conditions report to the Owner. The report shall identify those items that are non-workable as defined in the contract documents.

3.1.1.1 Existing Utility Meter Sockets

Remove existing exterior utility meter sockets and turn over to Eversource.

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 7


3.1.2 Scheduling of Work and Outages

The Contract Clauses shall govern regarding permission for power outages, scheduling of work, coordination with Owner, coordination with Eversourse, and special working conditions.

3.1.3 Configuration Software

The standard Owner's meter shall include the latest available version of firmware and software. Meter shall either be programmed at the factory or shall be programmed in the field. Meters shall have a password that shall be provided to the Owner upon project completion. When field programming is performed, turn field programming device over to the Owner at completion of project. When interfacing software is used for a meter that is different than the existing meters in use at the facility, turn the software over to the Owner at completion of the project.


Perform the following acceptance checks and tests on Owner's meters.

3.2.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests

Perform for Owner's meters in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with NETA ATS.

a. Meter Assembly

(1) Visual and mechanical inspection.

(a) Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.

(b) Inspect electrical connections to ensure they are tight.

(c) Record model number, serial number, firmware revision, software revision, and rated control voltage.

(d) Verify operation of display and indicating devices.

(e) Record password and user log-in for each meter.

(f) Set required parameters including instrument transformer ratios, system type, frequency, power demand methods/intervals, and communications requirements. Verify that the CT ratio and the PT ratio are properly included in the meter multiplier or the programming of the meter. Confirm that the multiplier is provided on the meter face or on the meter.

(2) Electrical tests.

(a) Apply voltage or current as appropriate to each analog input and verify correct measurement and indication.

(b) Confirm correct operation and setting of each auxiliary input/output feature including mechanical relay, digital, and analog.

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 8


(c) After initial system energization, confirm measurements and indications are consistent with loads present.

(d) Make note of, and report, any "Error-Code" or "Caution-Code" on the meter's display.

b. Current Transformers


(a) Compare equipment nameplate data with specification and approved shop drawings.

(b) Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

(c) Verify correct connection, including polarity.

(d) Inspect electrical connections to ensure they are tight.

(e) Verify that required grounding and shorting connections provide good contact.

(2) Electrical Tests.

Provide testing in accordance with meter manufacturers written instructions.

c. Potential Transformers


(a) Verify potential transformers are rigidly mounted.

(b) Verify potential transformers are the correct voltage.

(c) Verify that adequate clearances exist between the primary and secondary circuit.

(2) Electrical Tests.

(a) Verify by the meter configuration report that the polarity and phasing are correct.

3.2.2 System Functional Verification

Verify that the installed Owner's meters are working correctly in accordance with the meter configuration report:

a. The correct meter form is installed.

b. All voltage phases are present.

c. Phase rotation is correct.

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 9


d. Phase angles are correct.

e. The new meter accurately measures power magnitude and direction, and can communicate as required by paragraph entitled "Communications Interfaces".


SECTION 26 27 14.00 20 Page 10


SECTION 26 42 13.00 20

CATHODIC PROTECTION BY GALVANIC ANODES04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

Work under this section covers the selection and installation of anodes as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein.

1.1 REFERENCES




NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)

NACE SP0169 (2015) Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

NACE SP0176 (2007) (Formerly RP0176) Corrosion Control of Submerged Areas of Permanently Installed Steel Offshore Structures Associated with Petroleum Production




The Cathodic Protection System installation must conform to the applicable rules of NFPA 70 and all applicable federal, state, and local codes.

The Cathodic Protection System must be constructed in accordance with the design requirements set forth in the reference NACE and ASTM documents.

Only acceptable materials are permitted on site.

All materials must conform to the requirements set forth herein or as designated on the drawings, unless otherwise specified. All materials must be new, free from defects and shall be of the best commercial quality for the purpose specified. All necessary items and accessories not shown on the drawings or specified herein, but which are required to fully carry out the specified intent of the work, must be furnished without additional cost to the Owner.

SECTION 26 42 13.00 20 Page 1


All materials must be installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and safety procedures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Drawings

SD-03 Product Data

Anodes


Reports

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ANODES

The location of the anodes is provided in the Contract Drawings.

2.1.1 Aluminum

Chemical composition as follows:

Zinc 4.0 - 6.5 percent

Indium 0.014 - 0.020 percent

Silicon 0.08 - 0.020 percent

Copper 0.004 percent maximum

Iron 0.090 percent maximum

Mercury 0.000 percent maximum

Aluminum Remainder

Test efficiency of the aluminum alloy in seawater must not be less than 85% on a 100% efficiency of 1150 ampere-hours per pound. The anode operating potential must not be less than -0.800 volts versus saturated silver/silver chloride in seawater.

2.1.2 Physical Characteristics

Anode Weight: 240 pounds not including core.

Anode Size: Approximately 10 inches X 10 inches X 24 inches.

Anode Size must be sufficient for installation in accordance with the drawings and conform to the weight and composition requirements.

SECTION 26 42 13.00 20 Page 2


2.1.3 Anode Core

2.1.3.1 Anode Core

a. The anodes must have a continuous carbon steel core with 90 degree bends as shown on the drawings. The core shall be formed from a steel flat bar, 2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick (minimum), and must extend from the bottom of the anode to allow the anode to stand off from the pile a minimum of three (3) inches after its installation. The steel must comply with ASTM A36/A36M.

b. The core of the anode must be located in the center of the anode casting along the longitudinal axis of that cast.

c. To facilitate proper bonding of the aluminum alloy to the steel core during casting, the surface of the steel must be prepared by a dry blast cleaning process. Rust discoloration and/or visible surface contamination shall not be permitted. Surface preparation shall be NACE No. 2 (near-white metal) or better and comply with NACE SP0176.

2.2 ANODE SURFACE IRREGULARITIES

Shrinkage depressions on the anode surface must not exceed ten percent of the nominal height of the anode as measured from the uppermost corner to the bottom of the depression.

Not more than one percent of the total surface of the anode casting can be contaminated with nonmetallic inclusions visible to the naked eye.

The straightness of the anode must not deviate more than two percent of the anode nominal length from the longitudinal axis of the anode.

Within the aluminum section transverse cracks of unlimited length and depth are permitted if width does not exceed 0.20 inches and there are not more than 10 cracks per anode. Small dense cracks must be considered one crack and cracks of 0.02 inches wide or less must be ignored. Longitudinal cracks are not permitted in any length except in the final "topping-up" metal at shrinkage depressions.

2.3 COATING REPAIR

Coat all damage to sheeting and welds after anode installation in accordance with Section 09 97 13.26, COATING OF STEEL WATERFRONT STRUCTURES.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Submit Drawings prior to installation.

Unless otherwise indicated, all materials must be installed as shown on the contract drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, safety procedures and as directed by the Owner. Installation must conform to NFPA 70.

SECTION 26 42 13.00 20 Page 3


3.1.1 Anodes

Install anodes in accordance with the drawings. Remove any existing anode, including mounting bracket.

The area where the anode is to be welded must be cleaned to near white material just prior to welding the anode. The weld for each anode must be capable of fully supporting the anode weight.

The anode must be maintained free of oils, chemicals, paint, petroleum products and other foreign chemicals or coatings. All coatings, wrapping and protective shipping material must be removed from the anode prior to installation.


Field tests shall be witnessed by the Owner. Advise the Owner 5 days prior to performing each field test.

3.2.1 Inspections

The Owner may perform a visual inspection of the anode installations. A written report will be submitted indicating which anodes were inspected and the approval of the workmanship. Unacceptable workmanship must be reworked to the approval of the Owner at no additional cost to the Owner before final payment is made.

3.2.2 Galvanic Cathodic Protection System Testing

System must be tested and inspected in the presence of the Owner. Record test data, including date, time, and locations of testing and submit Reports to the Owner. Correct and retest, at his expense, deficiencies in the materials and installation observed by these tests and inspections. Testing must include the following measurement:

a. Protected potential measurements: With the entire galvanic protection system put into operation for at least one week, measure potentials using a silver-silver chloride reference electrode and a voltmeter having an input impedance of not less than 10 megohm.

Tests must be performed every 50-feet along the sheet pile wall. Potential measurements must be made at the water surface and at 5-feet, 10-feet, and 15-feet below (as applicable) the mean low water line.

3.2.3 Criteria for Cathodic Protection

Conduct in accordance with NACE SP0169. Criteria for determining the adequacy of protection shall be selected by the corrosion engineer as applicable:

a. A negative voltage of at least 800 millivolts as measured between the structure surface and a saturated silver-silver chloride reference electrode contacting the water. Determination of this voltage is to be made with the protective current applied.


SECTION 26 42 13.00 20 Page 4


SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING05/13

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)

AASHTO LTS (2013; Errata 2013) Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals




ASTM B117 (2016) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY (IES)

IES HB-10 (2011; Errata 2015) IES Lighting Handbook

IES LM-79 (2008) Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products

IES LM-80 (2015) Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources

IES RP-8 (2018)Recommended Practice for Lighting Roadway and Parking Facilities

IES RP-16 (2017) Nomenclature and Definitions for Illuminating Engineering

IES TM-15 (2011) Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaires

IES TM-21 (2011; Addendum B 2015) Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources






IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits



NEMA ANSLG C78.377 (2017) Electric Lamps— Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products

NEMA C82.77 (2002) Harmonic Emission Limits - Related Power Quality Requirements for Lighting Equipment

NEMA C136.31 (2018) Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Luminaire Vibration

NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2016) Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures

NEMA IEC 60529 (2004) Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)



U.S. DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (DOE)

Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System (FEMP)


47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL 773 (2016; Reprint Nov 2017) UL Standard for Safety Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting

UL 773A (2016; Reprint May 2018) UL Standard for



Safety Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control

UL 1310 (2018) UL Standard for Safety Class 2 Power Units

UL 1598 (2008; Reprint Oct 2012) Luminaires

UL 8750 (2015; Reprint Aug 2018) UL Standard for Safety Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products

1.2 DEFINITIONS

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE 100 and IES RP-16.

b. For LED luminaire light sources, "Useful Life" is the operating hours before reaching 70 percent of the initial rated lumen output (L70) with no catastrophic failures under normal operating conditions. This is also known as 70 percent "Rated Lumen Maintenance Life" as defined in IES LM-80.

c. The "Groundline Section" of wood poles is that portion of the pole between one foot above, and 2 feet below the groundline.


Materials not considered to be luminaires or lighting equipment are specified in Section 26.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



LED Luminaire Warranty

Electronic Ballast Warranty

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Luminaire Drawings

Poles; G

SD-03 Product Data

LED, Luminaires

Energy Star Label for LED Luminaire Product

Luminaire Light Sources

Luminaire Power Supply Units (Drivers)

Time Switch



Photocell

Steel Poles

SD-05 Design Data

Design Data for Luminaires

SD-06 Test Reports

Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control."

SD-07 Certificates

Luminaire Useful Life Certificate

Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating the expected useful life of the luminaires provided. The useful life shall be directly correlated from the IES LM-80 test data using procedures outlined in IES TM-21. Thermal properties of the specific luminaire and local ambient operating temperature and conditions shall be taken into consideration.


Steel Poles

Submit instructions prior to installation.


Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.


1.5.1 Drawing Requirements

1.5.1.1 Luminaire Drawings

Include dimensions, effective projected area (EPA), accessories, and installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and computerized candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings.

1.5.1.2 Poles

Include dimensions, wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS, pole deflection, pole class, and other applicable information.

1.5.2 Design Data for Luminaires

a. Provide distribution data according to IES classification type as defined in IES HB-10.



b. Shielding as defined by IES RP-8 or B.U.G. rating for the installed position as defined by IES TM-15.

c. Provide safety certification and file number for the luminaire family. Include listing, labeling and identification per NFPA 70 (NEC). Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA) as Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) and include: CSA (Canadian Standards Association), ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory), and UL (Underwriters Laboratories).

d. Provide long term lumen maintenance projections for each LED luminaire in accordance with IES TM-21. Data used for projections shall be obtained from testing in accordance with IES LM-80.

e. Provide wind loading calculations for luminaires mounted on poles. Weight and effective projected area (EPA) of luminaires and mounting brackets shall not exceed maximum rating of pole as installed in particular wind zone area.


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.


Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if the manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires for a minimum of 15 years. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 15 years prior to bid opening. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 15-year period.


Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.



1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES

1.6.1 Steel Poles

Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least one foot above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole.

1.7 WARRANTY


1.7.1 LED Luminaire Warranty

Provide Luminaire Useful Life Certificate.


a. Provide a written five year on-site replacement warranty for material, fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation, removal, and installation of new products.

1. Finish warranty shall include warranty against failure and against substantial deterioration such as blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking, or fading.

2. Material warranty shall include:

(a) Power supply units (drivers).

(b) Replacement when more than 10 percent of LED sources in any lightbar or subassembly(s) are defective or non-starting.

b. Warranty period must begin on date of beneficial occupancy. Contractor shall provide the Owner a signed warranty certificate prior to final payment.

1.7.2 Electronic Ballast Warranty

Furnish the electronic ballasts manufacturer's warranty. The warranty period shall not be less than five (5) years from the date of manufacture. Ballast assembly in the lighting fixture, transportation, and on-site storage shall not exceed twelve (12) months, thereby permitting four (4) years of the five (5) year warranty to be in service and energized. The warranty shall state that the malfunctioning ballast shall be exchanged by the manufacturer and promptly shipped to the using Owner's facility. The replacement ballast shall be identical to, or an improvement upon, the original design of the malfunctioning ballast.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION

Products and materials not considered to be luminaires, equipment or accessories are specified in and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.2 LED, LUMINAIRES

UL 1598, NEMA C82.77 and UL 8750. Provide luminaires as indicated in luminaire schedule and XL plates or details on project plans. Provide luminaires complete with light sources of quantity, type, and wattage indicated. Luminaires of the same type shall be provided by the same manufacturer. Provide Energy Star labeled LED luminaire product. Provide proof of Energy Star label for LED luminaire product.


a. LED luminaire housings shall be die cast or extruded aluminum. Housings for luminaires other than LED shall be die cast, extruded, or fabricated aluminum. Fabricated aluminum housings shall have all seams and corners internally welded to resist weathering, moisture and dust.

b. LED luminaires shall be rated for operation within an ambient temperature range of minus 22 degrees F to 122 degrees F.

c. Luminaires shall be UL listed for wet locations per UL 1598. Optical compartment for LED luminaires shall be sealed and rated a minimum of IP65 per NEMA IEC 60529.

d. LED luminaires shall produce a minimum efficacy as shown in the following table, tested per IES LM-79. Theoretical models of initial raw LED lumens per watt are not acceptable.

Application Luminaire Efficacy in Lumens per Watt

Exterior Wall-Mounted Area Luminaires 60

e. Luminaires shall have IES distribution and NEMA field angle classifications as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans per IES HB-10.

f. Housing finish shall be baked-on enamel, anodized, or baked-on powder coat paint. Finish shall be capable of surviving ASTM B117 salt fog environment testing for 2500 hours minimum without blistering or peeling.

g. Luminaires shall not exceed the following IES TM-15 Backlight, Uplight and Glare (B.U.G.) ratings:

1. Maximum Backlight (B) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in which luminaire is placed.

2. Maximum Uplight (U) rating shall be U0.

3. Maximum Glare (G) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in



which luminaire is placed.

h. Luminaires shall be fully assembled and electrically tested prior to shipment from factory.

i. The finish color shall be as indicated in the luminaire schedule.

j. Luminaire arm bolts shall be 304 stainless steel.

k. Luminaire lenses shall be constructed of frosted polycarbonate vandal-resistant lenses.

l. The wiring compartment on pole-mounted, street and area luminaires must be accessible without the use of hand tools to manipulate small screws, bolts, or hardware.

m. Incorporate modular electrical connections, and construct luminaires to allow replacement of all or any part of the optics, heat sinks, power supply units, ballasts, surge suppressors and other electrical components using only a simple tool, such as a manual or cordless electric screwdriver.

n. Luminaires shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, date of manufacture, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

o. Luminaire must pass 3G vibration testing in accordance with NEMA C136.31.

p. All factory electrical connections shall be made using crimp, locking, or latching style connectors. Twist-style wire nuts are not acceptable.

2.2.2 Luminaire Light Sources

2.2.2.1 LED Light Sources

a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) shall be in accordance with NEMA ANSLG C78.377: Nominal CCT: 4000 degrees K: 3985 plus or minus 275 degrees K.

b. Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be: Greater than or equal to 70 for 4000 degrees K light sources.

c. Color Consistency: Manufacturer shall utilize a maximum 4-step MacAdam ellipse binning tolerance for color consistency of LEDs used in luminaires.

2.2.3 Luminaire Power Supply Units (Drivers)

2.2.3.1 LED Power Supply Units (Drivers)

UL 1310. LED Power Supply Units (Drivers) shall meet the following requirements:

a. Minimum efficiency shall be 85 percent.

b. Drive current to each individual LED shall not exceed 600 mA, plus or minus 10 percent.



c. Shall be rated to operate between ambient temperatures of minus 22 degrees F and 122 degrees F.

d. Shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected, typically ranging from 120 V to 480 V nominal.

e. Operating frequency shall be: 50 or 60 Hz.

f. Power Factor (PF) shall be greater than or equal to 0.90.

g. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) current shall be less than or equal to 20 percent.

h. Shall meet requirements of 47 CFR 15, Class B.

i. Shall be RoHS-compliant.

j. Shall be mounted integral to luminaire. Remote mounting of power supply is not allowed.

k. Power supplies in luminaires mounted under a covered structure, such as a canopy, or where otherwise appropriate shall be UL listed with a sound rating of A.

l. Shall be dimmable, and compatible with a standard dimming control circuit of 0 - 10V or other approved dimming system.

m. Shall be equipped with over-temperature protection circuit that turns light source off until normal operating temperature is achieved.

2.2.4 LED Luminaire Surge Protection

Provide surge protection integral to luminaire to meet C Low waveforms as defined by IEEE C62.41.2, Scenario 1, Location Category C.

2.3 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRE CONTROLS

2.3.1 Photocell

UL 773 or UL 773A. Photocells shall be hermetically sealed, light sensor type, rated at 120 volts, 50/60 Hz with single-pole, single-throw contacts. Photocell shall be designed to fail to the ON position. Housing shall be constructed of polycarbonate, rated to operate within a temperature range of minus 40 to 158 degrees F. Photocell shall have a 1/2 in threaded base for mounting to a junction box or conduit. Provide swivel base type housing. Photocell shall turn on at 1-3 footcandles and turn off at 3 to 15 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources. Provide a directional lens in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition. Provide photocell with metal oxide varistor (MOV) type surge protection. Photocell to be designed for 20-year service and exceeds 15,000 operations at full load. Provide photocell with zero-cross technology to withstand severe in-rush current and extend relay life.

2.3.2 Timeswitch

Timeswitch shall be an electronic type with a 24 hour astronomic programming function that changes on/off settings according to seasonal variations of sunset and sunrise, providing a total of 56 on/off set



points. Digital clock display format shall be AM/PM 12 hour type. Provide power outage backup for switch utilizing a lithium battery which provides coverage for a minimum of 3 years. Timeswitch shall provide control to 4 channels or loads. Contacts shall be rated for 30 amps at 120-277 VAC resistive load in a DPDT normally open (NO) configuration. Provide switch with manual bypass or remote override control, daylight savings time automatic adjustment, EEPROM memory module, momentary function for output contacts, and provisions for photosensor input.

Timeswitch shall be housed in a surface-mounted, lockable NEMA 3R enclosure constructed of painted steel or plastic polymer conforming to NEMA ICS 6.

2.4 POLES

Provide poles designed for wind loading of 150 miles per hour determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS while supporting luminaires and all other appurtenances indicated. The effective projected areas of luminaires and appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific for the actual products provided on each pole. Poles shall be anchor-base type designed for use with underground supply conductors. Poles shall have oval-shaped handhole having a minimum clear opening of 2.5 by 5 inches. Handhole cover shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws. Metal poles shall have an internal grounding connection accessible from the handhole near the bottom of each pole. Scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles shall not be installed.

2.4.1 Steel Poles

AASHTO LTS. Provide steel poles having minimum 11-gage steel with minimum yield/strength of 48,000 psi and hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M factory finish. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Pole shall be anchor bolt mounted type. Pole shafts shall be one piece. Poles shall be welded construction with no bolts, rivets, or other means of fastening except as specifically approved. Pole markings shall be approximately 3 to 4 feet above grade and shall include manufacturer, year of manufacture, top and bottom diameters, and length. Base covers for steel poles shall be structural quality hot-rolled carbon steel plate having a minimum yield of 36,000 psi.

2.5 POLE FOUNDATIONS

Anchor bolts shall be steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi; the top 12 inches of the rod shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. Concrete shall be as specified in 03 31 29 MARINE CONCRETE.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

2.6.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

2.6.2 Labels

Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements.



Luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific light sources and ballasts according to proper light source type. The following light source characteristics shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":

Markings related to light source shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.


Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein.

3.1.1 Steel Poles

Provide concrete pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at the top end and bent 90 degrees at the bottom end. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for luminaire location. Install according to pole manufacturer's instructions. Alterations to poles after fabrication will void manufacturer's warranty and shall not be allowed.

3.1.2 Photocell Switch Aiming

Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations. Mount switch on north side of building in location not influenced by artificial lighting, in cast weatherproof aluminum housing with swivel arm. Set adjustable window slide for 5 footcandles photocell turn-on.

3.1.3 GROUNDING

Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles, luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.


Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly installed, connected, and adjusted.



DIVISION 31

EARTHWORK


SECTION 31 23 00.00 20

EXCAVATION AND FILL02/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA C600 (2017) Installation of Ductile-Iron Mains and Their Appurtenances


ASTM C136/C136M (2014) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM D698 (2012; E 2014; E 2015) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/cu. ft. (600 kN-m/cu. m.))

ASTM D1140 (2017) Standard Test Methods for Determining the Amount of Material Finer than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in Soils by Washing

ASTM D1556/D1556M (2015; E 2016) Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method

ASTM D1557 (2012; E 2015) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)

ASTM D2321 (2018) Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications

ASTM D2487 (2017) Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)

ASTM D4318 (2017; E 2018) Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

ASTM D6938 (2017a) Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 1


Depth)

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements Manual

U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

EPA SW-846.3-3 (1999, Third Edition, Update III-A) Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste: Physical/Chemical Methods



1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Degree of Compaction

Degree of compaction is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D1557, for general soil types, abbreviated as percent laboratory maximum density.

1.2.2 Hard Materials

Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits, or conglomerate materials which are not included in the definition of "rock" but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment, ripper teeth, or jack hammers for removal.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-06 Test Reports

Borrow Site Testing

Fill and backfill test

Density tests

Copies of all laboratory and field test reports within 24 hours of the completion of the test.


Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials.

1.5 REQUIREMENTS FOR OFF SITE SOIL

Soils brought in from off site for use as backfill shall be tested for petroleum hydrocarbons, BTEX, PCBs and HW characteristics (including toxicity, ignitability, corrosivity, and reactivity). Backfill shall not contain concentrations of these analytes above the appropriate State and/or

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 2


EPA criteria, and shall pass the tests for HW characteristics. Determine petroleum hydrocarbon concentrations by using appropriate State protocols. Determine BTEX concentrations by using EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 5035/8260B. Perform complete TCLP in accordance with EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 1311. Perform HW characteristic tests for ignitability, corrosivity, and reactivity in accordance with accepted standard methods. Perform PCB testing in accordance with accepted standard methods for sampling and analysis of bulk solid samples. Provide borrow site testing for petroleum hydrocarbons and BTEX from a grab sample of material from the area most likely to be contaminated at the borrow site (as indicated by visual or olfactory evidence), with at least one test from each borrow site. For each borrow site, provide borrow site testing for HW characteristics from a composite sample of material, collected in accordance with standard soil sampling techniques. Do not bring material onsite until tests results have been received and approved by the Owner.


1.6.1 Utilities

Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Excavation made with power-driven equipment is not permitted within two feet of known Owner-owned utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, excavate by hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the Owner. Report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

2.1.1 Structural Fill

Structural fill shall consist of crushed gravel unless bank-run gravel, clean stone fill, or other material is specified on the plans or permitted by the DOR. When not otherwise limited the word gravel as used below will refer to both bank-run gravel and crushed gravel. Shall meet the requirements of NHDOT, Section 508, Paragraph 2.1.1.

2.1.2 Unsuitable Materials

Unsuitable material consists of any saturated or unsaturated natural or man-made material such as, but not limited to, stumps, vegetation, emolition debris and structures encountered during the work that the Engineer determines to be unsuitable for foundation material.

2.1.3 Common Fill

Approved, unclassified soil material with the characteristics required to compact to the soil density specified for the intended location.

2.1.4 Backfill and Fill Material

Backfill and fill material consists of stones, rock fragments, and fine

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 3


hard durable particles resulting from the natural disintegration of rock. The material must be free from harmful amounts of organic matter. The wear shall not exceed 60 percent. No more than 12 percent of the material passing the No. 4 sieve shall pass the No. 200 sieve.

2.2 UTILITY BEDDING MATERIAL

Except as specified otherwise, provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as specified herein. Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D698 maximum density. Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring line of pipe. Provide ASTM D2321 materials as follows:

a. Class I: Angular, 0.25 to 1.5 inches, graded crushed stone.

2.2.1 Sand

Sand must be clean and consist of particles with 100 percent passing 3 inch sieve and 70 to 100 percent passing the No. 4 sieve.

2.2.2 Gravel

Gravel must be clean and consist of a mixture of stones or rock fragments and particles with 95 to 100 percent passing the 3 inch sieve and 25 to 70 percent passign the No. 4 sieve.

2.3 BORROW

Obtain borrow materials required in excess of those furnished from excavations from sources outside of the Owner's property.

2.4 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 3 inch minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Color and printing shall be permanent, unaffected by moisture or soil.

Warning Tape Color Codes

Red: Electric

Yellow: Gas, Oil; Dangerous Materials

Orange: Telephone and Other Communications

Blue: Water Systems

2.4.1 Warning Tape for Metallic Piping

Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 0.003 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 4


lengthwise, and 1250 psi crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation.

2.4.2 Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping

Polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of the tape shall be 0.004 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise. Tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3 feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

3.1.1 Shoring and Sheeting

Provide shoring as necessary. In addition to Section 25 A and B of EM 385-1-1 and other requirements set forth in this contract, include provisions in the shoring and sheeting plan that will accomplish the following:

a. Prevent undermining of pavements, foundations and slabs.

b. Prevent slippage or movement in banks or slopes adjacent to the excavation.

3.1.2 Drainage and Dewatering

Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during construction.

3.1.2.1 Drainage

So that construction operations progress successfully, completely drain construction site during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. The Contractor shall establish/construct storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site development, and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive surface water runoff away from the construction activity and/or provide temporary ditches, swales, and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils, prevent erosion and undermining of foundations. Excavated slopes and backfill surfaces shall be protected to prevent erosion and sloughing. Excavation shall be performed so that the site, the area immediately surrounding the site, and the area affecting operations at the site shall be continually and effectively drained.

3.1.3 Underground Utilities

Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall physically verify the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction in accordance with 01 35 26 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.

3.1.4 Machinery and Equipment

Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Repair, or remove and

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 5


provide new pipe for existing or newly installed pipe that has been displaced or damaged.

3.2 EXCAVATION

Excavate to contours, elevation, and dimensions indicated. Reuse excavated materials that meet the specified requirements for the material type required at the intended location. Keep excavations free from water. Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractor's operations, soils softened or made unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather. Excavations below indicated depths will not be permitted except to remove unsatisfactory material. Unsatisfactory material encountered below the grades shown shall be removed as directed. Refill with backfill and fill material and compact to 95 percent of maximum density. Unless specified otherwise, refill excavations cut below indicated depth with backfill and fill material and compact to 95 percent of maximum density. Satisfactory material removed below the depths indicated, without specific direction of the Owner, shall be replaced with satisfactory materials to the indicated excavation grade. Determination of elevations and measurements of approved overdepth excavation of unsatisfactory material below grades indicated shall be done under the direction of the Owner.

3.2.1 Pipe Trenches

Excavate to the dimension indicated. Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform support for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement. Tamp if necessary to provide a firm pipe bed. Recesses shall be excavated to accommodate bells and joints so that pipe will be uniformly supported for the entire length. Rock, where encountered, shall be excavated to a depth of at least 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe.

3.2.2 Excavated Materials

Satisfactory excavated material required for fill or backfill shall be placed in the proper section of the permanent work required or shall be separately stockpiled if it cannot be readily placed. Satisfactory material in excess of that required for the permanent work and all unsatisfactory material shall be disposed of as specified in Paragraph "DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL."

3.3 FILLING AND BACKFILLING

Fill and backfill to contours, elevations, and dimensions indicated. Compact each lift before placing overlaying lift.

3.3.1 Common Fill Placement

Provide for general site. Use satisfactory materials. Place in 6 inch lifts. Compact areas not accessible to rollers or compactors with mechanical hand tampers. Aerate material excessively moistened by rain to a satisfactory moisture content. Finish to a smooth surface by blading, rolling with a smooth roller, or both.

3.3.2 Backfill and Fill Material Placement

Provide for paved areas and under concrete slabs, except where select material is provided. Do not place over wet or frozen areas. Place backfill material adjacent to structures as the structural elements are completed and accepted. Backfill against concrete only when approved.

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 6


Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against the structure.

3.3.3 Backfill and Fill Material Placement Over Pipes and at Walls

Backfilling shall not begin until construction below finish grade has been approved, underground utilities systems have been inspected, tested and approved, forms removed, and the excavation cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall be brought to indicated finish grade. Where pipe is coated or wrapped for protection against corrosion, the backfill material up to an elevation 2 feet above sewer lines and 1 foot above other utility lines shall be free from stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting backfill shall not be operated closer to foundation or retaining walls than a distance equal to the height of backfill above the top of footing; the area remaining shall be compacted in layers not more than 4 inches in compacted thickness with power-driven hand tampers suitable for the material being compacted. Backfill shall be placed carefully around pipes or tanks to avoid damage to coatings, wrappings, or tanks. Backfill shall not be placed against foundation walls prior to 7 days after completion of the walls. As far as practicable, backfill shall be brought up evenly on each side of the wall and sloped to drain away from the wall.

3.3.4 Trench Backfilling

Backfill as rapidly as construction, testing, and acceptance of work permits. Place and compact backfill under structures and paved areas in 6 inch lifts to top of trench and in 6 inch lifts to one foot over pipe outside structures and paved areas.

3.4 BORROW

Where satisfactory materials are not available in sufficient quantity from required excavations, approved borrow materials shall be obtained as specified herein.

3.5 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape 12 inches below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 6 inches below top of subgrade.

3.6 COMPACTION

3.6.1 Paved Areas

Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D698 or ASTM D1557. Compact fill and backfill materials to 95 percent of ASTM D698 or ASTM D1557.

3.7 RIP-RAP CONSTRUCTION

Remove and reset rip-rap as required.

3.8 FINISH OPERATIONS

3.8.1 Grading

Finish grades as indicated within one-tenth of one foot. Grade areas to drain water away from structures. Maintain areas free of trash and debris. For existing grades that will remain but which were disturbed by

SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 7


Contractor's operations, grade as directed.

3.9 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

Remove from Owner's property all surplus or other soil material not required or suitable for filling or backfilling, refuse, and timber.


3.10.1 Sampling

Take the number and size of samples required to perform the following tests.

3.10.2 Testing

Perform one of each of the following tests for each material used. Provide additional tests for each source change.

3.10.2.1 Fill and Backfill Material Testing

Test fill and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M for conformance to ASTM D2487 gradation limits; ASTM D1140 for material finer than the No. 200 sieve; ASTM D4318 for liquid limit and for plastic limit; ASTM D698 or ASTM D1557 for moisture density relations, as applicable.

3.10.2.2 Density Tests

Test density in accordance with ASTM D1556/D1556M, or ASTM D6938. Test each lift at randomly selected locations every 2000 square feet. Include density test results in daily report.


SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 8


SECTION 31 41 16

METAL SHEET PILING08/09

PART 1 GENERAL

Sub-surface explorations for this project were complete in two ways:

a. Borings - Boring logs have been provided on contract drawing sheet B-101.

b. Sonic Ultrasonic Pile Length Testing - Included as an attachment to this specifications section.

Review of the above mentioned studys including the origional design drawings must be reviewed prior to ordering materials to ensure an appropriate allowace in sheet pile length is given.

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM A6/A6M (2017a) Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling

ASTM A572/A572M (2018) Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel

1.2 SUBMITTALS



Delivery, Storage, And Handling Plans

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Metal Sheet Piling

SD-03 Product Data

Mechanical Splice

Driving

Pile Driving Equipment

Pulling and Redriving



SD-06 Test Reports

Materials Tests


Pile Driving Record


1.3.1 Material Certificates

For each shipment, submit certificates identified with specific lots prior to installing piling. Include in the identification data piling type, dimensions, chemical composition, mechanical properties, section properties, heat number, and mill identification mark.

1.4 BASIS OF BIDS

Base bids on geotechnical explorations depicted on the drawings, using straightline interpretation, with a 15 foot allowance for bedrock variation. No additional payment will be made for withdrawn, damaged, rejected or misplaced piles; for any portion of pile remaining above the cut-off elevation; for back driving; for cutting off piles; or for any cut off length of piles. Payment will not be made for under-capacity or defective work. Payment will not be made for correction of defective work caused by Contractor error.


Materials delivered to the site shall be new and undamaged and shall be accompanied by certified test reports. Provide the manufacturer's logo and mill identification mark on the sheet piling as required by the referenced specifications. Store and handle sheet piling in the manner recommended by the manufacturer to prevent permanent deflection, distortion or damage to the interlocks; as a minimum, support on level blocks or racks spaced not more than 10 feet apart and not more than 2 feet from the ends. Storage of sheet piling should also facilitate required inspection activities and prevent damage to coatings and corrosion prior to installation.

Submit delivery, storage, and handling plans at least 30 days prior to delivery of piles to the job site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL SHEET PILING

Submit detail drawings for sheet piling, including fabricated sections, showing complete piling dimensions and details, driving sequence and location of installed piling.

a. Include in the drawings details of top protection, special reinforcing tips, tip protection, lagging, splices, fabricated additions to plain piles, cut-off method, corrosion protection, and dimensions of templates and other temporary guide structures for installing piling. Provide details of the method for handling piling to prevent permanent deflection, distortion or damage to piling interlocks.



b. Metal sheet piling shall be hot-rolled steel sections conforming to ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50 and of the size PZC18 or equivalent.

c. For protection of sheet piling, coat the exterior face only in accordance with Section 09 97 13.26 COATING OF STEEL WATERFRONT STRUCTURES.

2.1.1 Interlocks

The interlocks of sheet piling shall be free-sliding, provide a swing angle suitable for the intended installation but not less than 5 degrees when interlocked, and maintain continuous interlocking when installed.


Sheet piling including special fabricated sections shall be full-length sections of the dimensions shown. Provide fabricated sections conforming to the requirement and the piling manufacturer's recommendations for fabricated sections. Fabricated tees, wyes and cross pieces shall be fabricated of piling sections with a minimum web thickness of 0.375 inch. Provide sheet piling with standard pulling holes.

2.2 MECHANICAL SPLICE

The mechanical splice used to connect the replacement tie back to the existing tie back must provide 125 percent strength of the existing tie rod. Submit manufacturer's written proceedures for installation and testing. the Owner's representative must be present to view the installation of the first two mechanical splice connections between an existing tie rod and tie rod extension.

2.3 APPURTENANT METAL MATERIALS

Provide metal plates, shapes, bolts, nuts, rivets and other appurtenant fabrication and installation materials conforming to manufacturer's standards and to the requirements specified in the respective sheet piling standards and in Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.

2.4 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS

Requirements for material tests, workmanship and other measures for quality assurance shall be as specified.

2.4.1 Materials Tests

Submit certified materials tests reports showing that sheet piling and appurtenant metal materials meet the specified requirements, for each shipment and identified with specific lots prior to installing materials. Material test reports shall meet the requirements of ASTM A6/A6M. Perform materials tests conforming to the following requirements. Sheet piling and appurtenant materials shall be tested and certified by the manufacturer to meet the specified chemical, mechanical and section property requirements prior to delivery to the site. Testing of sheet piling for mechanical properties shall be performed after the completion of all rolling and forming operations. Testing of sheet piling shall meet the requirements of ASTM A6/A6M.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

Perform in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL. Pre-excavation will not be permitted. Backfill as indicated.

3.2 INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Pile Driving Equipment

Submit complete descriptions of sheet piling driving equipment including hammers, extractors, protection caps and other installation appurtenances, prior to commencement of work. Descriptive information includes manufacturer's name, model numbers, capacity, rated energy, hammer details, cushion material, helmet, and templates. Provide pile driving equipment conforming to the following requirements.

3.2.1.1 Driving Hammers

Hammers shall be steam, air, or diesel drop, single-acting, double-acting, differential-acting, or vibratory type. The driving energy of the hammers shall be sized for the geotechnical conditions and steel sheet pile to obtain the depths indicated on the drawings and at a minimum of 15,000 foot-pounds. Use suitable cushions or driving heads to avoid damage to the piles, developing proper total driving energy, and directing the energy along the longitudinal center of gravity of the piling. Repair damage to piling caused by use of a pile hammer with excess delivered force or energy.

3.2.1.2 Jetting Equipment

Jetting will not be permitted.

3.2.2 Placing and Driving

3.2.2.1 Placing

Any excavation required within the area where sheet pilings are to be installed shall be completed prior to placing sheet pilings. Pilings properly placed and driven shall be interlocked throughout their length with adjacent pilings to form a continuous diaphragm throughout the length or run of piling wall.

a. Pilings shall be carefully located as indicated. Pilings shall be placed plumb with out-of-plumbness not exceeding 1/8 inch per foot of length and true to line. Place the pile so the face will not be more than 6 inches from vertical alignment at any point. Top of pile at elevation of cut-off shall be within 1/2 inch horizontally and 1 inch vertically of the location indicated. Manipulation of piles to force them into position will be permitted to a maximum of 1 inch horizontally. Check all piles for heave. Redrive all heaved piles to the required tip elevation.

b. Provide temporary wales, templates, or guide structures to ensure that the pilings are placed and driven to the correct alignment. Use a system of structural framing sufficiently rigid to resist lateral and driving forces and to adequately support the sheet piling until design tip elevation is achieved.



3.2.2.2 Driving

Submit records of the completed sheet piling driving operations, including a system of identification which shows the disposition of approved piling in the work, driving equipment performance data, piling penetration rate data, piling dimensions and top and bottom elevations of installed piling. Notify the Owner 30 days prior to the date pile driving is to begin. Prior to driving pilings in water, paint a horizontal line on both sides of each piling at a fixed distance from the bottom so that it will be visible above the water line after installation. This line shall indicate the profile of the bottom elevation of installed pilings and potential problem areas can be identified by abrupt changes in its elevation. Drive pilings with the proper size hammer and by approved methods so as not to subject the pilings to damage and to ensure proper interlocking throughout their lengths.

a. Maintain driving hammers in proper alignment during driving operations by use of leads or guides attached to the hammer. Caution shall be taken in the sustained use of vibratory hammers when a hard driving condition is encountered to avoid interlock-melt or damages. Discontinue the use of vibratory hammers and impact hammers employed when the penetration rate due to vibratory loading is one foot or less per minute.

b. Employ a protecting cap in driving when using impact hammers to prevent damage to the tops of pilings. Use cast steel shoe to prevent damage to the tip of the sheet piling. Remove and replace pilings damaged during driving or driven out of interlock at the Contractor's expense.

c. Drive pilings without the aid of a water jet.

d. Take adequate precautions to ensure that pilings are driven plumb. Where possible, drive Z-pile with the ball end leading. If an open socket is leading, a bolt or similar object placed in the bottom of the interlock will minimize packing material into it and ease driving for the next sheet. If at any time the forward or leading edge of the piling wall is found to be out-of-plumb in the plane of the wall the piling being driven shall be driven to the required depth and tapered pilings shall be provided and driven to interlock with the out-of-plumb leading edge or other approved corrective measures shall be taken to insure the plumbness of succeeding pilings. The maximum permissible taper for any tapered piling shall be 1/8 inch per foot of length.

e. If obstructions restrict driving a piling to the specified penetration, the obstructions shall be removed or penetrated with a chisel beam. Pilings shall be driven to depths shown and shall extend up to the elevation indicated for the top of pilings.

f. Pre-augering or spudding of piles will not be permitted.

3.2.3 Cutting-Off and Splicing

Pilings driven to refusal or to the point where additional penetration cannot be attained and are extending above the required top elevation in excess of the specified tolerance shall be cut off to the required elevation. Pilings driven below the required top elevation and pilings damaged by driving and cut off to permit further driving shall be extended as required to reach the top elevation by splicing when directed at no additional cost to the Owner.



a. Piles must be driven full length, splices are not allowed.

b. Cut holes in pilings for bolts, rods, drains or utilities in a neat and workmanlike manner, as shown or as directed. Use a straight edge in cuts made by burning to avoid abrupt nicks. Bolt holes in steel piling shall be drilled or may be burned and reamed by approved methods which will not damage the surrounding metal. Holes other than bolt holes shall be reasonably smooth and the proper size for rods and other items to be inserted. All holes in steel pilings on the wet side shall be made watertight by welding steel plates over the holes after the piling installation is completed. Do not use explosives for cutting. Piles must be re-coated in the area of any cut holes in accordance with 09 97 13.26 COATING OF STEEL WATERFRONT STRUCTURES.

3.2.4 Inspection of Driven Piling

Perform continuous inspections during pile driving. Inspect all piles for compliance with tolerance requirements. Bring any unusual problems which may occur to the attention of the Owner. Inspect the interlocked joints of driven pilings extending above ground. Pilings found to be out of interlock shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Use divers to inspect underwater interlocked joints of sheet piling. Owner's divers may also inspect the interlocked joints. The inspection of sheeting shall be performed after driving is completed and prior to backfilling.

3.2.5 Obstructions and Differing Site Conditions

If conditions during driving indicate that the pile is hitting anobstruction or if site conditions differ materially from the requirements of these Specifications, the Contractor shall first try to circumvent theobstruction and the Owner shall be notified immediately of the changedconditions. The Owner's judgment shall be final as to the course of actionto be taken.

Where obstructions or very dense granular layers make it impossible toinstall certain piles at locations shown on the drawings and/or to theproper depths, resort to all usual methods for pile installation, includingspudding and excavation. Prior to pile driving, locate and remove allobstructions within the top 5 feet of soil. If, in the judgment of the Owner, the Contractor is unable to complete the proper installation of any pile by and after resorting to such methods, the Owner may order an additional pile or piles be driven, or that other remedial action be taken. Pull out any pile abandoned because of obstructions encountered before reaching the anticipated depth. Fill the open hole with concrete or soil at the discretion of the Owner and at no additional cost.

If the Owner determines that obstructions more than 5 feet below mudlineelevation or greater than 1 cu yd in volume should be removed by excavation, the Contractor will be reimbursed for the additional work of removing obstructions and backfilling on a time and materials basis. No additional payment for removal of any obstruction will be made unless approval of such work, including agreement for extra compensation for such, has been made in writing by the Owner's Representative in advance of execution of the work.

Cut off or pull out, at the discretion of the Owner, abandoned piles whichcannot be driven to the required depth by the "usual methods" because ofobstructions. In either case, the Contractor will be paid in accordance with a written agreement for compensation for such work. The written



agreement shall be approved in advance of executing the work.

3.2.6 Pulling and Redriving

Submit the proposed method of pulling sheet piling, prior to pulling any piling. Pull, as directed, selected pilings after driving to determine the condition of the underground portions of pilings. Any piling so pulled and found to be damaged, to the extent that its usefulness in the structure is impaired, shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Pilings pulled and found to be in satisfactory condition shall be redriven when directed.

3.3 REMOVAL

The removal of sheet pilings shall consist of pulling, sorting, cleaning the interlocks, inventorying and storing previously installed sheet pilings as shown and directed.

3.3.1 Pulling

The method of pulling piling shall be approved. Provide pulling holes in pilings, as required. Extractors shall be of suitable type and size. Care shall be exercised during pulling of pilings to avoid damaging piling interlocks and adjacent construction. If the Owner determines that adjacent permanent construction has been damaged during pulling, the Contractor will be required to repair this construction at no cost to the Owner. Pull pilings one sheet at a time. Pilings fused together shall be separated prior to pulling, unless the Contractor demonstrates, to the satisfaction of the Owner, that the pilings cannot be separated. The Contractor will not be paid for the removal of pilings damaged beyond structural use due to proper care not being exercised during pulling.

3.3.2 Sorting, Cleaning, Inventorying and Storing

Pulled pilings shall be sorted, cleaned, inventoried and stored by type into groups as:

a. Piling usable without reconditioning.

b. Piling requiring reconditioning.

c. Piling damaged beyond structural use.

3.4 INSTALLATION RECORDS

Maintain a pile driving record for each sheet pile driven. Indicate on the installation record: installation dates and times, type and size of hammer, rate of operation, total driving time, dimensions of driving helmet and cap used, blows required per foot for each foot of penetration, final driving resistance in blows for final 6 inches, pile locations, tip elevations, ground elevations, cut-off elevations, and any reheading or cutting of piles. Record any unusual pile driving problems during driving. Submit complete records to the Owner.



SONIC/ULTRASONIC PILE LENGTH TESTING

FISH PIER

PORTSMOUTH, NEW HAMPSHIRE

For

APPLEDORE MARINE ENGINEERING

APRIL 2020

M20029NH

April 24, 2020

Kyle Vandemoer, PE Appledore Marine Engineering 600 State St. Suite E Portsmouth, NH 03801

Dear Mr. Vandemoer:

NDT Corporation conducted sonic/ultrasonic nondestructive pulse-echo reflection measurements on twenty-two (22) piles at the Fish Pier located on Peirce Island Road in Portsmouth NH. Field work was conducted on April 21st, 2020. The objective of the testing was to determine the length of piles to provide information to assist Appledore Marine with a rehabilitation strategy for this section of the pier/bulkhead due to the failure of the sheet piles.

This report presents the results and findings of these investigations.

We thank you for the opportunity to perform this work and look forward to being of service to you in the future. If you have any questions or comments, contact the undersigned at 978-563-1327.

Sincerely,

NDT Corporation

William Horne

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 SUMMARY Page 1

2.0 LOCATION AND SURVEY CONTROL Page 1

3.0 NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING METHOD Pages 1 - 2

4.0 RESULTS Pages 2 – 3

FIGURES

APPENDIX SONIC/ULTRASONIC PILE TESTING

1.0 SUMMARY NDT Corporation conducted sonic/ultrasonic nondestructive pulse-echo reflection measurements on twenty-two (22) piles at the Fish Pier located on Peirce Island Road in Portsmouth NH. Field work was conducted on April 21st, 2020. The objective of the testing was to determine the length of piles due to the failure of the sheet piles and subsequent sink hole that formed.

2.0 LOCATION AND SURVEY CONTROL The general location of the Fish Pier is shown on Figure 1. Measurements from the sensor/source locations to top of pile and to bed bottom were made to reference total pile lengths and embedment lengths. The lengths reported are from the top of each individual pile. Figure 2 is a plan map with NDT Stationing on it. Stationing went west to east along the bulkhead.

3.0 NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING METHOD 3.1 Sonic/ultrasonic Pile Length Measurements Overview: The lengths of piles are determined using sonic/ultrasonic pulse-echo measurements. Pulse-echo measurements are made by producing a compressional stress wave near the top of the pile with an impact source and measuring with sensors near the impact point, the time for the wave to reflect from the end of the pile or discontinuities within the pile. The sensors measure the amplitude of the stress wave in time (time domain data). Data recorded at a sensor next to the impact point is used to establish “zero” time (instant energy is introduced into the pile). The two-way travel time of the impact signal is the time difference between zero time and reflected signal. The length is determined using ½ the measured time to the reflector multiplied times the measured velocity. Compressional wave velocity values are calculated using the travel times and the distance between the impact point and sensors. Data are acquired multiple times on the same pile to insure data repeatability.

Logistical information which is helpful for the interpretation of reflection data are: pile identification, and any geological information about the site (soil type/layering sand, clay, till, etc., water table/depth, depth to rock). Individual pile information such as length above mud line, width and height of exposed piles will be measured using a tape. See Appendix 1 Sonic/ultrasonic Pile Testing.

Procedure: The surface of pile is cleaned, if needed, to remove excessive rust, dirt from metal piles or punky wood from wood piles. Sensors are held against the clean surface either individually or using a four-sensor array. A sonic/ultrasonic pulse is initiated with a projectile (ball bearing) impact from the air gun powered by a regulated tank of compressed nitrogen. A hammer source can also be used to initiate the sonic/ultrasonic pulse. The hammer source is higher energy but lower frequency and consequently has lower resolution. Data can be recorded for 50, 25, and/or 10 milliseconds and displayed on the PC screen for quality evaluation and field interpretation. Data collected with longer times allow for length determinations of longer piles while shorter times allow for better resolution on “shorter” piles. If a reasonable bottom reflector is evident, 4 more records are obtained to assure the repeatability of the data. If a bottom reflector is not clear the sensor locations are moved, and the acquisition process repeated until a repeatable bottom reflector is recorded.

M20029NH 1

Testing results using this method are expected to be within +- 5-10% of the actual pile length. Cracked, broken or severely deteriorated zones in the pile will disrupt the energy propagation causing a reflection that may be interpreted as an “end of pile” reflector or an intermediate reflector.

4.0 RESULTS The pile length calculations averaged between 41 to 43 feet with lengths of embedment averaging from 23 to 25 feet. An average compressional velocity of 16,500 ft./sec was used to interpret the data. Please refer to Table 1(on the next page) for a summary of the results.

Intermediate reflectors along with the end reflector were detected at some piles; it is believed these intermediate reflectors may be due to a change in material from loose mud to a denser till layer. Large changes of material density and velocity surrounding a pile can produce reflections. The next page has a Table of the piles tested, distance from the top of the pile to the waterline, and end reflector from our processed data, and an embedment length.

Below is an annotated Sonic/ultrasonic data record:

End Reflector

2

Table 1 summary piles tested and distances from the top of the sheet pile.

Pile Station (ft)Distance from top of pile to waterline (ft)

Distance from top of pile mudline (ft)

2 9 18 37 40 19 22

8 9 18 38 39 20 21

14 9 19 37 39 18 20

17 9 19 43 45 24 26

23 9 19 41 43 22 24

26 9 19 42 43 23 24

32 9 19 42 45 23 26

35 9 19 40 42 21 23

42 9 19 40 42 21 23

49 9 19 40 42 21 23

55 9 19 39 42 20 23

61 9 19 39 41 20 22

67 9 19 44 46 25 27

73 9 19 43 44 24 25

79 9 19 41 42 22 23

90 8 19 45 47 26 28

96 8 19 45 47 26 28

102 8 19 45 46 26 27

108 8 17 46 47 29 30

114 8 16 40 42 24 26

124 8 14 47 47 33 33

127 8 14 46 47 32 33

Distance from top of pile to end reflector(ft)

Total Embedment (ft)

3

FIGURES

Non Destructive Sheet Pile LengthTesting

Fish PierPortsmouth, NH

Prepared forAppledore Marine Engineering

byNDT Corporation

Area of Investigation

April2020

Figure 1

NDT Station0+00

NDT Station1+27

Non Destructive Sheet Pile LengthTesting

Fish PierPortsmouth, NH

Prepared forAppledore Marine Engineering

byNDT Corporation

Site Plan with Stationing

April2020

Figure 2


SECTION 31 62 16.16

STEEL PIPE PILES08/04

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM A 252 (1998; R 2002) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Approval is required for all submittals. The following must be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Pile Placement

Submit pile placement plan at least 30 days prior to delivery of piles to the job site.

SD-03 Product Data

Steel Pipe Piles


Submit descriptions of all pile driving equipment at least 30 days prior to th commencement of work. This must include details of the pile hammer, power plant, leads, pile cushion, cap block, and helmet.

Pile Caps

Delivery, Storage, And Handling

Submit delivery, storage, and handling plans for piles at least 30 days prior to delivery of piles to the job site.

SD-07 Certificates

Contractor Qualifications


Pile Installation Records



Submit to the Owner complete and accurate job pile installation records as specified in paragraph entitled "Records" of this section, within 15 calendar days after completion of driving.

1. Sizes, lengths, and locations of piles.2. Final tip and head elevations.


Delivery, storage, and handling of materials must conform to the requirements specified herein. Plans for the delivery, storage, and handling of piles must be developed and submitted in accordance with paragraph "Submittals."

1.3.1 Delivery and Storage

Piles must be stacked during delivery and storage so that each pile is maintained in a straight position and is supported every 10 feet or less along its length (ends inclusive) to prevent exceeding the maximum camber or sweep. Piles must not be stacked more than 5 feet high.

1.3.2 Handling

Piles must be lifted using a cradle or multiple points pick-up to ensure that the maximum permissible camber is not exceeded due to insufficient support, except that a one-point pick-up may be used for lifting piles that are not extremely long. Point pick-up devices must be approved. Holes may be burned in the pile above the cutoff length for lifting. Piles must not be dragged across the ground. The Contractor must inspect piles for excessive camber and for damage before transporting them from the storage area and immediately prior to placement. Camber must be measured at the mid-length of the pile. The maximum permissible camber must be 2 inches over the length of the pile. Piles having excessive camber will be rejected.

1.4 Contractor Qualifications

The Contractor or his/her specialty subcontractor must have been in business a minimum of 5 years.

Submit a list of three similar projects that the Contractor or his/her specialty subcontractor has completed, along with points of contact for these projects. Include the location, contract name, and completion dates for the projects. Include names, telephone numbers and fax numbers of a supervisory level point of contact at each facility or installation who has knowledge of the Contractor's or specialty subcontractor's work performance.

1.5 Pile Driving Equipment

Submit descriptions of pile driving equipment to be employed in the work to the Owner for approval. Descriptive information includes manufacturer's name, model numbers, capacity, rated energy, hammer details, cushion material, helmet, and templates.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Steel Pipe Piles

Steel pipe piles must be PP 12 x 0.500 minimum 45 ksi yield strength, conforming to the requirements of the ASTM A 252, Grade 3, seamless or straight seam. Spiral welded pipe is not permitted. Pipe pile coatings must be in accordance with Section 09 97 13.26, COATING OF STEEL WATERFRONT STRUCTURES.

2.1.2 Pile Caps

Marine pile caps must consist of fiberglass or polyethylene conical caps permanently attached to the pile.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Inspection

Inspect piles when delivered and immediately before installing. Piles must be handled so as to protect pile coatings. Repair damage or defects in pile coatings as specified by coating manufacturer.

3.1.2 Pile Installation Records

Develop a form for compiling pile installation records as approved.

3.1.3 Pile Placement

A pile placement plan which shows the installation sequence and the methods proposed for controlling the location and alignment of piles must be developed and submitted as required. Piles must be placed accurately in the correct location and alignments, both laterally and longitudinally, and to the vertical indicated. The Contractor must establish a permanent base line to provide for inspection of pile placement by the Owner during pile driving operations. The base line must be established prior to drilling job piles and must be maintained during the installation of the job piles. The correct relative position of all piles must be maintained by the use of templates or by other approved means. Piles damaged or not located properly or exceeding the maximum limits for lateral and vertical deviation, and variation in alignment must be pulled and new piles redrilled at a location directed, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.1.4 Pile Tolerances

A final lateral deviation from the contract plan location at the cutoff elevation of not more than 1 inch horizontally and vertically will be permitted. Piles must be installed plumb. A variation of not more than 0.125 inch per foot of pile length from the vertical will be permitted. Additional work required due to improper location of piles will be the responsibility of the Contractor and must be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.



3.1.5 Installing

Drive piles to minimum embedment depth. Cut the pile to the final elevation. Coating damage must be repaired in accordance with the manufacturers' and suppliers' recommendations.

3.1.6 Welding

Section 05 05 23.16, STRUCTURAL WELDING.

3.1.7 Splicing

Splices are not allowed.




SECTION 31 62 19.13

TIMBER MARINE PILES11/16

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AWPA A4 (2019) Standard Methods for Sampling Wood Preservatives

AWPA A9 (2018) Standard Method for Analysis of Treated Wood and Treating Solutions by X-Ray Spectroscopy

AWPA M2 (2016) Standard for the Inspection of Preservative Treated Wood Products for Industrial Use




AWPA P34 (2014) Standard for Copper Naphthenate, Waterbone (CuN-W)

AWPA T1 (2017) Use Category System: Processing and Treatment Standard

AWPA U1 (2017) Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood


ASTM D25 (2012; R 2017) Standard Specification for Round Timber Piles

WESTERN WOOD PRESERVERS INSTITUTE (WWPI)

WWPI Mgt Practices (1996; R 2011) Best Management Practices for the Use of Treated Wood in Aquatic and Wetland Environments

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL



PROCEDURES:

SD-03 Product Data

Piles


Submit complete descriptions of pile driving equipment, including hammers, leads, driving helmets, cushion blocks, driving blocks, collars, extractors, and other appurtenances for approval prior to commencement of work.

Pile Caps

SD-06 Test Reports

Preservative Treatment - Timber Marine Piles

The Contractor must provide the Owner's Representative with the inspection report of an independent inspection agency, approved by the Owner, that offered products comply with applicable AWPA standards.

Delivery Inspection List

SD-07 Certificates

SDS and CIS

Best Management Practices (BMPs)


Pile Driving Records

Submit pile driving records within 15 calendar days after completion of driving.


Handle and store piles in accordance with AWPA M4. Follow precautions identified in SDS or CIS provided by the supplier of treated wood products. Special care must be taken in supporting piles to prevent the induction of excessive bending stresses in the piles. Piles must be carefully handled without dropping, breaking of outer fibers, and penetrating the surface with tools. Peaveys, cant hooks, pikes, and other pointed tools must not be used in handling treated piles.


1.4.1 Preservative Treatment - Timber Marine Piles

The Contractor must be responsible for the quality of treated wood products. The Contractor must provide the Owner's Representative with the inspection report of an independent inspection agency, approved by the Owner, certifying that the offered products comply with applicable AWPA standards. Identify treatment on each piece by the quality mark of an agency accredited by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standard



Committee. Inspect all preservative-treated wood visually to ensure there are no excessive residual materials or preservative deposits. Material must be clean and dry or it will be rejected because of environmental concerns.

1.4.2 SDS and CIS

Provide Safety Data Sheets (SDS) and Consumer Information Sheets (CIS) associated with timber pile preservative treatment. Contractor must comply with all safety precautions indicated on the SDS and CIS.


Field inspect and submit a verification list of each treated timber pile indicating the wording and lettering of the quality control markings, the species and the condition of the wood. Do not incorporate piles damaged in transport from plant to site. Inspect all preservative-treated piles, visually to ensure there are no excessive residual materials or preservative deposits. Material must be clean and dry or it will be rejected due to environmental concerns.

1.4.4 Best Management Practices (BMPs)

The producer of the treated wood products must provide certification that WWPI Mgt Practices for the use of Treated Wood in Aquatic and Wetland Environments were utilized including a written description and appropriate documentation of the BMPs utilized.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Piles

Provide Southern pine clean-peeled, treated piles in accordance with AWPA U1 Commodity Specification G and conforming to ASTM D25 and other requirements as specified. Piles must be in one piece for the lengths shown. Splices will not be permitted. Each treated pile must be branded by the producer, in accordance with AWPA M6. Minimum pile circumferences, measured at 3 feet from the butt end, must be 12 inches.

2.1.2 Preservative Treatment

Treat piles based on Use Category and species in accordance with AWPA U1 and AWPA T1 to the retention and penetration for marine piling and produce in accordance with WWPI Mgt Practices. Piles preservative treatment must be Waterborne preservative for marine piles in accordance with AWPA P5 (ACZA - Ammoniacal Copper Zinc Arsenate, CCA - Chromated Copper Arsenate) and with a minimum retention of 1.5 pounds per cubic foot.

2.1.3 Field Treatment

Piles must be field treated in accordance with AWPA M4. All cuts, holes and injuries such as holes from removal of spikes or nails which may penetrate the treated zone must be field treated with copper naphthenate conforming to AWPA P34.



2.1.4 Pile Caps

Seal timber piles with bitumastic and 20 ounce copper cover. Fasten with 12 evenly spaced copper nails.

2.2 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS

2.2.1 Inspection of Piles

Piles to be preservative treated will be inspected prior to treatment. Piles must be so marked or segregated into marked lots that there will be no possibility of error in assignment after they have been inspected. Piles damaged after inspection may be subsequently rejected if damage is deemed sufficient for rejection. All rejected piles must be removed as directed.

2.2.2 Inspection of the Preservative Treatment Process

Inspection of the preservative treatment process will be in accordance with AWPA M2.

2.2.3 Sampling and Testing

Sampling and testing must be performed by an approved testing organization adequately equipped to perform such services.

2.2.3.1 Sampling

Representative samples of preservatives for testing must be obtained from storage containers using the methods described in AWPA A4. The analysis of wood treated with waterborne preservatives must be done in accordance with AWPA A9.

2.2.3.2 Testing

Waterborne preservatives must be tested for conformance to AWPA A9. The net retention and the penetration of preservatives in piles must be determined as specified in AWPA M2 and the additional requirements listed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Pile Driving Equipment

Pile driving equipment must meet the following requirements.

3.1.1.1 Pile Driving Hammers

Pile driving hammers must be steam, air or diesel, and of an approved type. The size or capacity of hammers must be as recommended by the manufacturer for the pile weights and character of subsurface material to be encountered. The pile hammer must be of sufficient weight and energy to install the specified pile without damage into the soils expected to be encountered. The mimimum driving energy must be 8,000 foot-pounds with a maximum driving energy of 15,000 foot-pounds. Weight of the hammer for drop hammers must not be less than 2,000 pounds.



3.1.1.2 Leads

Leads are required and must be fixed at the top and adjustable at the bottom. Swinging leads will be permitted.

3.1.1.3 Driving Cap or Helmet and Cushion Block

Driving cap or helmet must be an approved design and must be capable of protecting pile heads, minimizing energy absorption, and transmitting hammer energy uniformly and consistently to piles. Place driving helmet or cap and cushion block combination between top of pile and the ram. Driving cap must fit snugly on the top of piles and must employ a cushion block to prevent impact damage to piles. The cushion block may be a solid or laminated softwood block with the grain parallel to the pile axis and enclosed in a close-fitting steel housing. The thickness of the block must be suitable for the length of pile to be driven and the character of subsurface material to be encountered. If block is damaged, split, highly compressed, charred or burned, or has become spongy or deteriorated, replace with new block. Under no circumstances will the use of small wood blocks, wood chips, rope, or other material permitting excessive loss of hammer energy be permitted.

3.1.2 Fender Pile Installation

Inspect piles when delivered and when in the leads immediately before driving. Cut piles at cutoff grade with pneumatic tools by sawing or other approved method. Pile heads at cutoff must be sound. Counterbore holes for bolts for countersinking bolt heads and washers. After installation of bolts, fill counterbored holes with an approved bituminous material. Drill holes for lag bolts not larger than body of bolt at base of tread. Fender piles must have tops beveled outboard.

3.1.2.1 Tolerances in Driving Piles

Piles must be accurately placed in the correct location and alignments both laterally and longitudinally and to the vertical lines as shown. Fender piles may be manipulated a maximum of 0.50 inch per foot of pile length in a direction parallel to the pier face and 0.25 inch per foot of pile length in a direction perpendicular to the pier face. Inspect piles for heave. Piles must be driven to the depths shown. Redrive heaved piles to the required tip elevation. Remove and replace with new piles those damaged, misplaced, driven below the design cutoff, or driven out of alignment.

3.1.2.2 Pile Driving Records

Keep a complete and accurate driving record of each pile driven. Indicate pile location, deviations from design location, diameter, original length, mudline elevation, tip elevation, cutoff elevation, penetration in blows per meter foot for the last 10 feet, hammer data including rate of operation, make, and size, and unusual pile behavior or circumstances experienced during driving such as redriving, heaving, weaving, obstructions, and unanticipated interruptions. Submit pile driving records to the Owner, a minimum of 24 hours after each day of pile driving.

3.1.3 Jetting of Piles

Water jets will not be permitted to assist in driving.



3.1.4 Spudding of Piles

Spudding will not be permitted.

3.1.5 Predrilling of Piles

Predrilling will not be permitted.

3.2 PROTECTION

3.2.1 Protection of Piles

Square the heads and tips of piles to the driving axis. Laterally support piles during driving, but do not unduly restrain piles from rotation in the leads. Where pile orientation is essential, take precautionary measures to maintain the orientation during driving. Driven batter piles of sufficient unsupported lengths to cause a measurable deflection must have free ends secured until piles are fixed in the structure to prevent excessive bending stresses. Handle, protect, and field treat piles in accordance with AWPA M4.

3.2.1.1 Damaged Piles

Driving of piles must not subject them to damage. Piles which are damaged, split, broomed, or broken by reason of internal defects or by improper driving below cutoff elevation so as to impair them for the purpose intended must be removed and replaced; a second pile may be driven adjacent thereto at the Contractor's expense. Minor damaged areas of treated piles must be field treated in accordance with AWPA M4.

3.2.1.2 On Site Application of Wood Preservatives

Field application of wood preservatives must be made in accordance with the pesticide label. All cuts, holes and injuries such as holes from removal of spikes or nails which may penetrate the treated zone must be field treated in accordance with AWPA M4.


3.3.1 Inspections

When inspections result in product rejection, the Contractor must promptly segregate and remove rejected material from the premises.



DIVISION 32

EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS


SECTION 32 12 17.01

BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT04/05

PART 1 GENERAL

Work under this section consists of providing all plant, labor and materials necessary for the preparation of bituminous concrete base course and surface course. All work shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of the "State of New Hampshire Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction".

1.1 REFERENCES




1.2 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITAL PROCEDURES:

SD-05 Design Data

Pavement mix design

Contractor to submit a NHDOT approved 50 design gyration mix.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBGRADE

Methods of construction of subbase shall be in accordance with NHDOT Section 304.

2.2 BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT

Pavement mix design and methods of construction of the pavement shall be in accordance with NHDOT Section 401. The base course mix shall be placed and compacted in a layer of 2-1/2 inches. The surface course shall be placed and compacted in a layer of 1-1/2 inches.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.



DIVISION 33

UTILITIES


SECTION 33 08 55

FUEL SYSTEM REPAIRS AND UPGRADE11/08

PART 1 GENERAL

This project consists of upgrading an existing marine fueling facility. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials to complete the work. The scope of work at the facility will include the installation of one (1) new piping intermediate transition sump, new gasoline and diesel fuel piping from the intermediate transition sump to the dispensers, new under dispenser containment (UDC) for two (2) dispensers, re-install two (2) existing owner supplied dispensers and new owner supplied fuel management system. The project will also include the removal of one (1) existing transition sump and existing associated dispenser fueling pad.

The project also includes the re-use of existing equipment, including but not limited to: Veeder Root TLS-350 monitoring system, existing USTs, existing submersible pumps, existing sections of piping and existing electrical conduits only as indicated. The Contractor shall work with the Owner to protect all equipment during demo and construction work to ensure re-use and re-installation to provide a fully functional fuel system.

The Contractor shall be a certified UST installer as required by Env-Or 400, and be certified by the tank, piping, monitoring system, and fuel management system manufacturer as manufacturer approved and certified installers. The Contractor will be responsible to install all equipment and provide documentation in a manner which allows the Owner to obtain the maximum manufacturer warranties.

The Engineer-of-Record for this project will be Stantec, Auburn, NH (Ronald Laurence 603-498-6355).

1.1 REFERENCES


NEW HAMPSHIRE DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES (NHDES)

ENV-OR 400 New Hampshire Code of Administrative Rules Underground Storage Tank Facilities

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Sumps

Manhole Covers

Product Piping



Duct Piping

SD-06 Test Reports

Line Quality Test Report

Bureau of Weights and Measures a Placed In Service/Inspection Report

SD-07 Certificates

Contractor Certifications


Closeout Documentation

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.1 Earthwork

2.1.1 Materials

The following materials shall be used for earthwork activities conducted under this Contract:

a. Provide fill, crushed stone, crushed gravel, and gravel in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.

b. Pea Gravel, as specified by the piping and sump manufacturer.

2.2 Intermediate Transition sump, dispenser sump, and related work

2.2.1 Materials

2.2.1.1 Sumps

Materials for the sump installations shall be as specified on the construction drawings and herein.

dispenser piping sumps shall be manufactured by Bravo, and made of fiberglass. Use Model Number specified on the construction drawings with appropriate watertight boots, mounting, hardware, gaskets, and watertight cover.Text

2.2.1.2 Manhole Covers

The manhole covers for the intermediate transition sumps shall be as specified in the construction drawings.

2.3 PIPING

2.3.1 Product Piping

Product Piping shall be 1.5-inch and 2-inch double wall flexible product pipe as manufactured by APT, Inc., APT XP-200-SC as indicated on the drawings.



2.3.2 Duct Piping

Duct Piping shall be flexible ducting as manufactured by the APT, Inc., 4-inch, APT DCT-400.

2.4 Electrical

Provide electrical work and devices in accordance with Division 26 - Electrical.

Junction/outlet boxes in Classified Hazardous Areas must be explosion proof, Class I, Division 1, and sized in accordance with NEC requirements.

2.5 Dispensing Equipment

The Contractor shall re-install two (2) existing owner supplied Wayne dispensers and dispenser containment in accordance with the construction drawings. Dispensers shall be piped to existing hose reels complete with 75' of hose for gasoline and diesel dispensers. The contractor shall furnish and install new hoses and nozzles on the existing hose reels.

The Contractor shall install the Owner supplied QT Pod fuel management console. The Contractor shall coordinate installation with the Owner, dispenser manufacturer and provide up to 8 hrs of training/startup/commissioning services. The Contractor shall supply all conduit, wire, disconnect relays, and networking devices necessary for a complete installation, and include manufacturer commissioning and on-site training.

The Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers and associated cabinets as specified in the construction drawings. Supply and install identification stickers on the outside of the cabinets.

2.6 Concrete

Provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 31 29 MARINE CONCRETE.

2.7 Additional Equipment

2.7.1 Signage

The Contractor shall add static discharge and no smoking signs as specified on the construction drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 Earthwork

3.1.1 Removal of Pavement

Immediately remove pavement as noted for removal from the Site and transport to an approved disposal facility.

Remove existing pavement from within the work area where excavation or fill is required or as noted on the design drawings for removal.

3.1.2 Excavation

Excavate earth as required for the work and as specified in the



construction drawings.

Maintain sides, slopes, and shoring of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling. All excavations shall comply with Code of Federal Regulations Title 29-Labor, Part 1926 (OSHA).

Stockpile excavated materials classified as suitable material so as not to interfere with the progression of the work, until required for fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage as specified under the Environmental Considerations section of this document.

Excavated materials classified as unsuitable material shall be immediately removed from the Site and transported to an approved facility.

Excavation Limits: Conform to elevations, lines, and limits as indicated on the construction drawings. Excavate vertically and shore as directed. Extend excavation a sufficient lateral distance to provide clearance to execute all required work activities.

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and/or the Engineer's representative upon completion of excavation operations. Work activities shall not proceed until the Engineer has inspected the excavation and provided clearance to execute work.

3.1.3 Dewatering

In the event that groundwater is encountered during earthwork activities, the Contractor shall provide dewatering services in accordance with the following specifications.

a. Prevent surface and subsurface water from flowing into excavations and trenches and from flooding the Site and surrounding areas.

b. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations or trenches. Remove water from all excavations immediately to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to the stability of subgrades and foundations. Furnish and maintain pumps, sumps, suction and discharge piping systems, and other system components necessary to convey the water away from the excavation. If groundwater is uncontaminated, all dewatering is included in this item. It groundwater treatment is being provided under another item, pumping of all groundwater to the frac tank or treatment system is included in this item.

3.1.4 Settlement

The Contractor shall maintain surveillance to detect any settlement of structures, concrete, or pavement and notify the Owner immediately if settlement occurs. Immediate action shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent further settlement.

3.1.5 Placing Fill and Backfill

Excavations and trenches shall be backfilled as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:

a. Acceptance by the Engineer of final excavation limits.

b. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground



utilities.

c. Removal of all trash and debris.

d. Acceptance by NHDES to backfill. A copy of the Backfill Approval form received from the NHDES must be submitted as part of closeout documentation.

Place backfill materials in layers not more than 12 inches thick in loose depth (6 inches for confined areas such as trenches) unless otherwise specified or approved. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to facilitate compaction to the required density. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or covered with ice.

Additional excavation resulting from the removal of unsuitable material and not specified on the construction drawings shall be backfilled with compacted structural granular material.

3.1.6 Compaction

Compact each layer of fill and backfill for the following area classifications to 95 percent of maximum density, and at a moisture content suitable to obtain the required densities, but at not less than 3 percent drier or more than 2 percent wetter than the optimum content as determined by ASTM D 698.

When the existing ground surface to be compacted has a density less than that specified for the particular area classification, break up and pulverize, and moisture condition to facilitate compaction to the required percentage of maximum density.

Where fill or backfill must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to the surface and to each layer of fill or backfill. Prevent ponding or other free water on surface subsequent to, and during compaction operations.

Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. Soil that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by disking, harrowing or pulverizing, until moisture content is reduced to a value which will permit compaction to the percentage of maximum density specified.

3.1.7 Protection

The contractor must protect graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep them free of trash and debris.

3.2 Underground Sumps and Related Work

Underground sumps and associated equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the construction drawings and manufacturer requirements. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary to accept, receive, offload, and store the any equipment at the time of delivery.

The Contractor shall provide and install the breaker, conduit and conductors from the existing electrical panel(s) to the sump locations and



devices as specified on the construction drawings. All wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC, paying particular attention to Chapter 514.

The Contractor shall test and verify operation of the existing overfill alarms in the location shown on the construction drawings. The contractor shall wire the emergency stop switch, provide sign, and provide circuitry in accordance with the construction drawings.

Rigidly adhere, step by step, to manufacturer's installation instructions for excavation, bedding, setting, anchoring, and backfill. Backfill with pea stone as specified by the tank manufacturer.

3.2.1 Piping

The Contractor shall install product and vent piping in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Piping shall be installed in trenches as indicated on the construction drawings using backfill and spacing as required by the manufacturer.

All product pipes shall be horizontal and slope down toward the piping sump at a minimum of 1/8-inch per foot, and terminate within the piping sumps and the dispenser sumps. All joints and sump entries shall be made with piping manufacturer supplied fittings and be liquid tight.

Product piping shall be connected to the tanks and fueling dispensers in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and applicable codes.

Piping Tests. Test gasoline and diesel piping in accordance with requirements on the construction drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and ENV-OR 400. Repair or replace piping as required to eliminate leaks and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. Piping must be tested prior to being secured in flexible ducting and buried. The Contractor shall submit, as part of the closeout documentation, a copy of all piping test results.

The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for piping systems materials and products.

The Contractor shall complete and submit to the manufacturer, the APT Piping Installation Checklist & Warranty Start-up Form. A copy of the completed checklist as well as confirmation of delivery of the checklist to the manufacturer shall be submitted as part of the closeout documentation.

3.3 Electrical

3.3.1 General

All circuits and systems shall be grounded in accordance with applicable sections of Articles 250 and 500 of the NEC.

Provide electrical work and devices in accordance with Division 26 - Electrical.

All control devices, motors or other apparatus, including non-current carrying enclosures, frames, and conduit for power and control, are to be permanently and effectively grounded.

the Contractor shall furnish and install an emergency electrical disconnect switch that provides a means to disconnect all electrical power to the



motor fuel dispensing equipment and all associated power, control, signal circuits and other electrical equipment in hazardous/classified areas during an emergency, as specified on the construction drawings.

The emergency electrical disconnect switch shall be located not less than 20 feet or more than 100 feet from the fuel dispenser.

All control panels shall include a circuit directory or circuit identification in accordance with the NEC/New Hampshire Electric Code. In addition, the inside panel of all enclosures shall include a diagrammatic depiction of the purpose of each device in that enclosure, as shown on the construction drawings. For example, each enclosure containing relays shall be labeled with a quick reference diagram showing the location of each relay and its purpose. Text associated with the diagram shall be Arial Font, or equivalent, no smaller than 18 point.

All conduits shall be labeled as indicated on the construction drawings. Labels shall be included on all interior and exterior conduits at the point of exit from a panel board or enclosure and at the point the conduit enters the ground, realizing that some or all conduits may be labeled more than once. Labels shall be affixed with a permanent paint marking pen. Adhesive paper/tape labels are not acceptable.

3.3.2 Environmental Monitoring System

The Contractor's monitoring system installer shall be a certified Veeder Root technician and installer. The existing Veeder Root system shall be re-configured in strict accordance with the construction drawings. The Contractor shall confirm wiring for all existing USTs to the existing monitoring console, including interstitial and piping sump sensors on both tanks. Except during sensor or probe cutover activities (assumed to be 8 hours or less), the existing UST system shall not be left unmonitored.

The Contractor shall install new monitoring equipment and leak sensors, in strict accordance with Veeder Root installation instructions as indicated on the Construction Drawings. All sump sensors shall be installed at the lowest part of the sump, and in an accessible location so as to facilitate future testing. Sensors shall be secured as shown on the construction drawings. Do not secure sensors to test boots.

The Contractor, as part of the initial startup and testing, shall perform the appropriate tests and complete an NHDES Annual Leak Monitoring Test Form. The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting the completed form to the NHDES and providing a copy with proof of delivery to the NHDES as part of the closeout documentation.

The Veeder Root system must be programmed with, at a minimum, the following parameters:

a. Proper tank size, product, and gallonage.

b. Water level warning at 1.5".

c. High water alarm at 1.5".

d. Overfill Alarm - 90%.

e. High-High Level - 95%



f. Delivery needed - 30%

g. Low Product level - site-specific (confirm with on-site representative).

h. All liquid sensors shall be identified as to their location. The Contractor shall post a laminated drawing adjacent to the monitor to indicate the location of the sensors by name and number. In addition, the Contractor shall fabricate and mount a sign stating "Tank Monitoring System" adjacent to the Veeder Root panel. Liquid sensors shall be as follows:

NEW SENSOR 1 INTERMEDIATE PIPING SUMP

NEW SENSOR 2 GAS DISPENSER SUMP

NEW SENSOR 3 DIESEL DISPENSER SUMP

The naming for all existing sensors shall be reviewed with the Owner prior to commissioning and revised upon request.

The Contractor shall provide, as part of the closeout documentation, the Veeder Root final setup print-out.

The Contractor shall locate and verify all existing monitoring equipment, including the existing Veeder Root console and all sensors, in accordance with the construction drawings.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of an authorized Veeder Root technician for system start-up and training of the on-site Owner manager and other key personnel. The Contractor shall supply as part of the closeout documentation a list of the individuals/personnel trained on the Veeder Root system signed by each individual.

The Contractor shall complete and submit to the manufacturer the Veeder Root Warranty Registration and Intrinsic Safety Checklist for new sensors. A copy of the completed checklist and/or confirmation of registration of the system with the manufacturer shall be submitted as part of the closeout documentation.

The Contractor shall supply, as part of the closeout documentation, any instruction bulletins, preventative maintenance schedules, operational instructions and parts lists associated with the Veeder Root system.

3.3.3 Fuel Management System (FMS)

The Contractor shall install the Owner-Supplied QT POD Fuel Management System (FMS) in accordance with the Construction Drawings and as outlined site-specifically below. The Contractor shall furnish and install conduit and manufacturer cable from the FMS to the existing Internet router\switch as shown on the construction drawings. All data wiring needs to be tested to the specification of the installation, i.e. CAT-5e etc. must pass the appropriate Line Quality Test in accordance with FMS manufacturer requirements. Test results shall be provided to the customer as part of the closeout documentation. Additionally, the Contractor shall install pedestal disconnect relays and all supporting electrical and telecommunications equipment as shown on the construction drawings. The Owner will be supplying the console/pedestal only.

The Contractor shall be responsible for commissioning the FMS and providing



all labor and materials to connect to the existing communication (phone, internet, etc.) to allow credit card transactions. The contractor shall ensure that a manufacturer representative shall visit the site prior to start-up to make certain that all correct parts are provided for a complete and operational system, and to assist and verify that the system is configured and operating properly.

3.3.4 Testing

The Contractor shall test all emergency, fire alarm, and monitoring switches, systems, and lights. Correct all discrepancies.

3.4 Dispensing Equipment

The Contractor shall install two (2) existing owner supplied Wayne dispensers in accordance with the construction drawings. Existing dispensers are equipped with pulsers. The contractor shall assess the condition of the dispenser (including pulsers) prior to construction and identify any issues with the re-installation, compatibility, and/or other issues prior to the start of work. Any discrepancies or repairs needed to complete the installation as designed shall be discussed with the Owner at the beginning of the project.

Dispensers shall be provided with appropriate manufacturer installed product label branded appropriately as "diesel" or "gasoline".

The Contractor shall install the QT PODfuel management systems in accordance with manufacturer instructions.

The Contractor shall furnish and install a liquid-tight containment sump below the dispensing pump in accordance with the Construction Drawings and the manufacturer's installation instructions. The containment sump shall be liquid tight and shall be hydrostatically tested before being backfilled. The Contractor shall submit, as part of the closeout documentation, a copy of all hydrostatic sump testing results.

The Contractor shall furnish and install filters for one (1) gasoline and one (1) diesel dispenser/pump. Activate the dispenser and inspect filter for leaks. Allow approximately 100 gallons of product to flow through the filter, then remove and replace filter again.

The Contractor shall calibrate and "seal" new dispensing meters in accordance with State of New Hampshire Weights and Measures regulations. Set the delivery calibration as close to "zero" as possible. The Contractor must return all motor fuel used in the calibration of the dispensing pump meters back to the appropriate storage tank. The Contractor must provide written documentation on the flow rate of each nozzle. The contractor shall complete and submit to the Bureau of Weights and Measures a Placed In Service/Inspection Report Form and provide a weights and measures certification sticker on the dispenser. The yellow owner/operator copy of the Placed In Service/Inspection Report form shall be submitted as part of the closeout documentation. An example of the weights and measures form is included as Attachment I.

The Contractor shall perform the following electrical circuit test for each dispenser:

a. Turn off all circuit breakers controlling the pump and check to assure that the pump is not running.



b. Confirm that the nozzle is in the dispenser boot with the boot electrical switch off.

c. Turn on circuit breaker controlling the pump and on the dispensing pump:

1. Remove nozzle, turn operating handle on, and dispense product to confirm hose is pressurized.

2. Assure that only the correct pump turns on.

d. If circuit disconnection or other problems are detected using the above procedure, make correction and repeat entire system checkout.

The Contractor shall add, where applicable, ULSD (15 ppm sulfur), 87 Octane, and ethanol (10%) stickers to the appropriate dispensers, as well as other stickers, signs and decals as depicted on the Construction Drawings.

The Contractor shall label each dispenser with the appropriate pump number (i.e., 1,2,3, etc.). The Contractor shall ensure that the pump number label is not affixed to the removable dispenser doors.

The Contractor shall supply, as part of the closeout documentation, any instruction bulletins, preventative maintenance schedules, operational instructions and parts lists provided with the pumps/dispensers.

3.5 Concrete

Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 29 MARINE CONCRETE.

3.5.1 Summary of Work

The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following:

a. Install concrete fueling pads as indicated on the Construction Drawings. The fueling pads shall be sloped to 6 inches above finished grade.

b. Install tank deadmen as indicated on the construction drawings.

All concrete material and workmanship shall include reinforcing steel, anchor bolts, form work, etc. and furnishing and finishing of the concrete structure.

All concrete shall be ready mixed as produced by a plant acceptable to the Engineer.

Forms or screeds shall be used for all concrete and shall be so constructed and placed that the resulting concrete will be of the shape, lines, dimensions, and to the elevations indicated on the Construction Drawings.

No concrete shall be placed until reinforcing anchors, etc. and other work required to be built into the concrete have been inspected and approved by the Engineer.

Reinforcing shall be formed and spaced, secured in place by rebar chairs to withstand all construction shocks. Other methods for securing rebar are not acceptable.



Consolidate placed concrete using mechanical vibrating equipment with hand-rodding and tamping, so that concrete is worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into parts of all forms.

The top face of concrete slabs shall be given a broom finish. Slabs shall be kept wet during the curing period and be covered with curing paper. Concrete shall be sealed within 24 hours of the pour.

The Contractor shall not drive on or allow others to drive on the concrete until sufficiently cured.

All grouting and repair work shall be done using an approved non-shrink grout mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

3.6 Contractor Certifications

The Contractor shall provide copies of the certificate or wallet card for the following certifications at the pre-construction meeting:

a. ICC Tank Installer Certification

b. ICC Tank Removal Certification (if applicable)

c. NH Licensed electrician

d. APT Piping Installer Certification

e. Veeder Root Technician Certification

3.7 Commissioning

The Contractor shall commission the UST systems and all other systems and equipment installed under this project. Commissioning shall include the startup, calibration, operational testing and verification of all systems.

3.8 Training

The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 2 hours of training to field operating personnel, including QT POD, safety system and dispenser operation. Additionally, the Contractor shall provide a detailed system "walk thru" to Owner and Engineer personnel. The Contractor shall supply, as part of the closeout documentation, a list of the individuals/personnel trained at each location, signed by each individual.

3.9 Closeout Documentation

The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with one (1) electronic copy of the following closeout documentation within 30 days of project completion. Closeout documents shall be organized into appropriate folders and in Portable Document Format (PDF) format. Index all documents. Include folders to accommodate folded or oversized sheets, CDs. Each CD shall be labeled on the cover and spine with the printed title "Closeout Documents", Project Name, Number, and Date. The Engineer reserves the right to withhold final payment to the Contractor until the Engineer is in receipt of all required documentation. A checklist of all required closeout documents is included as Attachment H. Note: Hard copies shall be provided for manufacturer provided hard copy operating manuals (generator, dispenser, etc.). When these bound books are provided, they need not be



provided electronically.

a. APT piping installation checklist with proof of delivery to manufacturer.

b. Veeder Root Installation and Intrinsic Safety Checklist with proof of delivery to manufacturer.

c. Veeder Root final setup printout.

d. NHDES backfill approval.

e. NHDES authorization to use system.

f. NHDES Conditional Construction Approval.

g. NHDES Annual Leak Monitoring Test Form with proof of delivery to NHDES.

h. NHDAM&F - Bureau of Weights & Measures Placed in Service/Inspection Report Form. A Bureau of Weights & Measures Placed in Service/Inspection Report Form is provided as Attachment I.

i. Results of all data wiring passing the appropriate line tests to the specification of the installation, i.e. CAT-5, CAT-5e etc.

j. A minimum of ninety-six (96) photographs of key phases of the project such as; foundation and bollard installation, system component and equipment installation (i.e. tank placement, conduit runs and connections, etc.).

k. As-Built Construction Drawings. All sheets shall be submitted, even if there are no changes, each signed and dated by the Contractor. If any sheets do not require editing, the Contractor shall indicate "No changes this sheet" then sign and date the notation.

l. Primary Tank and Piping Test Results and Test Results for all secondary containment structures or annuluses and all containment sumps.

m. Final NHDES Registration Form (signed by installer), including proof of submission to NHDES.

n. Warranties for all equipment and apparatus not already listed above. In general, any product/manufacturer documentation that was provided with the equipment shall be provided as part of the closeout documents.

o. Training certification for QT POD, Omntec and dispenser operation signed by the individuals trained on these systems.

p. All instruction bulletins, preventive maintenance schedules, operational instructions, and parts lists provided with the tanks, dispensers, and Veeder Root system (only 1 copy of owner operating manuals required).

q. General Release of Liens.

r. Release of Liens for all subcontractors.

s. Waste disposal documentation (if any).



t. Other environmental information (if any).

u. Copies of receipts for any keys, locks, or other equipment turned over to the Engineer. Signatures of recipient and printed names required.



DIVISION 35

WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION


SECTION 35 51 13.00 22

TIMBER FLOATING DOCK04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

Work under this section includes furnishing and installing a Timber Floating Dock System as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

The Timber Floating Dock System includes furnishing transportation, labor, equipment, materials, incidentals, and performing professional design services necessary for the design, fabrication, assembly, and installation of the concrete floating dock including appurtenances, as shown on the drawings. The work also includes engineering submittals and approvals, production quality control and records, and acceptance testing.

1.1 REFERENCES



AWPA C2 (2003) Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes







ASTM A193/A193M (2017) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service and Other Special Purpose Applications


ASTM D4020 (2011) Ultra-High-Molecular-Weight Polyethylene Molding and Extrusion

SECTION 35 51 13.00 22 Page 1


Materials

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

MIL-P-21035 (1991; Rev B; Notice 2 2003) Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair (Metric)

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

SD-03 Product Data

Mooring Hardware

SD-03 Product Data

Fender Elements

Pile Guide Assemblies

SD-03 Product Data

Floatation Drums

Timber Float Drawings

SD-05 Design Data

Timber Float System Design Calculations

SD-06 Test Reports

Timber preservative inspection

Delivery inspection list

SD-07 Certificates

SDS and CIS

Connection Hardware

Floating Dock Manufacturer

1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Open-stack untreated timber and lumber material on skids at least 12 inches aboveground, in a manner that will prevent warping and allow shedding of water. Close-stack treated timber and lumber material in a manner that will prevent long timbers or preframed material from sagging or becoming crooked. Keep ground under and within 5 feet of such piles free of weeds, rubbish, and combustible materials. Protect materials from weather. Handle treated timber with ropes or chain slings without dropping, breaking outer fibers, bruising, or penetrating surface with tools. Do not use cant dogs,

SECTION 35 51 13.00 22 Page 2


peaveys, hooks, or pike poles. Protect timber and hardware from damage.


1.4.1 SDS and CIS

Provide Safety Data Sheets (SDS) and Consumer Information Sheets (CIS) associated with timber pile preservative treatment. Contractor shall comply with all safety precautions indicated on SDS and CIS.

1.4.2 Timber Preservative Inspection

Submit the inspection report of an independent inspection agency, for approval by the Owner, that offered products complying with applicable AWPA Standards. Identify treatment on each piece by the quality mark of an agency accredited by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standard Committee.


Field inspect and submit a verification list of each treated timber member and each strapped bundle of treated lumber indicating the wording and lettering of the quality control markings, the species and the condition of the wood. Do not incorporate materials damaged in transport from plant to site. Inspect all preservative-treated wood, visually to ensure there are no excessive residual materials or preservative deposits. Material shall be clean and dry or it will be rejected due to environmental concerns.

1.4.4 Floating Dock Manufacturer

Submit documentation proving the floating dock manufacturer has a minimum of 8 years experience fabricating similar systems.

1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA

Submit the timber float system design calculations for approval.

1.5.1 Dock Loading

Design floating dock system and its mooring connections to withstand and transmit all expected loads over its design life. Design floating dock to withstand maximum shear, moment and torsional stresses in accordance with allowable working stress design.

1.5.2 Design Conditions

Vertical Loads: Dead load to include floating dock system self weight plus all permanently attached hardware, mooring hardware, fender system, pile guides and gangway dead load reaction. Live load of 50 psf uniformly distributed over entire float deck plus gangway live load reaction force; or 400 lb concentrated load as specified.

Horizontal Loads: 200 plf acting horizontally at deck level along entire length of float.

Cleat Loads: 5,000 lb. horizontal mooring line load applied in any direction and up to 45 degrees vertically.

Ladder Landing Platform Loads: 400 lb concentrated load located at any

SECTION 35 51 13.00 22 Page 3


location.

1.5.3 Performance

Timber float modules shall be sized so that a single module (excluding walers) is used to attain the indicated dock widths. The use of more than one module connected side by side to attain dock width is unacceptable.

Freeboard under dead load only shall not be less than 17 inches nor exceed 19 inches. Precast floats shall be designed to float level under dead load only. Maximum out of level tolerance for transverse slope is 1 inch per 10 feet. Freeboard under dead and live load shall not be less than 8 inches.

Special floats must be designed to support the additional concentrated loads as imposed by the gangway, guide pile assemblies, ladder platforms, and cleats. Modules with special loadings shall have the same freeboard as standard modules without special loading, so that there will be no residual stresses or tilting when modules are interconnected.

Flotation units shall be located within the structure so as to be capable of supporting a 300 lb moving point load in any area on a module without causing excessive rolling or tilting of the dock. The dock shall be capable of supporting a 400 lb point load at 1 foot from the offshore end of the dock and lose no more than 4 inches of freeboard; and supporting a 300 lb point load applied to the corner of the offshore end of the dock and lose no more than 2 inches of freeboard differential per 3 feet of dock width between the offshore corners.

Modular sections shall be 20 feet long and connected to provide a structural system of uniform strength and stiffness such that the completed floating dock performs as a single (monolithic) unit in resisting applied environmental and operational loads.

Floating dock must be fabricated with heavy commercial galvanized marine connections to provide an articulated system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TIMBER FLOAT DRAWINGS

Submit drawings of treated timber showing dimensions of cut, framed, or bored timbers. Drawings must show timber float framing layout and connections.

2.2 MATERIALS

2.2.1 Lumber and Timbers

2.2.1.1 Solid Sawn

Provide full size solid sawn lumber and timbers of Southern Pine No. 2 or Douglas Fir-Larch, select structural, and identified by the grade mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency using the specific grading requirements of an association recognized as covering the species used. The association or independent inspection agency shall be certified by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade the species used. Use commercial grade lumber for secondary members such as decking and joists.

SECTION 35 51 13.00 22 Page 4


2.2.1.2 Preservative Treatment

Fabricate lumber and timbers before preservative treatment. Each piece of treated lumber or timber shall be branded, by the producer, in accordance with AWPA M6. Treat wood to be used in contact with salt water or salt water splash in accordance with AWPA C2 (Material Subject to Marine Borer Exposure) with water-borne preservative. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of treated wood products.

Timber preservative treatment must be CCA - Chromate Copper Arsenate for marine use with retention of 2.5 pounds per cubic foot in accordance with AWPA P5. Field treat all cut and drilled timber surfaces with two coats of preservative containing copper nepthanate solution (min. 2 percent metallic solution). Allow sufficient time after first treatment for preservative to soak in (dry appearance) before second treatment is applied. Wood preservatives are restricted to pesticides.

2.2.2 Connection Hardware

All structural timber framing members must be connected using ASTM A36/A36Mstructural angles, plates, and connectors specifically designed for floating dock systems, with a minimum thickness of 3/8 inch.

All bolted connections must be made with ASTM A307, Grade A bolts. All connections must be made with 1/2 inch diameter bolts in 9/16 inch diameter holes and must have OG washers on both ends and nut, unless otherwise noted.

All fasteners and structural shapes, plates, and connectors must be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M unless otherwise noted. Lag screws securing the deck planks must be stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A193/A193M. Fabrication must be completed such that there is no direct contact between dissimilar metals.

2.3 FLOATATION DRUMS

Flotation drums must be Ace Roto-Mold float drums or approved equal. Submit specifications for approval. Determine size and layout of flotation drums to ensure the floating dock, when completed and installed, floats through all tidal cycles with no more than a 1/2 inch list over the full width of the floating dock and no more than 1 inch over the length of the floating dock. Floating dock must be fabricated to meet the freeboard requirements.

2.4 PILE GUIDE ASSEMBLIES

Submit pile guide assembly shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Pile guide assemblies must be adjustable longitudinally and transversely and be constrcuted of structural steel conforming to ASTM A36/A36M. Ensure that dimensions of the pile guide assembly is adequate for the installed guide piles so as to provide proper clearance between the guide assemblies and other structures during tidal fluctuations. Pile guide assemblies must be fabricated to resist all loading applied to the floating dock including berthing and mooring loads. Pile guide assemblies must include rubber elements to minimize impact loads.

Pile guide assembly wear pads must be low friction, ultra high molecular weight polyethylene ASTM D4020.

SECTION 35 51 13.00 22 Page 5


2.5 MOORING HARDWARE

Cleats must be 12 inches in length (length over horns) as called out on the drawings, galvanized, cast steel. Cleat anchorage must consist of galvanized through bolted steel hardware.

2.6 FENDER ELEMENTS

Fender system must include rub rails. The rub rail system must be a minimum of 3-1/2 inches continuous P-shaped cross section extruded rubber fendering attached along all edges as indicated on the drawings. Fendering must be resistant to ozone and ultraviolet deterioration and will not mark the hull of a vessel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION

Cut, bevel, and face timbers prior to plant preservative treatment. In addition to the contract clause entitled "Accident Prevention" provide protective equipment for personnel fabricating, field treating, or handling materials treated with creosote or water-borne salts. Refer to paragraph entitled "SDS and CIS."

3.1.1 Framing

Cut and frame lumber and timber so that joints will fit over contact surface. Secure timbers and piles in alignment. Open joints are unacceptable. Shimming is not allowed. Bore holes for drift pins and dowels with a bit 1/16 inch less in diameter than the pin or dowel. Bore holes for truss rods or bolts with a bit 1/16 inch larger in diameter than rod or bolt. Bore holes for lag screws in two parts. Make lead hole for shank the same diameter as shank. Make lead hole for the threaded portion approximately two-thirds of the shank diameter. Bore holes in small timbers for boat or wire spikes with a bit of the same diameter or smallest dimension of the spike to prevent splitting. Counterbore for countersinking wherever smooth faces are indicated or specified.

3.1.2 Bracing

Provide bracing of sufficient length to provide a minimum distance of 7D (D=bolt diameter) between outside bolt and end of brace. Care shall be taken to align bolts such that they are centered about the brace. Bracing shall bear firmly against timber to which secured. Place fillers to avoid bending the bracing more than one inch out of line when bracing bolts or other fastenings are drawn up tight. Built-up fillers will not be permitted. Make filler a single piece of the same treated lumber as that in the brace, with a width of at least 6 inches and a length of at least 12 inches.

3.1.3 Stringers

Place crown up and, if possible, the better edge of deck stringers down. Tops of stringers shall not vary from a plane more than will permit bearing of the floor on stringers. Butt-joint and splice outside stringers, but lap interior stringers to take bearing over full width of cap or floor beam at each end. Break joints if stringers cover two spans. Secure stringers using approved connections.

SECTION 35 51 13.00 22 Page 6


3.1.4 Decking

Make decking of a single thickness of plank supported by stringers or joists. Unless otherwise indicated, lay plank with heart side down and with tight joints. Spike each plank to each joist or nailing strip with at least two stainless steel spikes. Provide spikes at least 4 inches greater than the thickness of plank. Place spikes at least 2 1/2 inches from edges of the plank. Cut ends of planks parallel to center line of pier. Grade planks as to thickness and lay so that adjacent planks vary less than 1/16 inch.

3.1.5 Fastening

Vertical bolts shall have nuts on the lower end. Where bolts are used to fasten timber to timber, timber to concrete, or timber to steel, bolt members together when they are installed and retighten immediately prior to final acceptance of contract. Provide bolts having sufficient additional threading to provide at least 3/8 inch per foot thickness of timber for future retightening.

3.1.6 Guide Piles

Guide piles must be driven plumb in locations matching the fabricated pile guide assemblies. The pile locations must result in a floating dock located as depicted in the drawings through the full range of travel. Out of tolerance requires re-driving piles or re-working the pile guide assemblies.

3.2 FIELD TREATMENT

3.2.1 Timberwork

Field treat cuts, bevels, notches, refacing and abrasions made in the field in treated piles or timbers in accordance with AWPA M4, SDS and CIS. Wood preservatives are restricted use pesticides and shall be applied according to applicable standards. Trim cuts and abrasions before field treatment. Paint depressions or openings around bolt holes, joints, or gaps including recesses formed by counterboring. Paint depressions or openings around bolt holes, joints, or gaps including recessions formed by counterboring with preservative treatment used for timber.

3.2.2 Galvanized Surfaces

Repair and recoat zinc coating which has been field or shop cut, burned bywelding, abraded, or otherwise damaged to such and extent as to expose thebase metal. Thoroughly clean the damaged area by wire brushing and removetraces of welding flux and loose or cracked zinc coating prior to painting.Paint cleaned area with two coats of zinc oxide-zinc dust paint conformingto MIL-P-21035. Compound paint with a suitable vehicle in a ratio of onepart zinc oxide to four parts zinc dust by weight.


SECTION 35 51 13.00 22 Page 7